Home

Kaspersky PURE - Parent Directory

1. Updates of the Software via the Internet when and as the Rightholder publishes them on its website or through other online services Any Updates that you may receive become part of the Software and the terms and conditions of this Agreement apply to them Technical Support via the Internet and Technical Support telephone hotline Activation and Term If You modify Your Computer or make changes to other vendors software installed on it You may be required by the Rightholder to repeat activation of the Software or license key file installation The Rightholder reserves the right to use any means and verification procedures to verify the validity of the License and or legality of a copy of the Software installed and or used on Your Computer If the Software was acquired on a physical medium the Software can be used upon your acceptance of this Agreement for the period that is specified on the package commencing upon acceptance of this Agreement or as specified in additional agreement If the Software was acquired via the Internet the Software can be used upon your acceptance of this Agreement for the period that was specified during acquisition or as specified in additional agreement You have the right to use a trial version of the Software as provided in Clause 2 1 without any charge for the single applicable evaluation period 80 days from the time of the Software activation according to this Agreement provided that the trial versi
2. Prior to updating the databases Computer Protection creates their backup copies in case you may want to roll back to the previous database version You might need the update rollback see page 149 option if for example the databases have become corrupted during the update process You can easily roll back to the previous version and try to update the databases again You can copy the retrieved updates see page 151 to a local source while updating Computer Protection This service allows updating the databases and program modules on network computers to save Internet traffic You can also configure automatic update startup The My Update Center section of the main application window displays information about the current status of Computer Protection databases e release date and time e number of database records and their composition e databases status up to date out of date or corrupted My COMPUTER PROTECTION You can view the update report which contains full information about events that have occurred during the update task execution the Report link in the upper part of the window You can also see the virus activity overview at www kaspersky com by clicking the Virus activity review link IN THIS SECTION SC ERU 81e aU EE 149 Rolling back the last Update sssrinin a ne eee ee rer ee eee ene ee 149 TS Se UI A SO eeneg 150 Jamo ONO SONO eener ERE E EE 150 Regional settings cccccccesscecceeeeceese
3. 3 Inthe Restore window that will open in the list of backup copies select the versions of backup copies to delete To select several versions hold the CTRL key 4 Click Delete 5 Confirm deletion of the backup storage by clicking OK CONFIGURING APPLICATION SETTINGS The application settings can only be configured if Password Database is unlocked see page 214 When editing the settings you can do the following e set the time when the application is launched see page 236 e enable notifications see page 236 e specify the user name see page 227 that will be used by default when creating a new account e set the time when the password was stored in clipboard see page 237 e create a list of frequently used accounts see page 227 e create a list of ignored websites see page 228 for which Password Manager functions are not used e create a list of trusted websites see page 228 for which Password Manager will allow readdressing e specify a key combination to quickly launch Password Manager functions see page 229 e change the path for storing Password Database see page 230 backup copies see page 231 e change data encryption method see page 232 e set automatic locking of Password Database see page 233 e change Master Password see page 234 e set Access to Password Database see page 233 e change the location of Caption Button create a list of applications supporting Caption Button see page 237 e
4. Activities other than copying distribution and modification are not covered by this License they are outside its scope The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does 1 You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library s complete source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee 2 You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it thus forming a work based on the Library and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The modified work must itself be a software library b You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change c You must cause the w
5. To enable disable the heuristic analysis and to set the detail level for the scan please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Mail Anti Virus component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 Inthe window that will open on the General tab in the Scan methods block check uncheck the 4 Heuristic analysis box and specify the detail level for the scan SCAN OF COMPOUND FILES The selection of compound files scan mode affects the performance of Computer Protection You can enable or disable the scan of attached archives and limit the maximum size of archives to be scanned SW To configure the settings for the scan of compound files 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Mail Anti Virus component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 In the window that will open on the General tab select the scan mode of compound files ATTACHMENT FILTERING You can configure filtration conditions for email attachments Using the filter will add to your computer s security since ma
6. cccccceccccesesseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesaesaeeeeeeeeeaeaaaeeeeeeeseaeaaaeeeeeeessaaaeeeeeeeseaeseeeeeessssaaess 124 Determining spam and potential spam ratings sssessssesernseestrttrettttttsttttttttr ttre trt ttt nEEEEEEEEEEEEAEEEEEEAEEEEEEE EEEE E EEEren EEEn ee 124 Selecting the spam recognition algortthm nn 125 Using additional spam filtering features 125 Adding a label Ke de ER E 126 Filtering email messages at the server Mail Dispatcher ccccsecccceseeeeceeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeesaaeeeseaeeeessaeeeesaeeessaes 126 Excluding Microsoft Exchange Server messages from the ecan 127 Actions to be performed ON epam tAr EEEEErAEEEEEEEEOSAEEEEEEEDSEEEEEEEEEOAEEEEEEEEOSEEEEEEEEESEEEEEEEEEE EEEE 127 Restormgdetault Anti Spam SO INS ses cseticse tn ceractaentictdasdeeedenncanfatcananceeectaausatesdoandseucesiatoons ocaastane sides EE ERa 130 COMPONENT OPERATION ALGORITHM Anti Spam work consists of two stages 1 Application of strict filtering criteria to a message These criteria allow a quick determination as to whether the message is spam or not Anti Spam assigns to the message spam or not spam status the scan will be stopped and the message will be transferred to the mail client for processing see Steps 1 through 5 below 2 Inspection of messages which have passed strict selection criteria during previous steps Such messages cannot be unambiguously considered spam Therefore Anti Spam has to calculate for the
7. e Full Scan When connecting removable drives the application performs a full scan of files stored on them according to the Full Scan task s settings e Quick Scan When connecting removable drives the application scans all files according to the Quick Scan task s settings SR To use the functionality for scanning of removable media at connection perform the following steps 1 Open the mainapplication window and click the Settings link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe left part of the window select the Scan My Computer section 3 Inthe Scan removable drives on connection block select the action and define the maximum size of a drive to scan in the field below if necessary SCAN OF COMPOUND FILES A common method of concealing viruses is to embed them into compound files archives databases etc To detect viruses that are hidden this way a compound file should be unpacked which can significantly lower the scan speed For each type of compound file you can select to scan either all files or only new ones To do so use the link next to the name of the object It changes its value when you left click on it If you select the mode of scanning new and changed files only See page 139 you will not be able to select which types of compound files are to be scanned You can restrict the maximum size of the compound file being scanned Compound files with the size larger than the specified value will not be scanned Large files
8. e potentially infected status when the scan cannot determine if the object is infected This means that the email or attachment contains a sequence of code from an unknown virus or modified code from a known virus H Computer Protection detects infected or potentially infected objects when scanning the email it will notify you about them You should respond to the threat by selecting an action on the object Computer Protection selects the Prompt for action option as the action on a detected object which is the default setting You can change the action For example if you are sure that each detected object should be attempted to disinfect and do not want to select the Disinfect action each time you receive a notice about the detection of an infected or suspicious object in a message you should select the following action Do not prompt Disinfect Before attempting to disinfect or delete an infected object Computer Protection creates a backup copy of it to allow later restoration or disinfection If you work in automatic mode see section Step 3 Selecting protection mode on page 41 Computer Protection will automatically apply the action recommended by Kaspersky Lab specialists when dangerous objects are detected For malicious objects this action is Disinfect Delete if disinfection fails for suspicious objects Skip To change the specified action to be performed on detected objects 1 Open the main application window and click th
9. temporarily disable or enable the real time protection components This menu option does not affect the application s updates or the execution of virus scans e Pause Enable My Parental Control temporarily disable enable control of all users This menu item is only available if the Parental Control component is installed e Block network traffic Unblock network traffic temporarily block unblock all the computer s network connections e Exit close Kaspersky PURE when this option is selected the application will be discarded from the Computere RAM Update Full Scan Virus Scan My Virtual Keyboard Kaspersky PURE Settings About Pause protection Pause My Parental Control Block network traffic Exit Figure 3 Context menu If a virus scan task is running at the moment you open the context menu its name as well as its progress status percentage complete will be displayed in the context menu By selecting the task you can go to the main window containing a report about the current results of its execution KASPERSKY PURE MAIN WINDOW The main application functions are grouped in the main window The main window can be divided into two parts From the top part of the window you can switch to the main application functions resume pause protection run a virus scan launch data backup etc The following main Kaspersky PURE components are located in the top part of the window e My Co
10. 3 In the window that will open enter the password to obtain access to the container 4 Inthe Container settings window that will open click the Change password link 5 Inthe Change password window that will open fill in all fields My ENCRYPTION CREATING SHORTCUT TO ACCESS THE CONTAINER To ease the management of data you can create a desktop shortcut to access the container You can use the shortcut to quickly open connect and disconnect the container irrespective of the actual location of the container file if you have access to this file from your computer You can create a shortcut during container creation or at any time after the creation of the container SR To create a shortcut to access the container please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Data encryption button 2 Inthe window that will open select a disconnected container and click the Configure button 3 Inthe window that will open click the Create desktop shortcut link MY PASSWORD MANAGER Password Manager stores and protects all your personal data e g passwords user names Internet pager accounts contacts phone numbers etc Password Manager sticks passwords and accounts to Microsoft Windows applications and web pages for which they are used All information is stored in encrypted form in the Password Database access to which is protected by a Master Password Personal data is easily accessible if the Pass
11. A Self Defense ts disabled Self Defense blocks attempts of other applications to modify the files and registry keys created during Kaspersky PURE installation The feature is currently disabled and therefore the application may be rendered inoperable You are advised to enable Self Defense Enable Self Defense Anti Spam training required Training on 50 not spam emails is required Figure 2 Solving security problems The tab shows the list of current problems The problems are sorted with regard to their criticality first the most critical ones i e with red status icon then less critical ones with yellow status icon and the last information messages A detailed description is provided for each problem and the following actions are available e Eliminate immediately Using the corresponding buttons you can switch to fix the problem which is the recommended action e Postpone elimination f for any reason immediate elimination of the problem is not possible you can put off this action and return to it later To do so click the Hide message button Note that this option is not available for serious problems Such problems include for example malicious objects that were not disinfected crashes of one or several components or corruption of the program files To make hidden messages re appear in the general list check the W Show hidden messages box GETTING STARTED PROTECTION STATUS Performance
12. ADDING PERSONAL DATA Personal data can be added if Password Database is not locked see page 214 When launching an application web page a new account is recognized automatically if it was not found in the Password Database Following authorization in the application on the web page Password Manager can then add personal data to the Password Database You can add the following personal data to the Password Database e Account see page 215 e User name see page 219 By default Password Manager provides the option to create an account with one user name An additional user name is used when applications or web pages allow multiple user names to be created for accessing their resources e Identities See page 220 Used to store data such as sex date of birth contact information phone number place of work Internet pager number homepage address etc To separate personal and business information you can create several identity cards e Group of accounts see page 220 Used to organize accounts in the Password Database ACCOUNT Password Manager automatically recognizes a new account if it is not found in the Password Database After authorization in the application on the web page Password Manager offers to save data in the Password Database You can also add a new account to the Password Database manually Account contains the following data user name several user names password application path Int
13. For the files saved or modified in safe mode to be available when working in standard mode you should use the Safe Run Shared Folder created exclusively for those files and available both in safe mode and in standard mode When clearing safe mode data see page 98 the files stored in this folder will not be deleted You are advised to use Microsoft Windows standard mode to install the applications with which you wish to work in safe mode in the future IN THIS SECTION Running an application in safe Lee E 95 Creating a shortcut for program execution ccccccccccccceccesaeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaasusadeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaaaasaaeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaaas 96 Creating the list of applications running in safe mode cc nn nn nnn nn nn nn i iii iiiiiiiiinneneennnenneeenees 96 selecting the mode running an application oases cevevcecceacencetveianecetssseiasvonscen ceeerscetvelececsadevbenicehetensxssnecetindanecexedebontvehicenskeeth 97 Selecting the mode clearing Safe mode data 97 Usmo asnhared Todel E 98 Clearing the safe mode data EE 98 RUNNING AN APPLICATION IN SAFE MODE If the Always run in safe mode option is not enabled for the application it can be run in safe mode using one of the following ways e from the Microsoft Windows context menu e from the main window of My Computer Protection see section My Computer Protection on page 53 e using an existing shortcut See section Creating a shortcut for program
14. My SYSTEM TUNE UP Ensuring computer s security is a difficult task that requires the expertise in operating system s features and in ways of exploiting its weak points Additionally volume and diversity of information about system security makes its analysis and processing difficult To facilitate solving specific tasks of providing computer security Kaspersky PURE includes the following wizards and tools Browser Configuration Wizard see page198 which performs the analysis of the Microsoft Internet Explorer settings by assessing them primarily in relation to the security e System Restore Wizard see page 199 which removes traces left by malicious objects in the system e Privacy Cleaner Wizard see page 204 which finds and removes traces of user s activities in the system and the operating system settings which allow gathering information about the user s activities e Rescue Disk see page 199 which is designed to scan and disinfect infected x86 compatible computers It should be used when the infection is at such level that it is deemed impossible to disinfect the computer using anti virus applications or malware removal utilities e Permanently Delete Data see page 202 which prevents unauthorized restoration of deleted files e Unused Data Clearing Wizard see page 203 which deletes temporary and unused files requiring considerable volume of disk space or being at risk of a malware impact SEE ALSO PTY SUS ri
15. SW To use the option of converting banners IP addresses into domain names or domain names into IP addresses please do the following 1 2 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Banner component In the Scan methods section check ie Resolve IP addresses to domain names box for the component selected CREATING THE LIST OF ALLOWED BANNER ADDRESSES A user creates the white list of banners while working with Computer Protection if certain banners should not be excluded This list contains the masks for allowed banner ads To add anew mask to the white list please do the following 1 2 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Banner component In the Additional section check he Use White list of addresses box for the component selected and click the Settings button In the White list window that will open click the Add link Enter a mask of an allowed banner in the Address mask URL window that will open To stop using a mask you do not have to delete it from the list unchecking the GC box next to it renders it inactive
16. disable Firewall change the network s status See page 100 extend the range of network addresses see page 101 select the mode of notification about changes in network see page 101 specify the advanced component settings see page 102 specify the Firewall rules see page 102 e create a packet rule see page 103 e create a rule for the application see page 103 e use the Rule Creation Wizard see page 104 My COMPUTER PROTECTION e select the action to be performed by the rule See page 105 e edit the network service settings see page 105 e select the range of addresses see page 106 e change the rule s priority To disable the Firewall please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the Firewall component 4 Uncheck he Enable Firewall box in the right part of the window SW To proceed to editing the Firewall settings please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the Firewall component 4 Inthe right part of the window click the Settings button and make the required changes of the component set
17. e Length the number of symbols in the password This value can range from 4 to 99 symbols The longer the password the more secure it is considered to be e A Z uppercase letters e a z lowercase letters e 0 9 numbers e Special symbols special symbols e Exclude similar symbols the use of identical symbols in a password is not permitted Password generator can be used in solving the following tasks e when creating a new account in an application on a website e when adding an account see page 215 user name see page 219 in Password Manager manually SW To use Password generator when creating a new account in an application on a website please do the following 1 Open the context menu of Password Manager and select Password Generator In the Password generator window specify the number of symbols in the password in the Password length field If necessary you can specify additional settings for Password generator under Additional by checking unchecking the box A next to the required settings Click Generate The generated password is displayed in the Password field To view the generated password check the box H Show password Paste the password to clipboard by using the button then enter the password in the password input field in the application on the web page by pressing CTRL V The generated password is stored in clipboard for a specified period of time before being deleted Ch
18. e Next accept the action and move to the next step of the installation process e Back return to the previous step of the installation process e Cancel cancel the installation e Finish complete the application installation procedure Let us take a closer look at each step of the installation procedure IN THIS SECTION Step 1 Verifying that the system satisfies the installation requirements cccccseeeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeecaeaeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 31 Step 2 Selecting the type of the mstallaton nrn t ktere reeennnn ennen 31 Step 3 Accepting the License Agreement 31 Step 4 Participating in the Kaspersky Security Network program 32 Step 5 Selecting the destination folder ccccccccccccceeccesaeneecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeuuudeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaaaaaaaueaeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaaas 32 Step 6 Selecting application components for the installation ccccccccccccceeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeaasseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaas 32 Step 7 Searching for other anti virus applications ccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeeeaaeseeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeesaaaaceeeeeeeessaaaseeeeeeeeas 33 Step 8 Disabling Microsoft Windows firewall ccccccccccccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeaaseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaaaaaaaasaeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesaas 33 Step 9 Final preparation for installation cccccccccccecccccceceeeeeseeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeasueeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaageeee
19. 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the File Anti Virus component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 Inthe window that will open on the Performance tab in the Scan of compound files block check the boxes for the types of compound files to be scanned by the application SCANNING LARGE COMPOUND FILES When large compound files are scanned their preliminary unpacking may require a long time This term may be reduced if files are scanned in the background If a malicious object is detected while working with such a file Computer Protection will notify you about it To reduce the delay when accessing compound files one may disable unpacking the files of a size which Is larger than the specified value When files are extracted from an archive they will always be scanned SW For Computer Protection to unpack large sized files in the background 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the File Anti Virus component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 In the window that will open on the Performance tab in the Scan of compound files block click the Additional button 6 Inth
20. 4 Inthe lt Scan task name gt list of objects window that will open create a list using the Add Edit Delete links To exclude any objects from the list of objects to be scanned uncheck the boxes next to them CHANGING SECURITY LEVEL The security level is a preset collection of scan settings Kaspersky Lab s specialists distinguish three security levels You should make the decision on which level is to select based on your own preferences You can select one of the following security levels e High It should be enabled if you suspect that your computer has a high chance of becoming infected e Recommended This level is suitable in most cases and is recommended for using by Kaspersky Lab specialists e Low If you are using applications requiring considerable RAM resources select the Low security level because the application puts least demand on system resources in this mode If none of the preset levels meet your needs you can configure the scan settings yourself As a result the security level s name will be changed to Custom To restore the default scan settings select one of the preset security levels SW To change the defined security level perform the following actions 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe left part of the window select the required task in the Scan My Compute
21. Mail beginning with Hi and an exclamation mark in any part of the message is spam e hand Mail beginning with Jan personal address followed by any character is spam e han An email message containing the van phrase is spam If characters and are included into a phrase then they should be preceded by the character to prevent their misrecognition in Anti Spam Then two characters are used instead of one and SW To create the list of blocked phrases 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Spam component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 In the window that will open on the Exact methods tab in the Consider message as spam block check the If it contains blocked phrases box and click the Select button 6 Inthe List of blocked phrases window that will open click the Add link 7 Inthe Blocked phrase window that will open enter a line or a mask CREATING THE LIST OF OBSCENE PHRASES The list contains obscene phrases that indicate a soam message with high probability if present Kaspersky Lab specialists have compiled the list of obscene phrases included in the distribution package of Computer Protection You can edit this list You can also use masks for phrases When ent
22. e Application Activity Control see page 86 The component logs the actions performed by applications in the system and manages the applications activities based on which group they belong to A set of rules is defined for each group of applications These rules manage applications access to various resources e Digital Identity Protection see page 89 Application Control manages rights of applications to perform actions on the user s personal data They include files folders and registry keys which contain the settings and important data of the most frequently used applications as well as user s files My Documents folder cookies information about the user s activity e Safe Run see page 95 Computer Protection ensures the maximum security of operating system objects and the user s personal data by running unknown applications in the protected virtual environment THE CONCEPT OF KASPERSKY PURE NETWORK MONITOR Network Monitor is a tool used to view information about network activities in real time To run Network Monitor use the Network Monitor link in the Computer Protection main window The window that will open will provide the information grouped on the following tabs e The Connections and ports tab lists all the opened ports and active network connections currently established on your computer e The Firewall rule processing log tab displays information about the use of packet rules for applications e The
23. AN Ee E Uu EE 195 Saving and downloading Parental Control settngs 196 MY VS CR ET 198 Conigunng the DROW EE 198 Kellen E 199 ee EE 199 EE 200 Booting the computer using the rescue dek 201 Permanently Delete Data 202 Delete Unused Da eisacecitdatecta ences ten stetacreocecedecnteescel seteiscee aea e ge ie aaia aiiai 203 Privacy leaner Ee WE 204 CONTENTS MY WR AL VE VB OAD EE 205 MEN CRYPTON EE 206 CE lee e A E EN E E E E E E E E E E a 206 Connecting and disconnecting Container 207 Adding files into Container 208 SONU Wiert Bei E et 208 Creating shortcut to ACCESS the container nenn 209 MY PASSWORD MANAGER EE 210 My Password Manager interface ccccccssseeecsseeeeceeeeeeaeeeeesseeeesaeeeeaeeeeessaeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeseaeeeeseueeessageeesaneeesseneeesses 211 Notification area won 211 Context menu of My Password Manager cccccccccssseeecceeeceeeeeeeeceeeeesaeeeseceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesseseeeeeeeesssaaaseeeeeeeeeas 211 My Password Manager wimndow n Ennan Een aneneen 212 Application settings WINdOW sassnciencedntescsentvendaieavenesces wentatincticpaanetyndsanenesasantxendaletesacaatneedactessendoceauerseceskapoient vanes 212 AM UO BURO eane E A EA E E E E E E E 213 Conigu uration Wizard cenin ceeds cacecavseaeoccces idacentguceernchteactneeedactenbieibendeeGadechseacsaseednddeeticedeeede LRE ETE E EEEE 213 Password Database management 214 Accessing Password MEN E 214 Adding perona Gala EE 215 ACCO ea E R
24. If an update was skipped for any reason for example the computer was not on at that time you can configure the task to start automatically as soon as it becomes possible To do so check the X Run skipped tasks box in the bottom part of the window This checkbox is available for all schedule options except Hours Minutes and After application startup RUNNING UPDATES UNDER A DIFFERENT USER S ACCOUNT By default the update procedure is run under your system account However Computer Protection can update from a source for which you have no access rights for example from a network folder containing updates or authorized proxy user credentials You can run Computer Protection update under the account of a user who has the necessary rights SW To start the update under a different user s account 1 2 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window Select the My Update Center section in the left part of the window Click the Settings button in the Run mode section In the window that will open on the Run mode tab in the User account block check the Run task as box Specify the user name and password CONFIGURING COMPUTER PROTECTION SETTINGS The application settings window is used for quick access to the main Computer Protection settings ey Settings My Computer Protection Oo x d as p ers KY l
25. Messages for which the rating value is less than 60 are considered useful mail You can modify the specified value Spam rating defines the value that will cause assignment of the Spam status to a message if exceeded Any message with rating value higher than the one specified will be perceived as spam By default the spam rating is 90 for the Recommended level It means that any message with the rating higher than 90 will be marked as spam You can modify the specified value SW To edit the set values of spam and probable spam ratings perform the following steps 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window My COMPUTER PROTECTION In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Spam component Click the Settings button for the component you have selected In the window that will open on the Expert methods tab in the Spam rate block fine tune the soam and probable spam ratings SELECTING THE SPAM RECOGNITION ALGORITHM Anti Spam mail analysis is based on the selected recognition algorithms Heuristic analysis Anti Spam analyzes messages using heuristic rules Heuristic analysis is always enabled Image recognition GSG technology Anti Spam uses GSG technology to detect graphic spam Analysis of attachments of RTF format Anti Spam analyzes documents attached to messages c
26. THE CONCEPT OF KASPERSKY PURE Kaspersky PURE is a program designed for comprehensive protection of computers within your home network Kaspersky PURE includes the following functional modules e My Computer Protection see page 26 which protects your computer against known and unknown threats e My Backup see page 24 which quickly restores your data if data loss occurs e My Encryption see page 25 which protects your confidential data against unauthorized access e My Parental Control see page 25 which protects children and teenagers from threats related to computer and Internet usage e My Password Manager see page 25 which ensures safe storage of passwords and other account data and confidentiality while filling various authorization forms e My Control Center see page 25 which allows to remotely manage the security of networked computers e My System Tune Up see page 26 which is used for optimizing the operating system settings and performing specific computer security tasks IN THIS SECTION MV TN D 24 W ER Rene E 25 deeler EE 25 dee OUO Le EE 25 NIY e te Ee et 25 My System TUNE UD sson eo E EAEE OAR EE EERE ESE EEO E EE EOR RENERE EEEE 26 VC eelef FTO e I E 26 My BACKUP Data stored on a computer can be lost due to various issues such as impact of a virus information modification or deletion by another user etc To avoid losing important information you should regularly back up data Backup copying
27. The following possible actions are available e Rescan quarantine The quarantine area contains objects that have been flagged by the application as suspicious or possibly infected Possibly after database update the product will be able to recognize the threat unambiguously and neutralize it Due to this fact the application scans quarantine objects after each update For this reason the application scans quarantined objects after each update Scanning may change their status Some objects can then be restored to the previous locations and you will be able to continue working with them e Copy updates to folder If computers are linked in a home LAN updates do not need to be downloaded and installed on each computer individually You can use the update distribution service to save network bandwidth as the service ensures that the updates are downloaded only once SW In order to scan quarantined files after the update 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Select the My Update Center section in the left part of the window 4 Check the Rescan quarantine after update box in the Additional section UPDATE FROM A LOCAL FOLDER The procedure of retrieving updates from a local folder is arranged as follows 2 One of the computers on the network retrieves the Computer Protection update package from Kas
28. To prevent unauthorized access to your personal data when you are away from your computer Password Manager automatically locks the Password Database To use your personal data unlock Password Manager see page 214 Password Manager helps you use see page 221 and manage your personal data To find any information you have saved start the password search see page 222 APPLICATION INTERFACE Kaspersky PURE has a fairly simple and easy to use interface This section will discuss its basic features in detail IN THIS SECTION Nonncaton area ICON EE 50 COME ME EEN 50 Kaspersky PURE Tiet ele E 51 Visite lei 55 Applicaton setings ee EE 56 NOTIFICATION AREA ICON Immediately after installing Kaspersky PURE its icon will appear in the Microsoft Windows taskbar notification area This icon is an indicator of the application s operation It also reflects the protection status and shows a number of basic functions performed by the application If the icon is active Wi color protection is fully enabled or some of its components are running If the icon is inactive Fa black and white all protection components are disabled The Kaspersky PURE icon changes depending on the operation being performed K email being scanned W web traffic being scanned databases and application modules update is in progress Ws computer should be rebooted to apply updates h a failure occurred in the operation of some appl
29. To use events search 1 Open the main application window and click the Report link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe window that will open on the Report tab click the Detailed report button 3 In the window that will open right click the area to the right of the heading of any table column Select the Search item from the context menu 4 Specify the search criteria in the Search window that will open BACKUP COPY During the backup process backup copies of the chosen files are created in a special storage area Backup storage is a specially assigned area of disk space or a data storage media Storages are used by the backup tasks for storing backup copies of data When creating a storage area see section Creating a backup storage area on page 181 the user selects the data medium specifies the name of the new storage area and the settings for storing backup copies Also stored data may be password protected against unauthorized access After that service information about the storage area is recorded onto the data medium To carry out data backup backup tasks are created see section Creating a backup task on page 183 Backup task is a user defined collection of parameters that determines the selection of data subject to backup storage area for backup copies and backup conditions Tasks are restartable manually or by schedule Backup copies of files created within the framework of a single task are stored in
30. all applications can be divided into three groups e Safe This group includes applications developed by well known vendors and provided with digital signatures You may allow such applications to perform any actions in the system e Dangerous This group includes currently known threats Activity of applications included in this group must be blocked e Unknown This group may include applications developed by unknown developers which are not provided with a digital signature Such applications may or may not harm the system You can make a firm decision if it is safe to use applications in this group only after you run them and analyze their behavior Before you decide whether an unknown application is safe or unsafe it would be reasonable to restrict its access to the system resources The Application Control component logs the actions performed by applications in the system and manages the applications activities based on which group see section Application groups on page 88 they belong to A set of rules is defined for each group of applications see section Application Control rules on page 90 These rules manage applications access to various resources such as e files and folders e registry keys e network addresses e execution environment When an application accesses a resource the component checks if the application has the required access rights and performs the action determined by the rule SW To modify t
31. 0 EE 276 Bleu rue 276 BN He ye Da Her EE 276 MOLE We e EE 277 Windows Installer XML WiX 2 0 library ccc ccccccccccccseseeeseeeeeeeececceeeeeeseeeeeseessssssceeeeceeessssseaaeesseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeseeaas 277 EE Hee 280 SEENEN tee 280 KE te leet 280 EE eege 280 RFC1321 based RSA free MD5 Iran 281 Windows Template Library WTL Zb 281 KPE GODA arere E E E E E A EA E E E E A 284 E SO WOR EE 285 CIDA Y SE 285 RI ee E GEAR E 1g ETE ASAE ANE E AS AEAEE E EAN E AT 286 EZ 2 MO ZI 2 1 0 5 Dra y EE 290 USO lees RI ei EE 291 Bei tele OL Ser NOLAN EE 291 el Me A EE 292 Ier He Hen EE 292 Other HATO ATION EEN 292 ABOUT THIS GUIDE Kaspersky PURE User Guide contains information about the Kaspersky PURE s principles of operation the main tasks of home network protection and the application configuration This Guide is created for all those who use the Kaspersky PURE application for protecting computers on home networks Kaspersky PURE User Guide consists of the following main sections e Obtaining information about the application see page 20 This section describes various sources of information about how to purchase install and use Kaspersky PURE e The concept of Kaspersky PURE see page 24 This section describes the general concept of comprehensive protection of your home network using various features of the application e Installing the application see page 30 This section provides step by step instruc
32. 64 bit systems To change the destination folder click the Browse button and specify a different folder in the window that will open You can also specify a new installation path by entering it in the Destination folder field Please remember that if you enter the full path to the installation folder manually it should not contain more than 200 characters or include any special characters Click the Next button The installation will continue STEP 6 SELECTING APPLICATION COMPONENTS FOR THE INSTALLATION This step is available if the custom selection of Kaspersky PURE is selected see page 31 At this step you can select the application components that will be installed on your computer By default all the protection components and the program kernel are selected To make a decision on installing a component you can view a brief description of the component you have selected shown in the bottom part of the window and find out how much free disk space is required to install this component To select a component for installation open the menu by left clicking the icon next to the name of the component and select the This feature will be installed on the local hard drive item INSTALLING KASPERSKY PURE ON YOUR COMPUTER To obtain detailed information about free disk space on your computer click the Volume button Information will be displayed in the window that will open To cancel the installation of a component select th
33. ACCESS THE SYSTEM REGISTRY DETECTED When Proactive Defense detects an attempt to access system registry keys a special notification pops up containing e The registry key being accessed e Full name of the file of the process that initiated the attempt to access the registry keys and a path to it e Possible responses e Allow allows to execute the dangerous action once e Block blocks the dangerous action once To perform the action you have selected automatically every time this activity is initiated on your computer check the Create a rule box If you are sure that any activity by the application that attempted to access system registry keys is not dangerous add the application to the trusted application list NETWORK ACTIVITY OF AN APPLICATION HAS BEEN DETECTED If any network activity of an application is detected default option for the applications included in the Low Restricted or High Restricted groups see section Application groups on page 88 a notification will be displayed on the screen A notification will be displayed if My Computer Protection is running in interactive mode see section Using interactive protection mode on page 156 and if no packet rule has been created for the application whose network activity had been detected see page 103 The notification contains e Activity description name of the application and general features of the connection it initiates Generally the connection type l
34. ALY eae E R E E A E A E 286 BADADO KO SID IY EE 290 Real EASA E e AE EAE E EA E E E EE A E T E E A ET E AE EEE E T 291 POCO BUN aT IDLA saraga ee ea EEE E A E RE E E 291 Se CR e EE 292 Te RORE E EE 292 USING THIRD PARTY CODE UIST WOT RUA ose E sect ges oct encase ce one A E E E E E re sects eee ate A E AN A A E A E A E cena A T 292 AGAVA CLIBRARY Agava C program library developed by OOO R Alpha is used to check digital signature CRYPTO C LIBRARY DATA SECURITY SOFTWARE LIBRARY To create and check the digital signatures the Crypto C data security software library is used developed by CryptoEX http www cryptoex ru FASTSCRIPT 1 9 LIBRARY When creating the application the FastScript library copyright Fast Reports Inc has been used All rights reserved PCRE 7 4 7 7 LIBRARY Library pcre 7 4 copyright 1997 2008 University of Cambridge under BSD license was used during application development PCRE is a library of functions to support regular expressions whose syntax and semantics are as close as possible to those of the Perl 5 language Release 5 of PCRE is distributed under the terms of the BSD license as specified below The documentation for PCRE supplied in the doc directory is distributed under the same terms as the software itself Written by Philip Hazel lt ph10 cam ac uk gt University of Cambridge Computing Service Cambridge England Phone 44 1223 334714 Redistribution
35. ANY PART THEREOF In no event will Sun Microsystems Inc be liable for any lost revenue or profits or other special indirect and consequential damages even if Sun has been advised of the possibility of such damages Sun Microsystems Inc 2550 Garcia Avenue Mountain View California 94043 TINICONV 1 0 0 LIBRARY The tiniconv 1 0 0 library was used during application development Copyright C Free Software Foundation Inc author Roman Rybalko http sourceforge net projects tiniconv under GNU LGPL 2 1 license http www gnu org GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE v 2 1 Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it By contrast the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software to make sure the software is free for all its users This license the Lesser General Public License applies to some specially designated software packages typically libraries of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it You can use it too but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case based on the explanations below When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom of use not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies
36. Agreement under which it was received In addition after a new version of the Agreement is published Contributor may elect to distribute the Program including its Contributions under the new version Except as expressly stated in Sections 2 a and 2 b above Recipient receives no rights or licenses to the intellectual property of any Contributor under this Agreement whether expressly by implication estoppel or otherwise All rights in the Program not expressly granted under this Agreement are reserved This Agreement is governed by the laws of the State of New York and the intellectual property laws of the United States of America No party to this Agreement will bring a legal action under this Agreement more than one year after the cause of action arose Each party waives its rights to a jury trial in any resulting litigation LIBJPEG 6B LIBRARY The libjpeg 6b library was used during application development Copyright c 1991 1998 Thomas G Lane All Rights Is used under the following conditions LEGAL ISSUES In plain English We don t promise that this software works But if you find any bugs please let us know You can use this software for whatever you want You don t have to pay us You may not pretend that you wrote this software If you use it in a program you must acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that you ve used the IJG code In legalese The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation either express
37. Control Center analyzing NetWork SOC UU E 242 configuring remote management cccceeccccseeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeaeueeecseueeeseeeeseseeeseeueeessaeeessaueeessceeeseeeeesneeesseeeessaases 241 Me ne CENSOS EE 243 MANAGING proleclion eene E 243 Parental Control a Een CI EE 243 STO SAG I o EEEE A E EEE E E N A E N A E EE N E T 245 remote scan for viruses and vulnerabilities eee ccc eeeeeceeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseaueeeesseaseeeeeseeeeeeesaaaeeeeessageeeeessaaeees 244 ID CANS eA E I I E E S A E E T AN 244 D Data encryption adding files into Container EE 208 e sit elfldlie er ei e EE 208 CONNECTING and disconnecting Container 207 Che alin EUREN 206 Mie Eelere Le 166 E Editing an application rule Applicaton ee re EE 92 Enabling disabling the real time protechon 156 Exclusions Applicaton CO MUO E 94 F File Anti Virus WEE 63 OCT ATOR AGO MINA EE 60 ST e D 66 67 Site ee Ee 62 Letellier dl 61 restoring the default ue EE 67 SCANNE eege 65 Seele t Die EE 64 tere ale 6 9 148142 6 EE 63 Geen ee e E 65 clei A aE ee here eee E nnn eet coe nny ae eee ee ree eee eee eee ee eee eee ene ane eee 61 Firewall RONG AOI dE EE 103 changing the ME el 100 extending the range of network addresses nnnenennnensennnenrnnrennrnrrrrserrrrnnrnrrrnsnnrrrnrrnrrennntnrnsnntrennnnnrennnneeenn nenn 101 Wl UR 102 network connection SCMING EE 105 DEES 103 Rule Creaton Wizard EEN 104 selecting actions to be per
38. E 146 Biie EE 148 ETON ie e 149 Rolling Dack the ASC EE 149 Selecting ee Ee 150 EUSTACE OK SSS EE 150 Regional Seting E 151 Actions to be performed after the update cccccceeeceeeeeee cece eter eee ee eae ae ea aeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaaas 151 upade Toma OCI OIG CF EE 151 Changing the Update task UN Be 152 Running updates under a different user s account 153 Configuring Computer Protection settings ccccccccccccssseeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeaaaaaaseeeeeeeseeeeeeeesaaaas 154 FO UO WN EE 156 Enabling disabling computer protection ccccscccceecceeessseeeeeeeeeaeesdeceeeeeseaeaeeeeeeeeseaesseeeeeeessaaasseeeeeeeees 156 Using interactive protection mode cette eee e eter eee eee e eee tee e etree reese sees ee aa aa aeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaeeees 156 SIE al El EE 157 EI Au WS E 157 Een LS EE 158 DEV PNG E 159 eieiei Keen dt EE 159 FU OY UE 160 Proactive EE 161 Network Attack OC EE 162 ARO DA e E EA E E E E sccacnes eerecneaceseeae EES 162 AE Ela ee 163 ocan My Re ue EE 164 le 165 Threats anid ee EE 166 IO EE 169 OTE MEN SU AS e p E E eoeceaseeeesedysetaceenceonteeseeaieuceuesesa tees 172 Bleu 175 Selecting a component or a task to Create a report 175 Managing grouping of information in the report 176 Report readiness MOMMCALIOMiiccss2azerasiceenas ear astataseageseacnensianunaes bareandstacancs doateuneniosandesoreabitenteadedaarnensiarnaes ti
39. Filtering email messages at the server Mail Dispatcher cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeesesaaaees 126 Excluding Microsoft Exchange Server messages from the ecan 127 Actions to be performed ON SPAM ccseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeeeeeeessaaaeeeeeeeeessaeaes 127 Configuring spam processing in Microsoft Office Outlook ceccccecececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeeseaaaaes 127 Configuring spam processing in Microsoft Outlook Express Windows Mat 129 Configuring spam processing in Thea 129 Configuring spam processing IN Thunderbird cccccccccecceeeeeeceeeeeseeesseeeeeeeesaeaeeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeeesssaeaeeeeees 130 Restoring default Anti Spam settings ccccccccsseseecceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeesaeeeeueeeeeesseeauseeeeeeseesaaeeeeeeessaaaees 130 HEEN 131 Using heuristie analysis scrisese pede cc een eedan aana EER Ea aE eA ERa AERA EAS a EE AEE kaa 131 Advanced component le EE 132 Creating the list of allowed banner addresees 132 Creating the list of blocked banner addresses ccccccccccccceeesseeceeeeecaeeeeeceeeeseeaeeeeeeeeeseeaaeeeeeeeeessaaeaeeseeeeeeas 132 Exporting importing banner lists cccscesdencentecncacecdcaeanuslesmsncactnnntaceieasccadeivesunsbtectetcinssbedelswedaneedeenarenenotcouiuaians 133 CONTENTS Computer Scaieni errer tn tee pee ii EE rE E i r Ea r aa EE EEE AS rE aT 134 VUS SS N erea E
40. If you have selected the method of authorization with a device and the latter has turned out to be unavailable or lost you can use the Master Password for accessing your personal data My PASSWORD MANAGER By default Password Manager locks the Password Database when the application is launched and after a specified time see page 233 during which the computer is not used The application can only be used if the Password Database is unlocked You can also unlock lock the Password Database in one of the following ways e using a USB or Bluetooth device only for authorization with a USB or Bluetooth device e by double clicking the application icon see page 236 the Double click action in this case should be configured additionally e from the context menu of My Password Manager e by using the key combination CTRL ALT L see page 229 To enter the Master Password use a virtual keyboard that allows passwords to be entered without pressing keys on the keyboard SW To lock an application from the context menu of the application please do the following 1 Right click the Password Manager icon in the taskbar notification area 2 Inthe menu that will open select the Lock item SW Tounlock the Password Database from the context menu please do the following 1 Right click the Password Manager icon in the taskbar notification area 2 Inthe displayed menu select Unlock 3 Enter the Master Password in the displayed window
41. Informational message Events of the same type may have different severity levels depending on the situation when the event occurred INSTALLATION WITH A STARTUP SCENARIO Method of remote installation of Kaspersky Lab s applications which allows assigning the startup of remote installation task to an individual user account or to several user accounts Registering a user in a domain leads to an attempt to install the application on the client computer on which the user has been registered This method is recommended for installing the applications on computers running under the Microsoft Windows 98 Me operating systems KEY FILE File with the key extension which is your personal key necessary for working with Kaspersky Lab application A key file is included with the product package if you purchase it from Kaspersky Lab distributors otherwise it is emailed to you if you purchase the product online NOTIFICATION TEMPLATE Template based on which a notification of infected objects detected by the scan is generated Notification template includes a combination of settings regulating the mode of notification the way of spreading and the text of messages to send HEURISTIC ANALYZER Threat detection technology for threats that cannot be detected using Anti Virus databases It allows detecting objects suspected of being infected with an unknown virus or a new modification of the known viruses The use of heuristic analyzer detects u
42. N E A EA EE ee eo ee ee 215 Ben 219 Tel EE 220 EECHER 220 E CHET elei Re 221 Using personal Gala EE 221 FNdNg ere 222 Deleting personal data EE 223 Importing exporting e TE 223 Password Database Backup Hestore EEEE EEEEAEEEEEEEEENEEEEEEEEEEEE EEEE EEEnn EEEE eneen 224 Configuring application EE e GC 226 DEOU Er VAMC EE 227 List of frequently used accounts cccscccecccceeeeseeeeeeceeeeesseeeeeeeseaeaseeceeeeesaaeaaeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeceeeesssaaaeeeeseesnaaaaeeeess 227 List Of ignored WED addreseesg nn nrrnnannnnene nn neen ennen 228 List of trusted web Klee 228 Quick launch of application FUNCTIONS ccccceessssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeas 229 Password Database location TEE 230 Creating new Password Database cccccseeeccccceeeseeseeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeesseeaseecceeeeeseeuseeeeeesseeeaseeeeeeessaaeeeeeeeeeeas 231 Password Database BackUp E 231 Selecting ENcryption Method cccccccccccecceesseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesseeaeeceeeeeeseeseeeeeeeesseueeeeeeeeessaaaeeeeeeeensas 232 Automatic locking of Password Database nenn 233 Password Manager authorization method 233 Using USB and Bluetooth devices ccccccccccseeeecccceecceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeseeeseeeeeeesseeaeeeeeeesesseaaeeeeeessssaaeeeees 234 Changing Master PassWord E 234 Creating a list Of supported browsers snsnnnnenesteeeesstttttrttttttttttttntsr tnnt rtt tEEEEEE
43. Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA lhash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Copyright remains Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptogr
44. Network traffic tab displays information on all inbound and outbound connections established between your computer and other computers including web servers mail servers etc e The Blocked computers tab lists the blocked computers VIRUS SCAN TASKS In addition to the constant protection of all the ways that malicious programs can penetrate it is extremely important to periodically scan your computer for viruses This is necessary in order to rule out the possibility of soreading malicious programs that have not been discovered by security components for example because the security level was set to low or for other reasons The following virus scan tasks are included in Computer Protection e Objects Scan Scan of objects selected by the user You can scan any object in the computer s file system e Full Scan A thorough scan of the entire system The following objects are scanned by default system memory programs loaded on startup system backup email databases hard drives removable storage media and network drives e Quick Scan Virus scan of operating system startup objects UPDATE To block any network attack delete a virus or other malicious program Kaspersky PURE should be regularly updated The My Update Center component is designed for that purpose It handles the update of application databases and modules used by the application The update distribution service allows saving databases and program modules updates downl
45. Recommended security level SW norder to restore the default file scan settings 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe left part of the window select the required task in the Scan My Computer Full Scan Quick Scan Object Scan section 4 Inthe Security level block click the Default level button for the task selected VULNERABILITY SCAN Vulnerability scan task consists in system security diagnostics and search for potential vulnerabilities usually used by intruders to do harm to computers When scanning vulnerabilities the application analyzes the system and searches for anomalies and damages in the operating system s and browser s settings Security diagnostics has many dimensions including searching for Rootkit installations i e programs for secretly monitoring a hacked system searching for vulnerable services and settings and gathering information about processes and drivers System diagnostics for vulnerabilities may take some time When it is complete collected information will be analyzed to evaluate security problems from the perspective of a possible threat to the system All the problems detected at the system analysis stage will be grouped based on the degree of danger it poses Kaspersky Lab offers a set of actions for each group of problems which help eliminate vulnerab
46. SW If you wish Anti Spam to analyze the messages 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Spam component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 In the window that will open on the Additional tab in the Exclusions block uncheck the H Do not check Microsoft Exchange Server native messages box ACTIONS TO BE PERFORMED ON SPAM If after scanning you find that an email is spam or probable spam further operations of Anti Spam depend on the status of the object and the action selected By default email messages considered spam or probable spam are modified in the Subject field of the message the SPAM or Probable Spam label is added respectively You can select additional actions to be taken on spam or probable spam To do so in Microsoft Office Outlook see section Configuring soam processing in Microsoft Office Outlook on page 127 and Microsoft Outlook Express Windows Mail See section Configuring spam processing in Microsoft Outlook Express Windows Mail on page 129 clients special plug ins are provided You can configure filtration rules for The Bat see section Configuring soam processing in The Bat on page 129 and Thunderbird see section Configuring spam processing in Thunderbird on page 130
47. Save settings link in the top part of the window and save the configuration file SW To load the control settings from a file please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button 2 Inthe window that opens select the Users section select the account for which Parental Control settings should be downloaded and click the Configure button 3 In the window that will open click the Load settings link in the top part of the window 4 Inthe Load control settings window that will open select the Configuration file option and specify the file location SW To apply the settings of a different account please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button 2 Inthe window that opens select the Users section select the account for which Parental Control settings should be applied and click the Configure button 3 In the window that will open click the Load settings link in the top part of the window My PARENTAL CONTROL 4 Inthe Load control settings window that opens select the Another user option and specify the account whose settings you want to use SW To use a configuration template please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button 2 Inthe window that opens select the Users section select the account for which predefined Parental Control settings should be used and click the C
48. Store Kaspersky Lab has regular special pricing offers on license extensions for our products Check for special offers on the Kaspersky Lab website in the Products amp Services Sales and special offers section PARTICIPATING IN KASPERSKY SECURITY NETWORK A great number of new threats appear worldwide on a daily basis To facilitate the gathering of statistics about new threats their source and to help in developing methods to be used for their elimination Kaspersky Lab invites you to use the Kaspersky Security Network service The use of the Kaspersky Security Network involves sending the following information to Kaspersky Lab e A unique identifier assigned to your computer by Kaspersky PURE which characterizes the hardware settings of your computer and does not contain any information e Information about threats detected by application s components The information s structure and contents depend on the type of the threat detected e Information about the system operating system s version installed service packs services and drivers being downloaded versions of browsers and mail clients browser extensions version number of the Kaspersky Lab s application installed Kaspersky Security Network also gathers extended statistics including information about e executable files and signed applications downloaded on your computer e applications run on your computer The statistical information is sent once application updati
49. Tn EE 198 My COMPUTER PROTECTION Computer Protection protects your computer against known and new threats Each type of threat is processed by a separate application component This structure of the protection system allows a flexible configuration of the application depending on the needs of any specific or of an enterprise as a whole Computer Protection includes the following protection tools e Protection components see page 27 which ensure security for e files and personal data e system THE CONCEPT OF KASPERSKY PURE e network activity e Virus scan tasks on page 29 used to scan individual files folders drives areas or the entire computer for viruses e My Update Center on page 29 which ensures the up to date status of internal application modules and databases used to scan for malicious programs PROTECTION COMPONENTS The following protection components provide defense for your computer in real time File Anti Virus See page 59 File Anti Virus monitors the file system of the computer It scans all files that can be opened executed or saved on your computer and all connected disk drives Computer Protection intercepts each attempt to access a file and scans such file for known viruses The file can only be processed further if the file is not infected or is successfully treated by the application If a file cannot be disinfected for any reason it will be deleted with a copy of it saved in the backup
50. Up p My Encryption Configure browser for safe operations create rescue K Encrypt your data for enhanced protection against disc permanently delete files and more fg unauthorized access My Virtual Keyboard My Password Manager not launched 3 Prevent malware from stealing your passwords Create strong passwords and keep them in a secure storage Help My Kaspersky Account Support License remaining 266 days Figure 4 Main application window You can also use the following buttons and links e My Control Center remote administration of Kaspersky PURE see page 241 APPLICATION INTERFACE e Settings general application configuration see page 56 e Help view Kaspersky PURE help system e My Kaspersky Account to enter the user s personal cabinet https my kaspersky com at the Technical Support Service s website e Support to open the window containing information about the system and links to Kaspersky Lab s information resources Technical Support service site forum e License Kaspersky PURE activation and license renewal You can change the appearance of Kaspersky PURE by creating and using various graphics and color schemes My COMPUTER PROTECTION My Computer Protection main window can be divided into three parts e The top part of the window indicates your Computers current protection status Fix it now Your computer security is at risk Trial license validity per
51. Using those masks without specifying the classification type essentially disables monitoring When setting an exclusion it is not recommended selecting a path related to a network disk created based on a file system folder using the subst command as well as to a disk which mirrors a network folder The case is that different resources may be given the same disk name for different users which will inevitably lead to an incorrect triggering of exclusion rules ALLOWED THREAT TYPE MASKS When adding masks to exclude certain threats based upon their Virus Encyclopedia classification you can specify the following settings e The full name of the threat as given in the Virus Encyclopedia at www viruslist com e g not a virus RiskWare RemoteAdmin RA 311 or Flooder Win32 Fuxx e The threat name by mask e g e not a virus exclude legal but potentially dangerous programs from the scan as well as joke programs e Riskware exclude riskware from the scan e RemoteAdmin exclude all remote administration programs from the scan NETWORK In the Network section of the application settings window you can select the ports monitored by Computer Protection and configure the scan of encrypted connections e create a list of monitored ports See page 169 e Enable disable the encrypted connections scan mode using the SSL protocol see page 170 SEE ALSO Scanning enciypted eelere EE 170 Scanning encrypted Connections
52. Virus Encyclopedia The name of the dangerous object is given as a link to www viruslist com where you can find more detailed information on the type of threat detected on your computer e Full name of the object and a path to it You are asked to select one of the following responses to the object e Quarantine move the object to the quarantine When you place an object in Quarantine it is moved not copied the object is deleted from the disk or email and saved in the Quarantine folder Files in Quarantine are saved in a special format and are not dangerous When you scan Quarantine later with updated threat signatures the status of the object could change For example the object may be identified as infected and can be processed using an updated database Otherwise the object could be assigned the not infected status and then restored If a file is quarantined manually and after a subsequent scan turns out to be uninfected its status will not change to OK immediately after the scan This will only occur if the scan took place after a certain amount of time at least three days after quarantining the file e Delete delete the object Before deleting a backup copy of the object is created in case the necessity arises to restore it or a portrait of its infection e Skip block access to the object but perform no actions on it simply record information about it in a report You can later come back to skipped objects in the
53. XP Professional x64 Edition Microsoft Windows Vista Microsoft Windows Vista x64 Microsoft Windows 7 or Microsoft Windows 7 x64 differs from the same process under other operating systems Specifics of configuring application activity control under Microsoft Windows XP Computer Protection monitors application activity on your computer Proactive Defense reacts immediately to a defined sequence of application actions For example when actions such as a program copying itself to network resources the startup folder or the system registry and then sending copies of itself are detected it is highly likely that this program is a worm Other dangerous sequences of operations include e actions typical of Trojans e keyboard interception attempts e hidden driver installation e attempts to modify the operating system kernel e attempts to create hidden objects and processes with negative PID e HOSTS file modification attempts e attempts to implement in other processes e rootkits redirecting data input output e attempts of sending DNS requests The list of dangerous activities is appended automatically when Computer Protection is updated and it cannot be edited However you can turn off monitoring for one dangerous activity or another SW To turn off monitoring for one dangerous activity or another 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Sett
54. a path to it e Possible responses e Quarantine move the process executable file to quarantine When you place an object in Quarantine it is moved not copied Files in Quarantine are saved in a special format and are not dangerous When you scan Quarantine later with updated threat signatures the status of the object could change For example the object may be identified as infected and can be processed using an updated database Otherwise the object could be assigned the not infected status and then restored If a file is quarantined manually and after a subsequent scan turns out to be uninfected its status will not change to OK immediately after the scan This will only occur if the scan took place after a certain amount of time at least three days after quarantining the file e Terminate shuts down the process e Allow allows the process to execute To apply the selected action to all objects of the same status detected in the current session of protection component or a task operation check the CC Apply to all box The current session is the time from when the component is started until it is disabled or the application is restarted or the time from beginning a virus scan until it is complete If you are sure that the program detected is not dangerous we recommend adding it to the trusted zone to prevent Computer Protection from making repeat false positives when detecting it NOTIFICATIONS ATTEMPT TO
55. a self training algorithm see section Component operation algorithm on page 114 that allows the component to tell soam from useful mail better as time passes The source of data for the algorithm is the contents of the message To enable efficient recognition of spam and useful mail by Anti Spam the component needs training see section Training Anti Spam on page 115 We strongly recommend that you review the Anti Spam algorithm in detail Anti Spam is built into the following mail clients as a plug in e Microsoft Office Outlook See section Configuring spam processing in Microsoft Office Outlook on page 127 e Microsoft Outlook Express Windows Mail see section Configuring spam processing in Microsoft Outlook Express Windows Mail on page 129 e The Bat see section Configuring soam processing in The Bat on page 129 e Thunderbird see section Configuring spam processing in Thunderbird on page 130 You can use the lists of allowed see page 122 and blocked see page 120 senders to specify for Anti Spam the addresses from which messages will be recognized as useful mail or soam Moreover Anti Spam can check a message for the presence of phrases from the allowed see page 123 and blocked see page 121 lists and also from the list of obscene see page 122 expressions Anti Spam allows you to view mail at the server see section Filtering email messages at the server Mail Dispatcher on page 126 and delete unwant
56. added to the list of allowed senders SW To disable addition of the sender s address to the list of allowed senders perform the following steps 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Spam component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 Inthe window that will open on the Exact methods tab in the Consider message as not spam block check the J If it is from allowed sender box and click the Select button 6 Inthe List of allowed senders window that will open uncheck the H Add allowed senders addresses when training Anti Spam in the mail client box SEE ALSO Re e Weien Nee E E A E E T 118 Training usnog CAC GIN E 117 Training Anti Spam USING outgoing messages ccseececccccecceeeeeeeeceecseseeeeeeeeesseeasseceeeeeseaeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesseaaeeseeeeeeas 117 My COMPUTER PROTECTION TRAINING ANTI SPAM USING OUTGOING MESSAGES You can train Anti Spam using a sample of 50 outgoing emails The receivers addresses will automatically be added to the list of allowed senders To train Anti Spam on outgoing emails 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the wi
57. and saved in two or more Password Databases If necessary an old Password Database can be restored Password Manager can create a new Password Database if the current Password Database is damaged or cannot be restored from a backup copy SW To create a new Password Database please do the following 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe Security section click Password Manager 3 Inthe left part of the Settings window select My Passwords 4 Inthe right part of the window under Location click P located in the right part of the Path field 5 Inthe Select Password Database window specify the location and filename of the Password Database and click Open 6 Inthe Password Database location select the Create new Password Database action and click OK 7 Inthe New Password Database window under Password set the password for access to the new database and re enter it in the field Confirm password If the password is re entered incorrectly it will be highlighted red Under Encryption algorithm select the encryption provider and required encryption method see page 232 8 Inthe displayed window enter the new Master Password to confirm creation of a new Password Database PASSWORD DATABASE BACKUP Before saving any changes to your personal data Password Manager automatically makes backup copies of the Password Database This avoids any losses of data in the event of system or technical failure Password Manager creates a
58. application in safe mode without opening the main application window or the Microsoft Windows context menu SW To create a shortcut to run an application in safe mode please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open select the Application Control section 3 Inthe bottom part of the window in the Safe Run applications field select the icon of the required application 4 By right clicking open the context menu and use the Create shortcut item 5 Specify the path for saving a shortcut and its name in the window that will open By default a shortcut will be created in the My Computer folder of the current user and it will be assigned the name corresponding to the application s process CREATING THE LIST OF APPLICATIONS RUNNING IN SAFE MODE You can create a list of applications running in safe mode in the main application window The list is displayed in the My Security Zone section My COMPUTER PROTECTION If you add to the list an application that allows working with several copies of it at the same time Such as Windows Internet Explorer each new copy of it runs in safe mode after the application is added to the list If you add to the list an application that allows using only one copy of it that application must be restarted after it is added to the list SW To add an application in the list of applications running in safe mode please do the follo
59. are added to the list of trusted applications which have no restrictions imposed on the actions they perform on the system Other applications are analyzed after they are started for the first time when Kaspersky PURE has been installed STEP 7 CLOSING CONFIGURATION WIZARD The last window of the Wizard will inform you of a successful completion of application installation To run Kaspersky PURE make sure that the Run Kaspersky PURE is checked and click the Finish button SELECTING NETWORK TYPE After Kaspersky PURE is installed the Firewall component will analyze your computer s active network connections Each network connection will be assigned a status which determines the allowed network activities If you have selected the interactive mode of Kaspersky PURE operation see section Step 3 Selecting protection mode on page 41 a notification will appear each time a new network connection is detected You can select the status for the new network in the notification window e Public network Network connections with this status are denied access to your computer from the outside In such networks access to public folders and printers is denied This status is recommended for connections to the Internet network e Local network Network connections with this status are allowed access to public folders and network printers You are advised to assign this status to protected local networks for example a corporate network e Trusted
60. bits The advantages of the algorithm are its high speed and variable key size By default Password Manager uses RC4 to encrypt data AES A block cipher symmetric algorithm with a key length of 128 192 256 bits This algorithm guarantees a high level of security and is one of the most commonly used Microsoft Windows uses an encryption provider to perform cryptographic operations Each encryption provider supports several encryption algorithms with a specified key length Password Manager uses the following built in Microsoft Windows encryption providers 1 2 Microsoft Base Cryptographic Provider Microsoft Enhanced Cryptographic Provider Microsoft Enhanced RSA and AES Cryptographic Provider Prototype Microsoft RSA Schannel Cryptographic Provider Microsoft Strong Cryptographic Provider To change the encryption algorithm please do the following Open the main application window In the Security section click Password Manager In the left part of the Settings window select My Passwords In the right part of the window under My Encryption click Change oy My PASSWORD MANAGER In the Encryption algorithm window specify the parameters of the encryption algorithm AUTOMATIC LOCKING OF PASSWORD DATABASE Password Manager automatically locks the Password Database after launching an application and after a specified time during which the computer was not used You can specify the time interval after which th
61. browser The message warns that images and system files cookies will be saved on your computer e Warn about difficulties populating login information for the Account This message warns that personal data cannot be entered automatically during authorization SW To receive notifications please do the following 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe Security section click Password Manager 3 Inthe left part of the Settings window select the Main settings section 4 Inthe right part of the window click the Notification settings button in the Main settings block 5 Inthe displayed window check or uncheck the box next to the required types of notifications BACKUP TIME OF PASSWORD IN CLIPBOARD Password Manager can copy the password to the clipboard for a specified period of time This is convenient for quick actions with passwords e g when you need to use a created password to register on a website in an application You can set the amount of time the password will be saved in the clipboard When this time expires the password is automatically deleted from the clipboard This will prevent the interception and theft of passwords because they will not be able to be copied from the clipboard when the specified time expires SW To change the backup time of the password in the clipboard please do the following 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe Security section click Password Manager 3 Inthe left part of th
62. complete copy of the Password Database before implementing the changes If the Password Database is damaged you can restore data from the most recent backup copy of the Password Database see page 224 You can use different media to store the backup copy of your Password Database local disk removable disk or network drive By default depending on the operating system the backup copy is saved with the following path e Microsoft Windows XP C Documents and Settings User_name My Documents Passwords Database e Microsoft Windows Vista C Users User_name Documents Passwords Database e Microsoft Windows 7 C Users User_name My Documents Passwords Database SW To change the path of the backup file please do the following 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe Security section click Password Manager 3 Inthe left part of the Settings window select My Passwords 4 Inthe right part of the window under Backup click the button P located in the right part of the field Path 5 In the Browse For Folder window select the folder for the backup copy of the Password Database SELECTING ENCRYPTION METHOD The task of cryptography is to protect information from unauthorized access and distribution The main purpose of the cipher is to transfer encrypted messages via unprotected channels Keys are required for encryption and decryption A key is a vital component of a cipher If one and the same key is used for encryption
63. completely 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open select the Protection section 4 Uncheck the M Enable protection box USING INTERACTIVE PROTECTION MODE Computer Protection uses two modes to interact with the user e Interactive protection mode Computer Protection notifies the user about all hazardous and suspicious events occurring in the system In this mode the user independently decides whether to allow or block actions e Automatic protection mode Computer Protection will automatically apply actions recommended by Kaspersky Lab specialists in response to dangerous events SW To use the automatic protection mode 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open select the Protection section My COMPUTER PROTECTION 4 Inthe Interactive protection section check ie Select action automatically box If you do not want Computer Protection to delete suspicious objects when running in automatic mode check the J Do not delete suspicious objects box FILE ANTI VIRUS The File Anti Virus component s settings are grouped in the window see section Computer file system protection on page 59 You can perform the following ac
64. complex filtering conditions Select the Custom item from the dropdown menu You can also select the Filter by this field item from the context menu see section Displaying data on the screen on page 177 displayed after right clicking the required column of the table 4 Inthe Custom filter window that will open specify the required filtration conditions EVENTS SEARCH This window see fig below is designed to search for events that occurred in the system and were processed by Computer Protection Provided below is the discussion of the principles used while working with this window e The String field is used to enter the keyword for example explorer To start the search click the Find next button The search for the required data may take some time After the search is complete events related to the keyword you have entered will be displayed Clicking the Mark all button will select all found entries matching the search keyword e The Column field is used to select the column of the table on which the keyword search will be performed This selection allows you to save time required to perform a search unless of course you have not selected the All value Fa Search Pym String explorer fall Match case Match whole word only Cancel Figure 21 Events search To make the search case sensitive check the 4 Match case box The Match whole word only checkbox will restrict the search to finding whole words only
65. create a list of supported applications see page 235 To edit Password Manager settings please do the following 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe Security section click Password Manager 3 Inthe left part of the Settings window select the section to be edited 4 Inthe right part of the window enter the changes to the settings for the chosen section My PASSWORD MANAGER IN THIS SECTION Perault IS EEN 227 List of frequently used accounts ct22c5sasuncectncuaseadcemecpoueaceteaddiuectothsuatmbiseceasaunsastenedicedautninssceacedesuaueeetsenadiundnetnoeasenigemecnoureent 227 List of ignored web RE ele 228 List of trusted web ee Tt 228 Quick launch of application functions EE 229 Password Database IOC AN OM E 230 Creating new Password Databaee nnn nreen en 231 Password Database ae 231 Selecting ENCryption MONO cc ceeeeecccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesseeesuseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeessaeeseeeeeeessaaaeeeseeeeeeas 232 Automatic locking of Password Database neren 233 Password Manager authorization method 233 WSIRNGAISE AN Bluetooh ele 234 Cem Master e sssrin a EEE EE pA ER 234 Creating a list of supported browsers seeseeeeeceeceeeeeeeeaaaasessseeueeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaausasseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaaaaaasdeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaaas 235 A ele tele E 11116 E 235 DEFAULT USER NAME Password Manager allows a user name to be set that will be automatically displayed in the User name
66. creates backup copies of objects in a special storage on the selected device To do so you should configure backup tasks After running the task manually or automatically according to a schedule backup copies of selected files are created in the storage If necessary the required version of the saved file can be restored from the backup copy Thus regular backup ensures additional security of data SEE ALSO BA TA UD EE 181 THE CONCEPT OF KASPERSKY PURE My PARENTAL CONTROL Parental Control is designed to protect children and teenagers from threats related to computer and Internet usage Parental Control allows a flexible limit of the access to resources and applications for different users depending on their age and experience Besides this function allows to view statistical reports about the users actions The specified restrictions fall into three categories e using the Internet e instant messaging e using the computer SEE ALSO My Paremal Conto EE 187 My CONTROL CENTER Home network often comprises several computers which makes it difficult to manage network security The vulnerability of one computer puts in jeopardy the whole network The Control Center allows starting virus scan tasks and update tasks for the whole network or for selected computers manage the backup copying of data and configure Parental Control settings on all computers within the network immediately from your workspace This ensur
67. data grouping see page 176 and displaying data on screen see page 177 e create a schedule See page 176 according to which Computer Protection will remind you about report readiness e select the type of events see page 176 for which you wish to create a report e select the mode of displaying see page 178 statistics on the screen e save report as a file see page 179 e specify complex filtering conditions see page 179 e configure the search for events see page 180 which occurred in the system and were processed by the application IN THIS SECTION Selecting a component or a task to Create areport EEEE EEEEAEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EEEn S EEEE EEEn 175 Managing grouping of information in the report 176 Report readiness notification accasccccasnase cosesncteotenansecmngasscareoaaseerectddiaxaeteanestesenseshededieensabaunseeseeaesiuieosagdaseatnctddeateoeedeetestes 176 Selecting event types 0 0 cece eeeeeecccceecceeeeeeeecceeeaaeeeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeceeeeeseseaseceeeeseeeeeseeeeeesseeseeeeceeeesseeaseeeeeeesssaaeeseeeeeeas 176 Displaying data on the screen E 177 Extended display mode for statistics cccccccccccsseeseeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeaeaseeeeeeeeeaeesaeeeeeeeseaaaaeeeeeeeesaaaaaeeeeeeeseaeaseeeeeeessnaeees 178 Saving a report into a UE 179 Using complex MENNO EE 179 Eene Sea A E E ent eer eer ee 180 SELECTING A COMPONENT OR A TASK TO CREATE A REPORT You can obtain information about events which occur
68. detects a connection attempt with certain settings direction and protocol of the data transfer range of addresses and ports to which the connection is performed Firewall works based on rules of two types Packet rules see section Creating a packet rule on page 103 are used for imposing restrictions on data packets and streams irrespective of the applications Rules for applications see section Creating a rule for the application on page 103 are used for imposing restrictions on the network activity of a certain application Such rules allow fine tuning the filtering for example when a certain type of data stream is banned for some applications but is allowed for other ones My COMPUTER PROTECTION Packet rules have a higher priority compared to the application rules If both packet rules and application rules are applied to the same type of network activity this network activity will be processed using the packet rules SEE ALSO Creating a paket DIE 103 E Ee arule tor ONC ANON EE 103 PRIS CS ei Za WE 104 Selecting actions to be performed by the rule ccccccccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeessceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesasaaaaasedeeeeseeeeeeeeeseesaas 105 Configuring network service geings 105 Selecting addresses range a nitvec seiszencacsicrantinetieodecianeveduseuinenecunninwskseuvendusicnesusiwslcdayiceesclenetnlsdesdedsioceuscnethdwiedseusimedivesdeodaiieneraninetl 106 CREATING A PACKET RULE Typically pa
69. distribution system which is implemented by public license practices Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system it is up to the author donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License 12 If the distribution and or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded In such case this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License 13 The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and any later version you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any la
70. either by the user or by another application running If the startup is initiated by another application it results in creating a startup procedure including parent and child programs Startup procedures can be saved When saving a startup procedure each program included in it remain in its group SEE ALSO Jee die Kr Le 87 CREATING A PROTECTION SCOPE Application Control manages rights of user applications to perform actions with the following resource categories Operating system This category includes e registry keys containing startup settings e registry keys containing internet use settings e registry keys affecting system security e registry keys containing system service settings e system files and folders e startup folders Kaspersky Lab has created a list of operating system s settings and resources which should always be protected by Computer Protection This list cannot be edited However you can renounce the monitoring of any operating system object in the category you have selected as well as add to the list Identity data This category includes e user s files My Documents folder cookie files information about the user s activity e registry files folders and keys which contain the settings and important data of the most frequently used applications Internet browsers file managers mail clients IM clients and electronic wallets Kaspersky Lab has created a list of resource categories which sh
71. extension option such a file will be skipped by the scan If the Files scanned by format option has been selected the file protection will analyze the file header and may determine that the file is an exe file Such a file would be thoroughly scanned for viruses SW To change the type of scanned objects 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe left part of the window select the required task in the Scan My Computer Full Scan Quick Scan Object Scan section 4 Inthe Security level block click the Settings button for the task selected 5 In the window that will open on the Scope tab in the File types block select the required settings SCAN OPTIMIZATION You can shorten the scan time and increase the operating speed of Computer Protection This can be achieved by scanning only new files and those files that have altered since the last time they were scanned This mode applies both to simple and compound files Besides you can restrict the duration of scan for one file Once the specified time elapses the scan is stopped Toscan only new and changed files 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe left part of the window select the required task in the Scan My Co
72. extracted from archives will be scanned even if the H Do not unpack large compound files box is checked SW To modify the list of scanned compound files 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe left part of the window select the required task in the Scan My Computer Full Scan Quick Scan Object Scan section 4 2 My COMPUTER PROTECTION In the Security level block click the Settings button for the task selected In the window that will open on the Scope tab in the Scan of compound files block select the required type of compound files to be scanned norder to set the maximum size of compound files to be scanned 1 2 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window In the left part of the window select the required task in the Scan My Computer Full Scan Quick Scan Object Scan section In the Security level block click the Settings button for the task selected In the window that will open on the Scope tab in the Scan of compound files block click the Additional button In the Compound files window that will open check the X Do not unpack large compound files box and specify the file size in the field below SCAN TECHNOLOGY Additionally you can spec
73. field when creating a new account see page 215 To set the default user name please do the following 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe Security section click Password Manager 3 Inthe left part of the Settings window select the Main settings section 4 Inthe right part of the window fill in the Default Login field LIST OF FREQUENTLY USED ACCOUNTS Password Manager provides quick access to accounts The application menu can display a list of frequently used accounts It shows the names of applications web pages that you use most frequently Items in the list are arranged in alphabetical order or by frequency of use The list of frequently used accounts is available in the menu if Password Database is not locked see page 214 You can set the following list options Number of items in the list maximum number of frequently used accounts that are displayed in the context menu of the application Display list in application menu the list of frequently used accounts will be accessible in the context menu of Password Manager Display in the Caption Button menu the list of frequently used accounts will be accessible in the Caption Button menu from the application browser window SW To display frequently used accounts in the menu please do the following 1 2 Open the main application window In the Security section click Password Manager In the left part of the Settings window
74. gt item To create a group of accounts please do the following 1 2 In the context menu of the application select Password Manager In the Password Manager window under the tab Edit click Add group Enter the name of the created folder Add accounts from the My passwords list by dragging them into the created folder My PASSWORD MANAGER EDITING PERSONAL DATA In Password Database you can change any personal data account user name identity card or group of accounts When editing the settings of each element you can do the following e For the account e change the name of the account the value of the user name and password if the account has one user name e change the path to the application web page which use the account e select the rules for using the account e set automatic activation e edit additional fields in the account e change comments for the account e For the user name change the value of the user name and password e For the Identity change the name of the Identity and value of the required fields e For the group of accounts change the name and icon of the group Since Password Manager is embedded in the windows of the applications and web pages for which it is used you can edit the settings of accounts or user name directly from the application browser window You can change the settings of the account or user name in the following ways e From the con
75. image ISO file with up to date anti virus databases and configuration files The source disk image serving as base for new file creation can be downloaded from Kaspersky Lab server or copied from a local source The image file created by the wizard will be saved in the Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Kaspersky Lab AVP9 Data Raisk folder or ProgramData Kaspersky Lab AVP9 Data Rdisk for Microsoft Vista named as rescuecd iso f the wizard has detected an ISO file created earlier in the specified folder you can use it as original disk image by checking the M Use existing ISO file box and jump to Step 3 image update If the wizard has not detected any image file this box is not available Rescue disk is created by a wizard that consists of the series of boxes steps browsed with the Back and Next buttons the wizard finishes its activity by clicking the Finish button To stop the wizard at any stage use the Cancel button My SYSTEM TUNE UP SEE ALSO Booting the computer USING the rescue dek 201 BOOTING THE COMPUTER USING THE RESCUE DISK If the operating system cannot be booted as a result of a virus attack use the rescue disk You will need the boot disc image file iso to load the operating system You can download an ISO file from Kaspersky Lab server or update the existing one Let us take a closer look at the rescue disk functioning When loading the disk the following operations are
76. itself excluding combinations of the Program with other software or hardware infringes such Recipient s patent s then such Recipient s rights granted under Section 2 b shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed All Recipient s rights under this Agreement shall terminate if it fails to comply with any of the material terms or conditions of this Agreement and does not cure such failure in a reasonable period of time after becoming aware of such noncompliance If all Recipient s rights under this Agreement terminate Recipient agrees to cease use and distribution of the Program as soon as reasonably practicable However Recipient s obligations under this Agreement and any licenses granted by Recipient relating to the Program shall continue and survive Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute copies of this Agreement but in order to avoid inconsistency the Agreement is copyrighted and may only be modified in the following manner The Agreement Steward reserves the right to publish new versions including revisions of this Agreement from time to time No one other than the Agreement Steward has the right to modify this Agreement IBM is the initial Agreement Steward IBM may assign the responsibility to serve as the Agreement Steward to a suitable separate entity Each new version of the Agreement will be given a distinguishing version number The Program including Contributions may always be distributed subject to the version of the
77. m LI H Configure general protection settings S em M Enable protection File Anti Virus oe Mail Anti Virus Interactive protection ol Web Anti virus a IM Anti Virus vee Y Application Control 7 Firewall E Proactive Defense E Network Attack Blocker vod o Anti Spam cof Anti Banner Scan My Computer nae Full Scan Se E Quick Scan M Select action automatically M Do not delete suspicious objects te My Update Center CH Threats and Exclusions BY Network i Quarantine and Backup Help OK Close Apply Figure 14 Application settings window The application settings window consists of two parts e the left part of the window provides access to Computer Protection components virus scan tasks update tasks etc e the right part of the window contains a list of settings for the component task etc selected in the left part of the window You can open this window e From the main application window see section My Computer Protection on page 53 To do so click the Settings link in the top part of the main window My COMPUTER PROTECTION e from the context menu see section Context menu on page 50 To do so select the Settings item from the application context menu Update Full Scan Virus Scan Network Monitor Virtual keyboard Kaspersky Internet Security Settings Activate About Pause protection Block network traffic Exit Figure 15 Context me
78. mail clients SEE ALSO Configuring spam processing in Microsoft Office Outlook 0 0 0 ceecccccccccceeeseeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeesseeaeseeeeeeessaeaseeeeeees 127 Configuring spam processing in Microsoft Outlook Express Windows Mal 129 Configuring spam processing in The Bail 129 Configuring spam processing in Thunderbird 130 CONFIGURING SPAM PROCESSING IN MICROSOFT OFFICE OUTLOOK The spam processing settings window automatically opens the first time you run Microsoft Outlook after installing Computer Protection By default email messages classified by Anti Spam as spam or probable spam are marked with special labels SPAM or Probable Spam in the Subject field You can assign the following processing rules for both soam and probable spam e Move to folder spam is moved to the folder of your inbox that you specify e Copy to folder a copy of the email message is created and moved to the specified folder The original email is saved in your Inbox e Delete delete spam from the user s mailbox e Skip leave the email in the Inbox folder To do so select the appropriate value from the dropdown list in the Spam or Probable spam section When training Anti Spam with mail client See section Training using email client on page 117 a marked message will be sent to Kaspersky Lab as a spam sample Click the Additionally after manually marking emails as spam link to select the soam sample transf
79. names for this account will appear next to the personal data input fields In addition to the user name and password other personal data is often used on the website for registration e g full name sex country town city phone number email address etc Password Manager can store this data in an encrypted Password Database in the form of Identities To separate private and business information you can create several Identities See page 220 When you register in the program on the web site Password Manager will automatically use the chosen card to fill in the registration form Using Identities saves time completing identical registration forms During authorization in the application on the web page Password Manager automatically enters personal data only if the Password Database is unlocked An account can be used in the following ways e Launch application web page The authorization form will be filled automatically using data from the account e Use Password Manager pointer To do this move the mouse cursor over the application icon in the taskbar notification area then activate the account by dragging the Password Manager pointer to the required application browser window e Select the account from the list of frequently used accounts To do this open the context menu of Password Manager and under frequently used accounts select the required record e Use context menu of Password Manager To do so open the Pass
80. network Network connections with this status are not restricted You are advised to assign this status only to absolutely secure areas For each network status Kaspersky PURE uses an associated set of rules to manage the network activity Later if necessary you can change a connection s network status from that initially specified UPDATING THE APPLICATION You will need an Internet connection to update Kaspersky PURE Kaspersky PURE relies upon the application databases which contain threat signatures characteristic soam phrases and descriptions of network attacks At the moment Kaspersky PURE is installed these databases may be obsolete since Kaspersky Lab updates both the databases and application modules on a regular basis When Application Configuration Wizard is active you can select the update launch mode see section Step 4 Configuring application update on page 41 By default Kaspersky PURE automatically checks for updates on Kaspersky Lab s update servers If the server contains a fresh set of updates Kaspersky PURE will download and install them in the silent mode If the databases included in the installation package are outdated the update package can be large and it can cause the additional internet traffic up to several tens of Mb GETTING STARTED To keep your computer s protection up to date you are advised to update Kaspersky PURE immediately after the installation SW To manually update Kaspersky PU
81. objects such as network drives You can edit this list Objects will appear on the list immediately you add them If the A Include subfolders box has been selected when adding the object the scan will run recursively To delete an object from the list select the object and click the Delete link Objects which appear on the list by default cannot be edited or deleted In addition to deleting objects from the list you can also temporarily skip them when running a scan To do so select the object from the list and uncheck the box to the left of the object s name If the scan scope is empty or it contains no selected objects a scan task cannot be started To create a list of objects for an object scan task please do the following 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe left part of the window select the Scan My Computer section 3 Click the Add link 4 Inthe Select object to scan window that will open select an object and click the Add button Click the OK button after you have added all the objects you need To exclude any objects from the list of objects to be scanned uncheck the boxes next to them SW To create the list of objects for quick scan or full scan tasks please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Settings link in the top part 2 Inthe left part of the window select the Full scan Quick scan task 3 Inthe Scan scope block click the Settings button for the task selected
82. of free software and charge for this service if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs and that you are informed that you can do these things To protect your rights we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it For example if you distribute copies of the library whether gratis or for a fee you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code If you link other code with the library you must provide complete object files to the recipients so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it And you must show them these terms so they know their rights We protect your rights with a two step method 1 we copyright the library and 2 we offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify the library To protect each distributor we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library Also if the library is modified by someone else and passed on the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version so that the original author s reputati
83. of settings The settings can be broken down into the following groups e settings creating the protection scope e settings determining the scan methods WS To edit IM Anti Virus settings please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the IM Anti Virus component 4 Make the required changes in the settings of the component selected IN THIS SECTION Component operation AO e TEE 83 Greating A protection SCODE viaieidescenssneicatadediasaatasicdiaidasaviaiseicuietediasaiiesiadieiiniaxineseiculetediavsitvsjadiviiniaxinessqeuietediassstesictievivinese 84 Eeer 84 Using VS GES UG AIAN SI eesriie inn er EE E EEE E ETE EE EE rE 85 COMPONENT OPERATION ALGORITHM Computer Protection includes a component that ensures the scan of messages transferred via IM instant messaging clients for dangerous objects named M Anti Virus It loads at the startup of operating system and runs in your computer s RAM scanning all incoming and outgoing messages By default protection of IM clients traffic is carried out using the algorithm described below 1 Each message received or sent by the user is intercepted by the component 2 IM Anti Virus scans the message for dangerous objects or URLs listed in databases of suspicious and or phishin
84. of several computers joined into a home network e if protection is at the risk of being disabled by malware To enable password protection check the X Enable password protection box and fill in the Password and Confirm password fields Below specify the area that you want to protect with a password e Application settings configuration the password will be requested when the user attempts to save changes made to Kaspersky PURE settings My Backup management the password will be requested before the backup tasks are run e My Parental Control management the password will be requested before the backup tasks are run My Control Center management the password will be requested before modifying the Kaspersky Pure settings via the network e Exiting the application the password will be requested when the user attempts to exit the application GETTING STARTED STEP 3 SELECTING PROTECTION MODE This step of the Application Configuration Wizard will be skipped if you have selected the quick install mode The application settings edited at this step will be assigned the default values Select the protection mode provided by Kaspersky PURE Two modes are available e Automatic f any important events occur Kaspersky PURE automatically performs the action recommended by Kaspersky Lab Once a threat is detected the application attempts to disinfect the object if it fails the application deletes it Suspicio
85. on the component or task You can switch to viewing the comprehensive statistics using the button in the top part of the window The statistic is displayed both for the current day and for the entire period for which the application has been installed on your computer To view detailed statistics please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Report link in the top part 2 Inthe window that will open on the Report tab click the Detailed report button My COMPUTER PROTECTION 3 Inthe window that will open select the application component for which you wish to view detailed statistics and use the button El in the top part of the window SAVING A REPORT INTO A FILE The obtained report can be saved to file In order to save the obtained report into a file perform the following actions 1 Open the main application window and click the Report link in the top part 2 Inthe window that will open on the Report tab click the Detailed report button 3 Inthe window that will open create the required report and click the Save button 4 Inthe window that will open select a folder into which you wish to save the report file and enter the file name USING COMPLEX FILTERING The Custom filter window see the figure below is used to specify complex data filtering conditions You can use this window to specify data search criteria for any table column Let us examine the procedure for work with the w
86. one and SW To create the list of allowed phrases 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Spam component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 Inthe window that will open on the Exact methods tab in the Consider message as not spam block check the LI If it contains allowed phrases box and click the Select button 6 Inthe List of allowed phrases window that will open click the Add link 7 Inthe Allowed phrase window that will open enter a line or a mask IMPORTING THE LIST OF ALLOWED SENDERS Addresses in the list of allowed senders can be imported from Get csv files or from Microsoft Office Outlook Microsoft Outlook Express address book To import the list of allowed senders 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Spam component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 Inthe window that will open on the Exact methods tab in the Consider message as not spam block check the X If it is from allowed sender box and click the Select button 6 Inthe List of allowed sen
87. or is terminated for any other reason according to the legislation in force in the country of your principal residence or in the country where You are using the Software You can transfer the non exclusive license to use the Software to other individuals within the scope of the license granted from the Rightholder to You provided that the recipient agrees to be bound by all the terms and conditions of this Agreement and substitute you in full in the license granted from the Rightholder In case You fully transfer the rights granted from the Rightholder to use the Software You must destroy all copies of the Software including the back up copy If You are a recipient of a transferred license You must agree to abide by all the terms and conditions of this Agreement If You do not agree to be bound by all the terms and conditions of this Agreement You may not install and or use the Software You also agree as the recipient of a transferred license that You do not have any additional or better rights than what the original End User who acquired the Software from the Rightholder did From the time of the Software activation or after license key file installation with the exception of a trial version of the Software You have the right to receive the following services for the defined period specified on the Software package if the Software was acquired on a physical medium or specified during acquisition if the Software was acquired via the Internet
88. or moved to the quarantine Mail Anti Virus see page 69 Mail Anti Virus scans all incoming and outgoing email messages on your computer It analyzes emails for malicious programs The email is available to the addressee only if it does not contain dangerous objects The component also analyzes email messages to detect phishing Web Anti Virus see page 76 Web Anti Virus intercepts and blocks scripts on websites if they pose a threat All HTTP traffic is also subject to a thorough monitoring The component also analyzes web pages to detect phishing IM Anti Virus see page 83 IM Anti Virus ensures the safe use of Internet pagers The component protects information that comes to your computer via IM protocols IM Anti Virus ensures safe operation of various applications for instant messaging Application Control see page 86 Application Control logs the actions performed by applications in the system and manages the applications activities based on which group the component assigns them to A set of rules is defined for each group of applications These rules manage applications access to various resources Firewall see page 100 Firewall ensures security for your work in local networks and on the Internet The component filters all network activities using rules of two types rules for applications and packet rules Proactive Defense see page 107 Proactive Defense allows to detect a new malicious program before it performs i
89. other functions are not available As before you will be able to scan your computer for viruses and use the protection components but only using the databases that you had when the license expired We cannot guarantee that you will be protected from viruses that surface after your application license expires To protect your computer from infection with new viruses we recommend that you renew your license for Kaspersky PURE Two weeks prior to the license expiration the application will notify you about it During some time a corresponding message will be displayed each time the application is launched Information about the license currently in use is displayed in the License manager window its type commercial commercial with subscription commercial with protection subscription trial the maximum number of hosts the expiration date and the number of days remaining Information about the license expiration term will not be displayed if the commercial license with subscription or the commercial license with protection subscription is installed To view the provision of the application license agreement click the View End User License Agreement button To delete the key file click the X button to the right of the license whose key file you wish to delete To activate a new license click the Activate new license button Using the Purchase license Renew license button you can proceed with purchasing renewing the license in Kaspersky Lab s e
90. parties and any judgment on such arbitration award may be enforced in any court of competent jurisdiction Nothing in this Section 10 shall prevent a Party from seeking or obtaining equitable relief from a court of competent jurisdiction whether before during or after arbitration proceedings 12 Period for Bringing Actions No action regardless of form arising out of the transactions under this Agreement may be brought by either party hereto more than one 1 year after the cause of action has occurred or was discovered to have occurred except that an action for infringement of intellectual property rights may be brought within the maximum applicable statutory period 13 Entire Agreement Severability No Waiver This Agreement is the entire agreement between you and Rightholder and supersedes any other prior agreements proposals communications or advertising oral or written with respect to the Software or to subject matter of this Agreement You acknowledge that you have read this Agreement understand it and agree to be bound by its terms If any provision of this Agreement is found by a court of competent jurisdiction to be invalid void or unenforceable for any reason in whole or in part such provision will be more narrowly construed so that it becomes legal and enforceable and the entire Agreement will not fail on account thereof and the balance of the Agreement will continue in full force and effect to the maximum extent permitted
91. perform actions with such messages in Thunderbird use the rules from the Tools Message Filters menu for more details about using the mail client please refer to Mozilla Thunderbird Help Thunderbird s Anti Spam plug in module allows training based on messages received and sent using this email client application and checking your email correspondence for spam at the server The plug in module is integrated into Thunderbird and forwards messages to the Anti Spam component for scanning when the Tools gt Run anti spam filters in folder menu command is being executed This way Computer Protection checks messages instead of Thunderbird This does not alter the functionality of Thunderbird The Anti Spam plug in module status is displayed as an icon in the Thunderbird status line The grey color of the icon informs the user that a problem has occurred in the plug in operation or that the Anti Spam see page 113 component is disabled Double clicking the icon opens the Computer Protection settings configuration window To access the Anti Spam configuration settings click the Settings button in the Anti Spam section RESTORING DEFAULT ANTI SPAM SETTINGS When configuring Anti Spam you are always able to restore its recommended settings They are considered optimal recommended by Kaspersky Lab and grouped in the Recommended security level SW To restore default Anti Spam settings please do the following 1 Open the main application windowand
92. recommended to perform the full scan of computer at high security level If none of the preset levels meet your needs you can configure the File Anti Virus s settings see section Computer file system protection on page 59 on your own As a result the security level s name will be changed to Custom To restore the default component s settings select one of the preset security levels WS 7o change the current file and memory security level please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the File Anti Virus component d Set the required security level for the component you have selected CHANGING ACTIONS TO BE PERFORMED ON DETECTED OBJECTS Based on the scan results File Anti Virus assigns one of the following statuses to the objects detected e malicious program such as a virus or a Trojan e potentially infected status when the scan cannot determine if the object is infected This means that the application detected a sequence of code in the file from an unknown virus or modified code from a known virus H Computer Protection detects infected or potentially infected objects when scanning for viruses it will notify you about it You should respond to the threat by selecting an action on the object Computer Protection selects t
93. section 3 Click the Shared Folder link The folder will open in a standard window of Microsoft Windows CLEARING THE SAFE MODE DATA If you need to delete data saved in safe mode or if you need to restore the current settings for all applications running in Microsoft Windows standard mode you can clear safe mode data Before clearing the data saved in the safe mode you should make sure that all information you may need for further work has been saved in the shared folder Otherwise the data will be deleted without any possibility to restore them To clear safe mode data please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open select the Application Control section 3 Inthe bottom part of the window in the Safe Run applications field click the Clear link My COMPUTER PROTECTION 4 Inthe window that will open confirm data clearing by using the OK button or click the Cancel button to cancel clearing FIREWALL Computer Protection contains a special component Firewall to ensure your security on local networks and the Internet It filters all network activities using rules of two types rules for applications and packet rules Firewall analyzes settings of the networks to which you are connecting the computer If the application runs in interactive mode see section Using interactive protection mode on page 156 Firewall will request t
94. select the Anti Spam component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 Inthe window that will open on the Exact methods tab check the I If it is not addressed to me box and click the My addresses bution 6 Inthe My Email Addresses window that will open click the Add link 7 Specify the required addresses or address masks in the Email address mask window that will open CREATING THE LIST OF BLOCKED SENDERS The list of blocked senders contains the addresses of senders of messages which have been marked as spam The list is filled manually The list can contain either addresses or address masks When entering a mask you can use the standard and wildcards where represents any combination of characters and stands for any single character Examples of address masks My COMPUTER PROTECTION e ivanov test ru Messages from this address will always be classified as spam e test ru Mail from any sender from the test ru mail domain will always be considered spam for example petrov test ru sidorov test ru e ivanov The sender with this name regardless of the mail domain always sends only spam for example ivanov test ru ivanov mail ru e test Mail from any sender from a mail domain starting with test are considered spam for example ivanov test ru petrov test com e ivan test Mail from a sender whose name starts with ivan and from mail domain beginning w
95. select the Tools Settings item 2 Inthe window that will open select the Additional section 3 On the Encryption tab click the Viewing certificates button 4 In the window that will open select the Certification Centers tab and click the Import button 5 Inthe window that will open select the Kaspersky Lab s certificate file The path to the Kaspersky Lab s certificate file is as follows AllUsersProfile Application Data Kaspersky Lab AVP9 Data Cert fake Kaspersky Anti Virus personal root certificate cer 6 In the window that will open check the boxes to select the actions that should be scanned with the certificate installed To view information about the certificate click the View button If your computer runs under Microsoft Windows Vista the path to the Kaspersky Lab s certificate file will be as follows AllUsersProfile Kaspersky Lab AVP9 Data Cert fake Kaspersky Anti Virus personal root certificate cer SCANNING ENCRYPTED CONNECTIONS IN OPERA Opera browser does not use Microsoft Windows certificate storage To scan SSL connections when using Opera you should install the Kaspersky Lab s certificate manually SW To install the Kaspersky Lab s certificate please do the following 1 2 In the browser s menu select the Tools Settings item In the window that will open select the Additional section In the left part of the window select the Security tab and click the Manage Certificates button I
96. shortcut to access the container on page 209 2 Select the Connect container item from the menu that will open SW To connect the container automatically at the connection of a medium please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Encryption button 2 Inthe window that will open select a connected container and click the Configure button 3 In the window that will open check the J Connect container automatically box SW To disconnect a container via the application interface please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Data encryption button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Disconnect button SW To disconnect a container via the context menu please do the following 1 Right click to open the context menu of a file or that of a desktop shortcut of access to container See section Creating shortcut to access the container209 on page or that of a removable drive 2 Select the Disconnect container item from the menu that will open ADDING FILES INTO CONTAINER When connected see section Connecting and disconnecting container on page 207 the container is displayed as a virtual removable drive within the system being available to all the users of the operating system You can open the container and place files and folders in it if you need to store them in encrypted form To ensure data security we recommend that you disable the container after finishi
97. so as not to interfere with your work When pointed with the mouse cursor the message window s loses its translucency Enable news notifications By default when some news are received the system tray will display a special icon which when clicked displays a window containing the piece of news Show Protected by Kaspersky Lab on Microsoft Windows logon screen By default this indicator appears in the top right corner of the screen when Kaspersky PURE starts It informs you that your computer is protected from any type of threats If the application is installed on the computer running under Microsoft Windows Vista this option will be unavailable SW To configure active interface elements please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Settings link in the top part 2 Inthe window that will open select the Appearance section 3 Inthe Icon in the taskbar notification area block check or uncheck the required LC boxes KASPERSKY PURE SKIN All colors fonts icons and texts used in Kaspersky PURE interface can be modified You can create your own skins for the application or localize it in another language WS To use another application skin please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Settings link in the top part 2 Inthe window that will open select the Appearance section 3 Check the Use alternative skin box in the Skins section to activate a s
98. terms of this Agreement each Contributor hereby grants Recipient a non exclusive worldwide royalty free patent license under Licensed Patents to make use sell offer to sell import and otherwise transfer the Contribution of such Contributor if any in Source code and object code form This patent license shall apply to the combination of the Contribution and the Program if at the time the Contribution is added by the Contributor such addition of the Contribution causes such combination to be covered by the Licensed Patents The patent license shall not apply to any other combinations which include the Contribution No hardware per se is licensed hereunder c Recipient understands that although each Contributor grants the licenses to its Contributions set forth herein no assurances are provided by any Contributor that the Program does not infringe the patent or other intellectual property rights of any other entity Each Contributor disclaims any liability to Recipient for claims brought by any other entity based on infringement of intellectual property rights or otherwise As a condition to exercising the rights and licenses granted hereunder each Recipient hereby assumes sole responsibility to secure any other intellectual property rights needed if any For example if a third party patent license is required to allow Recipient to distribute the Program it is Recipient s responsibility to acquire that license before distributing the Progr
99. that the b Turn on this rule box is checked and click the Finish button 3 The default position for the new rule is first on the rule list in the Rules and Alerts window If you like move this rule to the end of the list so it is applied to the email last My COMPUTER PROTECTION All incoming emails are processed with these rules The order in which the program applies the rules depends on the priority you assign to each rule The rules are applied from the beginning of the list Each subsequent rule is ranked lower than the previous one You can change the priority for applying rules to emails If you do not want the Anti Spam rule to further process emails after a rule is applied you must check the WH Stop processing more rules box in the rule settings see Step 3 in creating a rule If you are experienced in creating email processing rules in Microsoft Outlook you can create your own rule for Anti Spam based on the algorithm that we have suggested The spam and probable spam processing settings for Microsoft Office Outlook are displayed on the special Anti Spam tab of the Tools Options menu item CONFIGURING SPAM PROCESSING IN MICROSOFT OUTLOOK EXPRESS WINDOWS MAIL The spam processing settings window opens when your run your client after the installation of the application By default email messages classified by Anti Spam as spam or probable spam are marked with special labels SPAM or Probable Spam i
100. that will open on the Manual form edit tab click on the Edit form fields link 4 Inthe Manual form edit window that will open check the box A next to the required field button 5 Activate the Value field for the chosen field button by double clicking the mouse and then setting the field values To return to the list of all fields buttons click Edit field To delete a value click Delete To change a value of the field button once more click Edit USER NAME Multiple user names are often used for certain applications websites Password Manager allows multiple user names to be saved for one account Password Manager automatically recognizes a user name when tt is first used and provides the option to add it to an account for an application website You can add a new user name manually for an account and then change it See page 221 You can add a new user name for an account in the following ways By clicking the Caption Button To do so in the Caption Button menu select the Manage Account gt Add login item From the main application window To add a user name for an account please do the following 1 In the context menu of the application select Password Manager 2 Inthe Password Manager under the tab Edit select the account from the My Passwords list and then click Add login 3 In the window that will open enter the user name and the password The user name can consist of one or several wor
101. that will open uncheck e Add allowed senders addresses when training Anti Spam in the mail client box In cases when you need to select several messages at the same time or are certain that a folder contains messages of one and only group Spam or not spam you can take a multi faceted approach to component training using Training Wizard see section Training Anti Spam on page 115 SEE ALSO Training Anti Spam USING OUTGOING messages ssese1n1nnienernninnenrrrrrrrrensrnnrrrrrnrrrnnrrrrnnsrnntnrrnnsrnnrrrrennnnnnrrennnnn nnen 117 Training using the Training Ward 116 TANINO WAN een 118 TRAINING WITH REPORTS Anti Spam training can be performed using its reports as the source The component s reports can help you assess the accuracy of the component s configuration and if necessary make certain corrections to Anti Spam To mark a certain message as spam or not spam 1 Open the main application window 2 Click the Report link to switch to the reports window of Computer Protection 3 In the window that will open on the Report tab click the Detailed report button 4 For the Anti Spam component select an email which you wish to use for additional training 5 Open the shortcut menu for the message and select one of the following actions My COMPUTER PROTECTION e Mark as Spam e Mark as Not Spam e Add to the list of allowed senders e Add to the list of blocked senders SEE ALSO Training Anti Spam
102. the Kaspersky Lab s certificate file will be as follows AllUsersProfile Kaspersky Lab AVP9 Data Cert fake Kaspersky Anti Virus personal root certificate cer QUARANTINE AND BACKUP The section contains the settings that control the operation with Computer Protection data files Application data files are objects that have been moved to Quarantine and Backup by Computer Protection In this section you can configure Quarantine and Backup see page 174 My COMPUTER PROTECTION SEE ALSO Storing the quarantine ANd backup objects cccccccseessecccceeeeeeeseeeceeeecaeeeseceeeeessaeeeeeeeeeeeseueeeeeeeeessueeeeeeeeesssaaeeseseeeeas 174 FRO OS cease ecere te actentt E E E E E E 175 Actions with quarantined objects ER 174 Quarantine for potentially infected oblects eH 173 Backup copies Of dangerous objects wiisicineticsnainenvic Ueanetusivanannvdniinesisa wanwcnvi Uuanishedivewannstlaicwnavs wehwansidecanehadivenayiasiaiidwediceaunekwedeaneuuavs 173 QUARANTINE FOR POTENTIALLY INFECTED OBJECTS Quarantine is a special repository that stores the objects possibly infected with viruses Potentially infected objects are objects that are suspected of being infected with viruses or their modifications A potentially infected object can be detected and quarantined by File Anti Virus Mail Anti Virus Proactive Defense or in the course of a virus scan Objects are placed to quarantine as a result of File Anti Virus and Mail Anti Virus o
103. the file it is immediately restored My COMPUTER PROTECTION The application will notify you when an infected or a possibly infected file is detected If an infected or potentially infected object is detected a notification with a request for further actions will be displayed onscreen You will be offered the following e quarantine the object allowing the new threat to be scanned and processed later using updated databases e delete the object e skip the object if you are absolutely sure that it is not malicious CHANGING SECURITY LEVEL OF FILES AND MEMORY The security level is defined as a preset configuration of the File Anti Virus component settings Kaspersky Lab specialists distinguish three security levels The decision of which level to select should be made by the user based on the operational conditions and the current situation You will be offered to select one of the following options for security level e High Set this level if you suspect that your computer has a high chance of being infected e Recommended This level provides an optimum balance between the efficiency and security and is suitable for most cases e Low If you work in a protected environment for example in a corporate network with centralized security management the low security level may be suitable The low security level can also be set if you are working with resource consuming applications Before enabling the low security level it is
104. the object may be identified as infected and can be processed using an updated database Otherwise the object could be assigned the not infected status and then restored If a file is quarantined manually and after a subsequent scan turns out to be uninfected its status will not change to OK immediately after the scan This will only occur if the scan took place after a certain amount of time at least three days after quarantining the file e Terminate shuts down the process e Allow allows the process to execute To apply the selected action to all objects of the same status detected in the current session of protection component or a task operation check the CC Apply to all box The current session is the time from when the component is started until it is disabled or the application is restarted or the time from beginning a virus scan until it is complete If you are sure that the program detected is not dangerous we recommend adding it to the trusted zone to prevent Computer Protection from making repeat false positives when detecting it HIDDEN PROCESS DETECTED When Proactive Defense detects a hidden process on your system a special notification pops up containing e The name of the threat as it is listed in the Kaspersky Lab Virus Encyclopedia The name of the threat is given as a link to www viruslist com where you can find detailed information on the type of threat detected e Full name of the hidden process file and
105. the operating speed of Computer Protection you can opt to scan only new files and files modified since the last scan This mode extends to simple and compound files SW Toscan only new files and files which have altered since their last scan 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the File Anti Virus component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 In the window that will open on the Performance tab in the Scan optimization block check the M Scan only new and changed files box SCAN OF COMPOUND FILES A common method of concealing viruses is to embed them into compound files archives databases etc To detect viruses that are hidden this way a compound file should be unpacked which can significantly lower the scan speed Installer packages and files containing OLE objects are executed when they are opened which makes them more dangerous than archives By disabling archive scans and enabling scans for these file types you can protect your computer against execution of malicious code and at the same time increase the scan speed By default Computer Protection scans only embedded OLE objects SW To modify the list of scanned compound files 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection
106. the request web form providing as much detail as possible Specify the following in the mandatory fields e Request type Select the subject that corresponds to the problem the most strictly for example Problem with product installation uninstallation or Problem with searching eliminating viruses If you have not found an appropriate topic select General Question e Application name and version number e Request text Describe the problem you have encountered providing as much details as possible e Customer ID and password Enter the client number and the password you have received during the registration at the Technical Support service website e Email address The Technical Support service will send an answer to your question to this email address Technical support by phone If you have an urgent problem you can call your local Technical Support service at 7 495 663 81 47 Before contacting technical support specialists please collect the information http support kaspersky com support details about your computer and the anti virus software on it This will let our specialists help you more quickly KASPERSKY SECURITY NETWORK DATA COLLECTION STATEMENT This Statement describes the terms of collection and use of the information specified bellow This Statement applies to Kaspersky Anti Virus Kaspersky Internet Security Kaspersky PURE products belonging to Kaspersky Lab In order to detect new data security th
107. the settings of report storage please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Settings link in the top part 2 Inthe window that will open select the Reports section and check the required M boxes Change the maximum size of the report and its storage period if necessary FEEDBACK A great number of new threats appear worldwide on a daily basis To facilitate gathering statistics about new threat types and sources and about elimination methods Kaspersky Lab invites you to use the Kaspersky Security Network service Using Kaspersky Security Network suggests sending certain information to Kaspersky Lab The following data will be sent e Unique identifier assigned to your computer by the Kaspersky Lab s application This identifier characterizes the hardware settings of your computer and contains no private information CONFIGURING KASPERSKY PURE SETTINGS e Information about threats detected by application s components The information s structure and contents depend on the type of the threat detected e Information about the operating system operating system s version installed service packs services and drivers being downloaded versions of browsers and mail clients browser extensions version number of the Kaspersky Lab s application installed To enable sending statistics in Kaspersky Security Network please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Settings link i
108. these terms and conditions You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients exercise of the rights granted herein You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License 11 If as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason not limited to patent issues conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all For example if a patent license would not permit royalty free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software
109. time interval value e Pause until reboot protection will be enabled after application restart or after the system restart provided that Kaspersky PURE is set to start automatically on startup e Pause protection will be enabled only after you start it manually To enable protection select the Resume protection item from the application s context menu My BACKUP The most common way to protect important data from being lost is to regularly back it up You are recommended to configure backup tasks to regularly save up to date information Before you can start working you should create a backup storage see section Creating a backup storage area on page 181 on the selected drive The backup copies of required files will be created in this storage After that you can configure backup tasks see section Creating a backup task on page 183 select files for which backup tasks should be created configure the automatic startup schedule and other backup conditions My PARENTAL CONTROL Immediately after Kaspersky PURE installation Parental Control is disabled No restrictions are set for the users To protect children and teenagers from threats related to computer and Internet usage you should timely configure Parental Control settings for all users If you have not enabled password protection when installing the application see section Step 2 Restricting access to the application on page 40 at the first startup of Parental
110. to specify the method of file restoration e Replace The file you are restoring will replace the existing file e Skip The current file version will be saved e Save both files The file you are restoring will be assigned another name ELIMINATING PROBLEMS If problems occur in Kaspersky PURE operation first of all check if the method for solving them is described in the application Help system or in the Kaspersky Lab Knowledge Basehtip support kaspersky ru The Knowledge Base is a separate section of the Technical Support web site and comprises recommendations for Kaspersky Lab products as well as answers to frequently asked questions Try to find an answer to your question or a solution to your problem with this resource SW 7o use The Knowledge Base 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe bottom part of the window click the Support link 3 Inthe Support window that opens click the Knowledge Base link Another resource you can use to obtain information about working with the application is Kaspersky Lab users forum It is another separate section of the Technical Support web site and it contains user questions feedback and requests You can view the main topics of the forum leave feedback or find an answer to a question SW To open the users forum 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe bottom part of the window click the Support link 3 Inthe Support window that opens click the User Forum link I
111. under way 1 Automatic detection of the computer s hardware 2 Searching file systems on hard drives File systems detected will be assigned names starting with C Names assigned to hard drives and removable devices may not match names assigned to them by the operating system If the operating system of the computer being loaded is in sleeping mode or its file system has the unclean status due to an incorrect shutdown you will be offered to choose whether you wish to mount the file system or restart the computer File system mounting may result in its corruption 3 Searching the Microsoft Windows swap file pagefile sys If it is missing the volume of the virtual memory is limited by the size of the RAM 4 Selecting the localization language If the selection has not been done after a lapse of time then the English language will be set by default 5 Searching creating the folders for anti virus databases reports quarantine storage and additional files By default the folders of Kaspersky Lab s applications installed on the infected computer ProgramData Kaspersky Lab AVP8 for Microsoft Windows Vista Documents and Settings All Users Application Data Kaspersky Lab AVP8 for earlier versions of Microsoft Windows will be used If such application folders cannot be found an attempt to create them will be made If those folders have not been found and they cannot be created the kl files folder will be created on a system dis
112. uses two parameters e spam rating the probability value which will cause the message to be considered spam when exceeded If the probability is below this threshold value the message is assigned the potential soam status e potential spam rating the probability value which will cause the message to be considered potential spam when exceeded If the probability is less than this value Anti Spam will consider the message not spam Depending on the specified spam and potential soam ratings messages will be assigned the spam or potential spam status Based on the assigned status messages will be also marked with the SPAM or Probable Spam label in the Subject field Then they are processed according to the rules see section Actions to be performed on spam on page 127 you have created for your mail client TRAINING ANTI SPAM One of the most powerful spam detection tools is the self training iBayes algorithm The algorithm decides which status should be assigned to a message based on the phrases it contains Before starting sample strings of useful and spam mail should be submitted to the iBayes algorithm i e it should be trained There are several approaches to training Anti Spam e Using the Training Wizard see section Training using the Training Wizard on page 116 packet training Training with the Training Wizard is preferable from the very onset of using Anti Spam e Training Anti Spam using outgoing messag
113. when Password Manager is launched for the first time You can change it later The security of your personal data depends to a great extent on the reliability of Master Password When creating a Master Password Password Manager automatically evaluates its strength and assigns it a particular status e low strength e normal My PASSWORD MANAGER e high To create a secure password use special symbols numbers upper and lower case letters It is not recommended to use information that can be easily guessed e g family members names or dates of birth as a password When changing the Master Password Password Manager requests confirmation of the input password the new password should be entered again The new password cannot be saved without confirmation If the confirmation password does not match the entered password the confirmed password will be highlighted red In this case a warning message will appear when you try to save the new password To change the Master Password please do the following 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe Security section click Password Manager 3 Inthe left part of the Settings window select Authorization method 4 Inthe right part of the window under Password protection click Change 5 Inthe Password protection window enter the new password then confirm it by reentering it in the Confirm password field CREATING A LIST OF SUPPORTED BROWSERS To ensure that automatic
114. where the object is saved in encrypted form which rules out the threat of infection GLOSSARY VIRUS ACTIVITY THRESHOLD The maximum permissible level of a specific type of event over a limited time period that when exceeded will be considered excessive virus activity and a threat of a virus outbreak This feature is significant during virus outbreaks and enables an administrator to react in a timely fashion to threats of virus outbreaks that arise INPUT OUTPUT PORT Serves in processors such as Intel for exchanging data with hardware components Input output port is associated with a certain hardware component and allows applications to address it for data exchange REAL TIME PROTECTION The application s operating mode under which objects are scanned for the presence of malicious code in real time The application intercepts all attempts to open any object read write or execute and scans the object for threats Uninfected objects are passed on to the user objects containing threats or suspected of containing them are processed pursuant to the task settings they are disinfected deleted or quarantined POTENTIALLY INFECTIBLE OBJECT An object which due to its structure or format can be used by intruders as a container to store and distribute a malicious object As a rule they are executable files for example files with the com exe d extensions etc The risk of activating any malicious code in such files is fair
115. will be glad to assist you via phone or email in any matters related to our products You will receive full and comprehensive answers to all your questions Kaspersky Lab official site http Awww kaspersky com Virus Encyclopedia http Awww viruslist com Anti Virus Lab newvirus kaspersky com only for sending archives of suspicious objects http support kaspersky ru virlab helpdesk html LANG en for queries to virus analysts Kaspersky Lab web forum http forum kaspersky com A Additional tools conngunng te ere 198 Delete Unused Data 203 Permanently Delete Data 202 Privacy Cleaner Ee EE 204 FR OS E 199 rest ring aier iNfectiON sssini recs eas oe anes e aa e ae aeaa aa i RER eE EEAO ai ae ceeeenasceaneeceet 199 Anti Banner Poar a e a A E A 131 list of allowed banner addresees nnne ee n 132 list of blocked banner addresses cccccsseeccccceesececcceseeceecsaueeceecseaseceeesaueeeessaaueeeessuueeeeessaueeeeessaaeeeeesaageeeessaaeees 132 AE MNS I E E E A E E E E A EEE E E A E E A E 132 Anti Spam additional filtering features E 125 base of phishing web addresses EEEE EEEn EEEE 119 filtering email messages at the senver reen neee 126 importing the list of allowed senders cccccccssseeeeeeeceeeeesseeeeeeeeeaeseeeeeeeeesaesseeeeeeessaeaeeeeeeeesseaaseeeeeeesssaasaeeeeeeenas 124 IERT e Ee Be ele 123 HST e E e Ee E 122 list of ee ee eeler 121 122 Jg eg ee Ee lt gt senmenene er meee gee are ann
116. you can select one of the pre installed network services or create a new network service In order to configure the settings of the network connection processed by the rule 1 2 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Firewall component Click the Settings button for the component you have selected In the window that will open on the Filtering rules tab click the Add link In the Network rule window that will open in the Network service block click the Add link In the Network service window that will open specify the network connection settings SELECTING ADDRESSES RANGE Firewall rules are applied to the following categories of network addresses Any address the rule will be applied to any IP address Subnetwork addresses with status the rule will be applied to IP addresses of all networks that are connected and have the specified status at the moment Addresses from group the rule will be applied to IP addresses included into the specified range norder to specify the IP address range to which the rule will be applied 1 2 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window In the window that will op
117. 00 Microsoft Corporation library was used during application development All rights reserved FILTER LIBRARY The Ndis Sample NDIS Lightweight filter driver Copyright c 2004 2005 Microsoft Corporation library was used during application development All rights reserved NETCFG LIBRARY The Network Configuration Sample Copyright c 1997 Microsoft Corporation library was used during application development All rights reserved PCRE 3 0 LIBRARY The pcre 3 0 copyright 1997 1999 University of Cambridge under PCRE LICENSE library was used during application development All rights reserved USING THIRD PARTY CODE RFC1321 BASED RSA FREE MD5 LIBRARY The RFC1321 based RSA free MD5 library was used during application development Copyright c 1999 2002 Aladdin Enterprises All rights reserved Distributed under zlib libpng license WINDOWS TEMPLATE LIBRARY WTL 7 5 The Windows Template Library 7 5 Copyright c 2005 Microsoft Corporation was used during application development All rights reserved under Common Public license 1 0 http sourceforge net projects wil Common Public License Version 1 0 THE ACCOMPANYING PROGRAM IS PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THIS COMMON PUBLIC LICENSE AGREEMENT ANY USE REPRODUCTION OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE PROGRAM CONSTITUTES RECIPIENT S ACCEPTANCE OF THIS AGREEMENT 1 DEFINITIONS Contribution means a in the case of the initial Contributor the initial code and documentation
118. 09 Kaspersky Lab ZAO All Rights Reserved http www kaspersky com http support kaspersky com LICENSE AGREEMENT KASPERSKY LAB END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT IMPORTANT LEGAL NOTICE TO ALL USERS CAREFULLY READ THE FOLLOWING LEGAL AGREEMENT BEFORE YOU START USING THE SOFTWARE BY CLICKING THE ACCEPT BUTTON IN THE LICENSE AGREEMENT WINDOW OR BY ENTERING CORRESPONDING SYMBOL S YOU CONSENT TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT SUCH ACTION IS A SYMBOL OF YOUR SIGNATURE AND YOU ARE CONSENTING TO BE BOUND BY AND ARE BECOMING A PARTY TO THIS AGREEMENT AND AGREE THAT THIS AGREEMENT IS ENFORCEABLE LIKE ANY WRITTEN NEGOTIATED AGREEMENT SIGNED BY YOU IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CANCEL THE INSTALLATION OF THE SOFTWARE AND DO NOT INSTALL THE SOFTWARE THE SOFTWARE CAN BE ACCOMPANIED WITH ADDITIONAL AGREEMENT OR SIMILAR DOCUMENT ADDITIONAL AGREEMENT WHICH CAN DEFINE NUMBER OF COMPUTERS WHERE THE SOFTWARE CAN BE USED PERIOD OF USE OF THE SOFTWARE TYPES OF OBJECTS WHICH THE SOFTWARE IS INTENDED FOR AND OTHER ADDITIONAL TERMS OF PURCHASE ACQUISITION AND USE THIS ADDITIONAL AGREEMENT IS THE INTEGRAL PART OF THE LICENSE AGREEMENT AFTER CLICKING THE ACCEPT BUTTON IN THE LICENSE AGREEMENT WINDOW OR AFTER ENTERING CORRESPONDING SYMBOL S YOU HAVE THE RIGHT TO USE THE SOFTWARE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT 1 Definitions Software means so
119. 1 1 html Website and link to the distribution package http developer mozilla org en docs Gecko SDK ZLIB 1 2 LIBRARY The zlib 1 2 copyright 1995 2005 Jean loup Gailly and Mark Adler library was used during application development All rights reserved under zlib libpng license LIBPNG 1 2 8 1 2 29 LIBRARY The libpng 1 2 8 1 2 29 copyright 2004 2006 2008 Glenn Randers Pehrson library was used during application development All rights reserved under zlib libpng license LIBNKFM 2 0 5 LIBRARY The libnkfm 2 0 5 Copyright c KUBO Takehiro library was used during application development All rights reserved EXPAT 1 2 2 0 1 LIBRARY The Expat 1 2 2 0 1 Copyright c 1998 1999 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd library was used during application development All rights reserved used under the following conditions USING THIRD PARTY CODE Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS
120. 2 0 Copyright c Microsoft Corporation library was used during application development All rights reserved under CPL 1 0 license htip sourceforge net projects wix Common Public License Version 1 0 THE ACCOMPANYING PROGRAM IS PROVIDED UNDER THE TERMS OF THIS COMMON PUBLIC LICENSE AGREEMENT ANY USE REPRODUCTION OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE PROGRAM CONSTITUTES RECIPIENT S ACCEPTANCE OF THIS AGREEMENT 1 DEFINITIONS Contribution means a in the case of the initial Contributor the initial code and documentation distributed under this Agreement and b in the case of each subsequent Contributor i changes to the Program and ii additions to the Program where such changes and or additions to the Program originate from and are distributed by that particular Contributor A Contribution originates from a Contributor if it was added to the Program by such Contributor itself or anyone acting on such Contributor s behalf Contributions do not include additions to the Program which i are separate modules of software distributed in conjunction with the Program under their own license agreement and ii are not derivative works of the Program Contributor means any person or entity that distributes the Program Licensed Patents mean patent claims licensable by a Contributor which are necessarily infringed by the use or sale of its Contribution alone or when combined with the Program Program means the Contribution
121. 2 3 copyright GNU Project htip ftp gnu org gnu bison library under the framework of a special exception was used during application development As a special exception you may create a larger work that contains part or all of the Bison parser skeleton and distribute that work under terms of your choice so long as that work isn t itself a parser generator using the skeleton or a modified version thereof as a parser skeleton Alternatively if you modify or redistribute the parser skeleton itself you may at your option remove this special exception which will cause the skeleton and the resulting Bison output files to be licensed under the GNU General Public License without this special exception AGG 2 4 LIBRARY The AGG Anti Grain Geometry 2 4 copyright 2002 2005 Maxim Shemanarev library was used during application development All rights reserved under modified BSD license Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from thi
122. 2 6 of this Agreement is provided to You when the latest Update of the Software is installed except for a trial version of the Software Technical support service http support kaspersky com Sech Diz 5 3 5 4 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 6 5 6 6 6 7 7 1 7 2 1 3 7 4 L LICENSE AGREEMENT Information Collection Having agreed with the terms and conditions of this Agreement You consent to provide information to the Rightholder about executable files and their checksums to improve Your security protection level In order to improve security awareness about new threats and their sources and in order to improve Your security protection level the Rightholder with your consent that has been explicitly confirmed in the Kaspersky Security Network Data Collection Statement is expressly entitled to receives such information You can deactivate the Kaspersky Security Network service during installation Also You can activate and deactivate the Kaspersky Security Network service at any time in the Software options page You further acknowledge and agree that any information gathered by Rightholder can be used to track and publish reports on security risk trends in the Rightholder s sole and exclusive discretion The Software does not process any personally identifiable data and does not combine the processing data with any personal information If you do not wish for the information collected by the S
123. Anti Banner see page 131 Anti Banner blocks advertising information located on banners built into interfaces of various programs installed on your computer or displayed online PROTECTION OF DATA AND ONLINE ACTIVITY Computer Protection protects data stored on your computer against malware and unauthorized access ensuring secure access to the local network and to the Internet Protected objects are divided into three groups e Files personal data parameters of access to different resources user names and passwords information about banking cards etc Protection of these objects is provided by File Anti Virus Application Control and Proactive Defense e Applications installed on your computer and operating system objects Protection of these objects is provided by Mail Anti Virus Web Anti Virus IM Anti Virus Application Control Proactive Defense Network Attack Blocker and Anti Spam e Online activity using e payment systems email protection against spam and viruses etc Protection of these objects is provided by Mail Anti Virus Web Anti Virus IM Anti Virus Firewall Network Attack Blocker Anti Spam Network Monitor Anti Banner CONTROL OVER APPLICATIONS AND DATA ACCESS Computer Protection prevents applications from executing actions which can endanger the system monitors access to your personal data and provides the option of running applications in the safe mode It is performed with the help of the following tools
124. CIOUS OBJECT DETECTED If File Anti Virus Mail Anti Virus or a virus scan detects malicious code a special notification will pop up It contains e Threat type for instance virus Trojan and the name of the malicious object as listed in the Kaspersky Lab Virus Encyclopedia The name of the dangerous object is given as a link to www viruslist com where you can find more detailed information on the type of threat detected on your computer e Full name of the malicious object and a path to it You are asked to select one of the following responses to the object e Disinfect attempt to disinfect the malicious object Before treatment a backup copy is made of the object in case the necessity arise to restore it or a portrait of its infection e Delete delete malicious object Before deleting a backup copy of the object is created in case the necessity arises to restore it or a portrait of its infection e Skip block access to the object but perform no actions on it simply record information about it in a report You can later come back to skipped malicious objects in the report window However you cannot postpone processing objects detected in emails To apply the selected action to all objects of the same status detected in the current session of protection component or a task operation check the H Apply to all box The current session is the time from when the component is started until it is disabled or the application
125. CREATING THE LIST OF BLOCKED BANNER ADDRESSES You can create a list of banned banner addresses which will be blocked by Anti Banner when detected My COMPUTER PROTECTION To add anew mask to the black list please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Banner component 4 Inthe Additional section check the Use Black list of addresses box for the component selected and click the Settings button 5 Inthe Black list window that will open click the Add link 6 Enter a mask of blocked banner in the Address mask URL window that will open To stop using a mask that you created you do not have to delete it from the list unchecking the box H next to it renders it inactive EXPORTING IMPORTING BANNER LISTS You can copy the lists of allowed banned banners you have created from one computer to another While exporting the list you can copy either the selected list element only or the entire list While importing the list you can choose to add the new addresses to the existing list or replace the existing list with the one being imported To copy the created lists of allowed banned banners please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 I
126. Computer Protection will automatically apply the action recommended by Kaspersky Lab s specialists when dangerous objects are detected To change the specified action to be performed on detected objects 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the Web Anti Virus component 4 Specify the required action for the component you have selected CREATING A PROTECTION SCOPE Creating a protection scope means selecting the type of scan see section Selecting the scan type on page 79 of objects by Web Anti Virus and creating the list of trusted web addresses which contain information not subject to scan for dangerous objects by the component You can create a list of trusted web addresses whose content you unconditionally trust Web Anti Virus will not analyze data from those addresses for dangerous objects This option may be useful for instance when Web Anti Virus interferes with downloading a particular file My COMPUTER PROTECTION SW To create the list of trusted web addresses please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Web Anti Virus co
127. Control you are recommended to set a password for protection from unauthorized modification of the Control settings After that you can enable Parental Control and impose restrictions See section Enabling and configuring Parental Control on page 188 on computer and Internet usage and on instant messaging for all accounts on the computer My ENCRYPTION To protect confidential information from unauthorized access you are recommended to store it in encrypted form ina special container Before you can start working you should create an encrypted container see section Creating container on page 206 write data into it see section Adding files into container on page 208 as on a standard removable drive and then disconnect see section Connecting and disconnecting container on page 207 the container After that a password should be entered to connect the container and access the data My PASSWORD MANAGER Password Manager protects your personal data and makes it easy to manage One of the features of the application is the optimal configuration of its initial parameters For users convenience the initial configuration stages are combined in the interface of the Application Configuration Wizard see page 213 which GETTING STARTED opens at the first startup of the application Following the wizard s instructions you can create a Master Password modify the settings for accessing the application and protecting your data
128. Custom installation box is checked you can modify the default installation settings You can select which application components should be installed and specify the folder where the application will be installed The protection settings recommended by Kaspersky Lab will be specified for each component you have selected When the installation is completed you can activate the application and configure the protection against unauthorized access The custom installation mode is recommended for experienced users only If you select the first option the Application Installation Wizard will offer you to view the License Agreement and the Kaspersky Security Network Data Collection Statement After that the application will be installed on your computer If you select the second option you will be asked to enter or to confirm certain information at each step of the installation To proceed with the installation click the Next button To cancel the installation click the Cancel button STEP 3 ACCEPTING THE LICENSE AGREEMENT Before installing the application you will be offered to view the License Agreement concluded by you and Kaspersky Lab The License Agreement lists the user s rights to use the software he or she has purchased Without accepting the terms of the License Agreement you cannot proceed with the application installation Please read the agreement carefully and if you accept each of its terms click the agree button The applic
129. D ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS BziP2 LIBBZIP2Z 1 0 5 LIBRARY The bzip2 libbzip2 1 0 5 library was used during application development Copyright C 1996 2007 Julian R Seward All rights reserved Is used under the following conditions Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 The origin of this software must not be misrepresented you must not claim that you wrote the original software If you use this software in a product an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required USING THIRD PARTY CODE 3 Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original software 4 The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior wr
130. D APPLICATIONS You can create a list of trusted applications which will allow not to control the file and network activity including the suspicious one from their part as well as attempts to access the system registry My COMPUTER PROTECTION For example you may feel that objects used by Microsoft Windows Notepad are safe and do not need to be scanned In other words you do trust this application To exclude from scan the objects used by this process add the Notepad application to the list of trusted applications At the same time the executable file and the trusted application s process will be scanned for viruses as they were before To completely exclude an application from the scan you should use exclusion rules Besides some actions classified as dangerous may be stated as normal by a number of applications For example applications that automatically toggle keyboard layouts such as Punto Switcher regularly intercept text being entered on your keyboard To take into account the specifics of such applications and disable the monitoring of their activity you are advised to add them to the list of trusted applications Excluding trusted applications from the scan allows solving probable problems of the application s compatibility with other programs e g the problem of double scanning of network traffic of a third party computer by Computer Protection and by another anti virus application as well as increase the computer s perfo
131. DED OR LIMITED BY APPLICABLE LAW THE RIGHTHOLDER AND ITS PARTNERS MAKE NO WARRANTY CONDITION REPRESENTATION OR TERM EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WHETHER BY STATUTE COMMON LAW CUSTOM USAGE OR OTHERWISE AS TO ANY MATTER INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS MERCHANTABILITY SATISFACTORY QUALITY INTEGRATION OR APPLICABILITY FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE YOU ASSUME ALL FAULTS AND THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO PERFORMANCE AND RESPONSIBILITY FOR SELECTING THE SOFTWARE TO ACHIEVE YOUR INTENDED RESULTS AND FOR THE INSTALLATION OF USE OF AND RESULTS OBTAINED FROM THE SOFTWARE WITHOUT LIMITING THE FOREGOING PROVISIONS THE RIGHTHOLDER MAKES NO REPRESENTATION AND GIVES NO WARRANTY THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL BE ERROR FREE OR FREE FROM INTERRUPTIONS OR OTHER FAILURES OR THAT THE SOFTWARE WILL MEET ANY OR ALL YOUR REQUIREMENTS WHETHER OR NOT DISCLOSED TO THE RIGHTHOLDER 8 Exclusion and Limitation of Liability TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN NO EVENT SHALL THE RIGHTHOLDER OR ITS PARTNERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL INCIDENTAL PUNITIVE INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS OR CONFIDENTIAL OR OTHER INFORMATION FOR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION FOR LOSS OF PRIVACY FOR CORRUPTION DAMAGE AND LOSS OF DATA OR PROGRAMS FOR FAILURE TO MEET ANY DUTY INCLUDING ANY STATUTORY DUTY DUTY OF GOOD FAITH OR DUTY OF REASONABLE CARE FOR NEGLIGENCE FOR ECONOMIC LOSS AND F
132. E E E E A A E N E A E A 134 Starting the LEE 135 Creating a shortcut for task execution ccccccccccceeeeseececeeecaeesseeeeeeeeseeeesceeeeeessaeseceeeeesssaaaeeeeeesseaaaeeeees 137 Creating a list of objects tO ecan 137 Changing security level E 138 Changing actions to be performed on detected obiects 138 Changing the type of objects tO ecan rr tttEEtteEEnnnnnnn rnnr terere 139 6c ke 8 110917421 16 seeen E E E E a E RE E 139 Scanning removable disk drives ccccccccecsseeeecceeeeceeeeseeeceeeeeseeeeeceeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeessaeeaeeeeeeessaaaaeeeeeeeessaaaees 140 ele e COMPO CMG TGS P E EA EA A E E E E PET E ET 140 e rk EE VE 141 Chanongo Et nun E 142 RUN mode creating a schedule nnnnnnannnnneannnenennnnnsrnnrnnsrnrnnnsnnrrrnsrrrrrnrnrrrnnnrrrnnntrrnsnnrrenenrrrennnrrennnnneene 142 Run mode specifying AN account 143 Features of scheduled task IAUNCHN cccccccccesseseeceeeeceeeesseeeeeeeeeaeasseeeeeeeseaeaaseeeeeesseaaaseeeeeeesssaasseeeseeeees 143 Restoring default scan settnge 143 Vulnerability scan ME 144 Starting the vulnerability scan task ccccccccseeeeeceeeecceeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeceeeesseeeseeeeeesseeseeeeeeeeesseaeaeeeeeeessaaaees 145 Creating a shortcut for task execution ccccccccccccccceeeeeeesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaaaaaasseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessaaaaaasseeeeseeeeees 145 Creating a list of objects 10 Scan E 145 Run mode creating a schedule AAA 146 Run mode specifying EE e Dt
133. ED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE PROTOCOL BUFFER LIBRARY The Protocol Buffer library was used during application development Copyright 2008 Google Inc All rights reserved is distributed under conditions of New BSD License Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met e Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer e Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution e Neither the name of Google Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived fr
134. EEESAAAEAAEAEEEEEEEEEEEnSnn nnmnnn Eeee 235 Additional in Te EE 235 Application NUNC Fl TINS EE 236 Double click action ME 236 Kiemel la E 236 Backup time of password in clipboard eee eecceeee cece cence eee eee eeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeaaaeeeeesaaaeeeesaaaeeeeesaaeeesenaees 237 Caption Een EE 237 Addiional teatres ene eee ee eee eee eee ie er ene oe ee apai eee ene eee eee ee inead 239 Fs SVS E 239 Password Manager pointer E 240 MY CONTROL CENTER EE 241 CGonfguring remote MANAGEMENT ccccccceseeeeccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeseeceeeeeseeeuseeeeeeesseeesseeeeeeessseaaeceeeesseeeaaeeeeeeesssaaees 241 Analyzing Wuel Did TEE 242 Managing protection el ue un CT 243 Managing Wen 243 Parental Control management 243 Remote scan for viruses and vulnerabiltes cee cccccceeeecceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeesseueeeeeeseeeceeesseaeeeesseeeeeeesaaaeeeeseaees 244 Updating databases and application modules snnssnnnnnsneeernntnreerttrrtnrtestttrtrtttestrrtttttnntnrtttntnttn ttnn tnnnn nnt n erene 244 Deele E 245 CONFIGURING KASPERSKY PURE SETTINGS cccccccccccceeseeceeeeeceaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeesseeeaeeeeeesseaaageeeess 246 General SENOS EEN 247 Running Kaspersky PURE at Windows Startup cccceeeeeeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeesaaaeeeeesaaaeeeeesaaaeeesessaaeees 248 Restricting access to Kaspersky PURE ccccsccccssseecceeeeeceeeseeceeeeeeseseecseueeeceegeeeceueeeesageeessageeese
135. EM TUNE UP the real extension This scheme is often used by intruders We recommend that you enable displaying extensions for files of known formats e The list of trusted sites Malware objects can add links to intruder s websites to this list Close all Microsoft Internet Explorer windows before starting the diagnostics After the review is complete the wizard analyzes the information to evaluate whether there exist browser settings posing security problems that require immediate attention It will then compile a list of actions to be performed in order to eliminate the problems These actions are grouped by categories based on the severity of the problems detected Once the Wizard is complete a report will be generated which can be sent to Kaspersky Lab for analysis Note that some settings may lead to problems with displaying certain sites for example if they use ActiveX controls This problem can be solved by adding these sites to the trusted zone This wizard consists of a series of screens steps navigated using the Back and the Next buttons to close the wizard once it has completed its work use the Finish button To stop the wizard at any stage use the Cancel button To start the wizard 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe Security section click the My System Tune Up button 3 In the window that will open click the Tune Up your Browser Settings button RESTORING AFTER INFECTION The System Restore Wizar
136. En n Eneee 244 Breu ele EN 245 CONFIGURING REMOTE MANAGEMENT Remote control is configured using the wizard At the first startup of Control Center the Configuration Wizard starts automatically This wizard consists of a series of screens steps navigated using the Back and the Next buttons to close the wizard once it has completed its work use the Finish button To stop the wizard at any stage use the Cancel button You can also switch between the wizard s steps that you have completed by using the browsing buttons in the top part of the window SW To configure the Control Center please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Control Center link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 The Remote Control Configuration Wizard will be started At the first startup of Control Center the Configuration Wizard starts automatically Let us take a closer look at the wizard s steps a Enter or set the administrator password in the Password protection window b Select a network subject to remote control in the Network scan window c Select the update mode for anti virus databases in the Update source window d Confirm the settings you have selected in the Summary window ANALYZING NETWORK SECURITY The top part of My Control Center window displays the current status of the network protection Problems with the network com
137. EnSAEEEES AAEEen rnnr en ennenen nnne 214 Configuring application settmgs nnn nreene n 226 leede Ir 239 My PASSWORD MANAGER INTERFACE The Password Manager interface is simple and convenient In this chapter we shall take a closer look at the main principles of working with the application Password Manager has plug ins embedded in applications that require authorization You can install plug ins on your own for the browsers you need Installed plug ins provide access to Password Manager functions from the application browser interface Password Manager allows using the Password Manager pointer to quickly select an application web page for automatic input of personal data IN THIS SECTION Kate AHO area CO EG 211 Context menu of My Password Manager 211 My Password Manager wimndow seensssennsesnnenrnrrnsnrrnrrrrnsrtrnnrrrnnntrntrttntrttt rtta rEEAAEEnAEEEEAEEEEAEEENEEEEEEEEEA EEEE EEEn EEEn annen 212 Application settings nee TEE 212 ATOR BURO EE 213 NOTIFICATION AREA ICON Immediately after installing Password Manager the application icon will appear in the Microsoft Windows taskbar notification area Depending on the situation the Password Manager icon will take the following form e active green Password Manager unlocked access to personal data granted H inactive red Password Manager locked personal data inaccessible Additionally the following interface items are accessible by clicking the
138. HE WIZARD S STEPS Step 1 Activating the application EE 39 Step 2 Restricting access to the application ccccccccccccccccseseseseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaueeusedeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaeaaagseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaaas 40 Step 3 Selecting protection mode 41 Step4 Configuring application lee EE 41 Step 5 Selecting threats to be detected ccccccccececccecceeeeueeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaeusaueeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesauaaaaaseeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeaaas 41 Step 6 Analyzing the applications installed ON the computer 42 Step 7 Closing Configuration Wizard mnene 42 GETTING STARTED STEP 1 ACTIVATING THE APPLICATION The application activation procedure consists in registering a license by installing a key file Based on the license the application will determine the existing privileges and calculate its term of use The key file contains service information required for Kaspersky PURE to be fully functional and additional data e support information who provides the support and where it can be obtained e key file name and number and the license expiration date You will need an Internet connection to activate the application To obtain a key file at the activation you should have an activation code Activation code is provided when you purchase the application You will be offered the following options of Kaspersky PURE activation e Activate commercial license Select this activation option if you have purchased a c
139. ICATION If a time restriction on the use of application was specified in the Parental Control a special notification will be displayed on the screen when the specified time elapses The following information will be displayed in the notification e application name e time before the application ends or the reason for the application to end SPECIAL TREATMENT REQUIRED When you detect a threat that is currently active in the system for example a malicious process in RAM or in startup objects a message will pop up prompting you to carry out a special advanced disinfection procedure The Kaspersky Lab specialists strongly recommend that you agree with to carry out the advanced disinfection procedure To do so click the OK button However note that your computer will restart once the procedure is complete so we recommend saving your current work and closing all applications before running the procedure While the disinfection procedure is running email client or operating system registry editing sessions cannot be started After restarting your computer you are advised to run the full virus scan FILE ALREADY EXISTS If during restoration of a file from its backup copy a file with such name already exists in the chosen folder a special notification will be displayed on the screen In the top part of the notification window the file name and location will be specified In the bottom part of the window you will be offered
140. ICATION str i iii ri ii niin ii niin in nnnnennnnnennnneeseneereeees 20 Sources of information to research ON your own 20 Contacting the Sales De Damme il a ccccevcdecdstcerachccehcnanenudeetneceliesadensantadendnatecnneuthsuctunanisiebactesabancbecieserdennandenidestactes 21 Discussing Kaspersky Lab applications on the web forum ccseeeceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeessaaaseeeeeeeeeas 21 KASPEREK Y Eet 22 IS NOI OCA E 22 Hardware and software requirements sossennnsseesettrttttetttttttttrt ttt ttttt rrt AEEEEEEOAAEEEEEEEOAAEEEEEEEEEAEEEEEEEESA EEEE EEEEn EEE EEEE 22 THE CONCEPT OFBKASPERSKY PURE EE 24 leede 24 BT FIV e E 25 M CO NS E 25 FAY gh cei e e E 25 My Password E et 25 My Sysiem Tune Up EE 26 My Computer Protection ME 26 Protection Beeler 27 Protection of data and online ACTIVITY cccccccceeeececceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeceeesseueeeeesaeeeeeeeesaaeeeeesseeeeeesseeeeeeees 28 Control over applications and data access nE EEEE EEEEEEEnnnnnnn rnnr Eeee enee 28 Keele EE 29 NUTS Ss CCA BAS i cee crete E S E E I T E A S A A E S AE E E 29 UDS sea E team aus E E A A E E 29 INSTALLING KASPERSKY PURE ON YOUR COMPUTER 30 Step 1 Verifying that the system satisfies the installation reQUIrEMeNts cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeueeeeeeesaeeeeeeesseeeeeeens 31 Step 2 Selecting the type of the installation cccccccccsssssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeaaaeessdeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaaaaasseee
141. ICATION GROUP When an application is started for the first time Application Control determines its status and includes it in a certain group After that the component logs the actions performed by this application in the system and manages its activity based on which group see section Application groups on page 88 it belongs to You can edit the rule for the group if necessary SW To change a rule for the group please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Application Control component 4 Inthe Rules for application statuses block click the Configure rules button for the component selected 5 Inthe Activity Control settings window that will open select the required group 6 In the window that will open on the Rules tab edit the access rules for the required resource category CREATING A NETWORK RULE FOR APPLICATION By default after the first startup of the application Application Control includes it in one of the preset groups A group rule regulates an application s access to a network with a specified status If you need to process the application s access to certain network services in a special way you can create a network rule SW To create a rule controlling the application s network activity please do the followi
142. In the right part of the window make the required changes of the component settings SCAN My COMPUTER Selection of the method to be used to scan objects on your computer is determined by the set of properties assigned for each task Kaspersky Lab distinguishes virus scan tasks and vulnerability scan tasks Virus scan tasks include the following Object Scan Scan of objects selected by the user You can scan any object in the computer s file system Full Scan A thorough scan of the entire system The following objects are scanned by default system memory programs loaded on startup system backup email databases hard drives removable storage media and network drives Quick Scan Virus scan of operating system startup objects You can perform the following actions in the settings window for each virus scan task select the security level with the relevant settings defining task behavior at runtime select the action that the application will apply when it detects an infected potentially infected object create a schedule to run tasks automatically create a list of objects to be scanned for quick scan and full scan tasks specify the file types to be scanned for viruses specify the scan settings for compound files My COMPUTER PROTECTION e select the scan methods and scan technologies In the Scan My Computer section you can specify the settings for the automatic scan of removable drives when connecting them to y
143. Kaspersky PURE USER GUIDE APPLICATION VERSION 9 0 KASPERSKY Dear User Thank you for choosing our product We hope that this documentation will help you in your work and will provide answers to most of the questions regarding this software product Warning This document is the property of Kaspersky Lab all rights to this document are reserved by the copyright laws of the Russian Federation and by international treaties Illegal reproduction and distribution of this document or parts hereof result in civil administrative or criminal liability pursuant to the laws of the Russian Federation Any type of reproduction or distribution of any materials including translations is allowed only with the written permission of Kaspersky Lab This document and graphic images related to it may be used exclusively for informational non commercial and personal purposes This document may be amended without additional notification You can find the latest version of this document at the Kaspersky Lab website at http www kaspersky com docs Kaspersky Lab assumes no liability for the content quality relevance or accuracy of any materials used in this document for which the rights are held by third parties or for any potential damages associated with the use of such documents This document involves the registered trademarks and service marks which are the property of their respective owners Revision date 12 24 2009 1997 20
144. OR ANY OTHER PECUNIARY OR OTHER LOSS WHATSOEVER ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY WAY RELATED TO THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE THE PROVISION OF OR FAILURE TO PROVIDE SUPPORT OR OTHER SERVICES INFORMATON SOFTWARE AND RELATED CONTENT THROUGH THE SOFTWARE OR OTHERWISE ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR OTHERWISE UNDER OR IN CONNECTION WITH ANY PROVISION OF THIS AGREEMENT OR ARISING OUT OF ANY BREACH OF CONTRACT OR ANY TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE MISREPRESENTATION ANY STRICT LIABILITY OBLIGATION OR DUTY OR ANY BREACH OF STATUTORY DUTY OR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY OF THE RIGHTHOLDER OR ANY OF ITS PARTNERS EVEN IF THE RIGHTHOLDER OR ANY PARTNER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES YOU AGREE THAT IN THE EVENT THE RIGHTHOLDER AND OR ITS PARTNERS ARE FOUND LIABILE THE LIABILITY OF THE RIGHTHOLDER AND OR ITS PARTNERS SHALL BE LIMITED BY THE COSTS OF THE SOFTWARE IN NO CASE SHALL THE LIABILITY OF THE RIGHTHOLDER AND OR ITS PARTNERS EXCEED THE FEES PAID FOR THE SOFTWARE TO THE RIGHTHOLDER OR THE PARTNER AS MAY BE APPLICABLE NOTHING IN THIS AGREEMENT EXCLUDES OR LIMITS ANY CLAIM FOR DEATH AND PERSONAL INJURY FURTHER IN THE EVENT ANY DISCLAIMER EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION IN THIS AGREEMENT CANNOT BE EXLUDED OR LIMITED ACCORDING TO APPLICABLE LAW THEN ONLY SUCH DISCLAIMER EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION SHALL NOT APPLY TO YOU AND YOU CONTINUE TO BE BOUND BY ALL THE REMAINING DISCLAIMERS EXCLUSIONS AND LIMITATIONS 9 GNU and Other T
145. Open Vulnerability Scan window button 4 In the window that will open click the Start Vulnerability Scan button Task execution progress will be displayed in the Finish field Click the button again to stop the task execution CREATING A SHORTCUT FOR TASK EXECUTION The application provides the option of creating a shortcut for a quick start of vulnerability scan task This allows starting the task without opening the main application window SW To create a shortcut for starting the vulnerability scan task 1 Open the main application window and click the Settings link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe left part of the window select the Scan My Computer section 3 Inthe right part of the window in the Scan tasks quick run section click the Create shortcut button next to the name of the task Vulnerability Scan 4 Specify the path for saving a shortcut and its name in the window that will open By default the shortcut is created with the name of a task in the My Computer folder of the current computer user CREATING A LIST OF OBJECTS TO SCAN Vulnerability scan task has its own default list of objects to scan These objects include operating system and programs installed on your computer You can also specify additional objects to scan objects of the computer s file system for example logical drives Email databases or other types of objects for example network drives Objects will appear on the list immediately you ad
146. P or HTTP site or save them in a local or network folder When ordering updates on removable media please specify whether you also require updates for the application modules By default the list of update sources contains only Kaspersky Lab s update servers If you select a resource outside the LAN as an update source you must have an Internet connection to update H several resources are selected as update sources Computer Protection will try to connect to them one after another Starting from the top of the list and will retrieve the updates from the first available source SW To choose an update source 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Select the My Update Center section in the left part of the window 4 Click the Settings button in the Update source section 5 In the window that will open on the Source tab click the Add link 6 Select an FTP or HTTP site or enter its IP address symbolic name or URL in the Select update source window that will open USING A PROXY SERVER If you are using a proxy server to connect to the Internet you should edit its settings SW To configure the proxy server please do the following 1 Openthe main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window My COMPUTE
147. PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE INFO ZIP 5 51 LIBRARY The Info ZIP 5 51 Copyright c 1990 2007 library was used during application development All rights reserved under Info ZIP license This software is provided as is without warranty of any kind express or implied In no event shall Info ZIP or its contributors be held liable for any direct indirect incidental special or consequential damages arising out of the use of or inability to use this software Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose including commercial applications and to alter it and redistribute it freely subject to the above disclaimer and the following restrictions 1 Redistributions of source code in whole or in part must retain the above copyright notice definition disclaimer and this list of conditions 2 Redistributions in binary form compiled executables and libraries must reproduce the above copyright notice definition disclaimer and this list of conditions in documentation and or other materials provided with the di
148. Parental Control button 2 Inthe window that opens select the Users section select the account for which display settings should be configured and click the Configure button 3 In the window that will open in the Additional section select the Display component Enter an alias for the account and select an image to display SEE ALSO Saving and downloading Parental Control settings ccccccccccseeseeeceeeeeeaeeeeeceeeeeseaeseeeeeeeeeseeeesseeeeeesseaaeeeeeeeessseaaseeeees 19 LIMITING TIME OF INTERNET ACCESS You can limit the time which the user spends on the Internet To do this you can configure Internet access certain days of the week and hours when access is allowed or blocked and also limit the overall time spent on the Internet You can view Internet access statistics for each user account on the selected computer as well as a detailed report on the events To limit time of Internet access please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Users section select a user account for which a restriction should be created and click the Configure button 3 In the window that will open in the Internet section select the Usage component 4 Inthe Control using the Internet window that will open check the H Enable box and specify time restrictions To view brief statistics please do the following 1 Open the main
149. Program Each Contributor must identify itself as the originator of its Contribution if any in a manner that reasonably allows subsequent Recipients to identify the originator of the Contribution COMMERCIAL DISTRIBUTION Commercial distributors of software may accept certain responsibilities with respect to end users business partners and the like While this license is intended to facilitate the commercial use of the Program the Contributor who includes the Program in a commercial product offering should do so in a manner which does not create potential liability for other Contributors Therefore if a Contributor includes the Program ina commercial product offering such Contributor Commercial Contributor hereby agrees to defend and indemnify every other Contributor Indemnified Contributor against any losses damages and costs collectively Losses arising from claims lawsuits and other legal actions brought by a third party against the Indemnified Contributor to the extent caused by the acts or omissions of such Commercial Contributor in connection with its distribution of the Program in a commercial product offering The obligations in this section do not apply to any claims or Losses relating to any actual or alleged intellectual property infringement In order to qualify an Indemnified Contributor must a promptly notify the Commercial Contributor in writing of such claim and b allow the Commercial Contributor to control and coop
150. R INFORMATION This product contains or may contain programs that are licensed or sublicensed to the user in accordance with the public GNU license or other similar Open Source licenses which in addition to other rights allow the user to copy modify or redistribute certain programs or parts thereof and gain access to the source code open source software If such license provides the source code to the users who receive the software in the form of executable binary code the source code becomes available when requested by email at source kaspersky com or is supplied with the product GLOSSARY List of masks and addresses of web resources to which content the user trusts Kaspersky Lab application does not scan web pages corresponding to some list item for the presence of malicious objects WHITE LIST Records in this list contain e phone numbers whose incoming calls and SMS messages are skipped by Anti Spam as well as outgoing calls and SMS messages are skipped by Parental Control e text which makes the application skip an incoming SMS message when detected BLACK LIST OF KEY FILES A database containing information on blacklisted Kaspersky Lab key files whose owners violated the terms of the license agreement and information on key files that were issued but for some reason were not sold or were replaced A blacklist file is necessary for the operation of Kaspersky Lab applications File contents is updated together wit
151. R PROTECTION 3 Select the My Update Center section in the left part of the window 4 Click the Settings button in the Update source section 5 Inthe window that will open on the Source tab click the Proxy server button 6 Edit the proxy server settings in the Proxy server settings window that will open REGIONAL SETTINGS If you use Kaspersky Lab update servers as update source you can select the optimal server location when downloading updates Kaspersky Lab servers are located in several countries Choosing the Kaspersky Lab update server closest to you will let you save time and download updates faster SW To choose the closest server 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Select the My Update Center section in the left part of the window 4 Click the Settings button in the Update source section 5 In the window that will open on the Source tab in the Regional settings section check the Select from the list box and then select the country nearest to your current location from the dropdown list If you select the Detect automatically option the information on your location will be copied from your operating system s registry when updating ACTIONS TO BE PERFORMED AFTER THE UPDATE Computer Protection also allows you to specify actions which will be performed automatically after the update
152. RE please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe left part of the window that will open select the My Update Center section 3 Click the Start update button SCANNING COMPUTER FOR VIRUSES Developers of malware make every effort to conceal the actions of their programs and therefore you may not notice the presence of malware on your computer After Kaspersky PURE has been installed it automatically performs a Quick scan of your computer This task searches for and neutralizes harmful programs in objects loaded during operating system startup Kaspersky Lab s specialists also recommend that you perform the Full Scan task SW To start a virus scan task perform the following actions 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe left part of the window that will open select the Scan My Computer section 3 Click the Start Full Scan button to start the scan SCANNING COMPUTER FOR VULNERABILITIES The settings of your operating system can become corrupted by system failures or by the activities of malicious programs Additionally user applications installed on your computer can have vulnerabilities which intruders can use to damage your computer In order to detect and eliminate such problems you are advised to launch the Vulnerability Scan task see page 144 after you have installed the application During task execution the search is perf
153. S IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF TITLE NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Each Recipient is solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using and distributing the Program and assumes all risks associated with its exercise of rights under this Agreement including but not limited to the risks and costs of program errors compliance with applicable laws damage to or loss of data programs or equipment and unavailability or interruption of operations DISCLAIMER OF LIABILITY EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT NEITHER RECIPIENT NOR ANY CONTRIBUTORS SHALL HAVE ANY LIABILITY FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST PROFITS HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE PROGRAM OR THE EXERCISE OF ANY RIGHTS GRANTED HEREUNDER EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES 7 GENERAL If any provision of this Agreement is invalid or unenforceable under applicable law it shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the remainder of the terms of this Agreement and without further action by the parties hereto such provision shall be reformed to th
154. S IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT TORT OR OTHERWISE ARISING FROM OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE LIBXDR LIBRARY The libxdr copyright Sun Microsystems Inc library was used during application development Is used under the following conditions Sun RPC is a product of Sun Microsystems Inc and is provided for unrestricted use provided that this legend is included on all tape media and as a part of the software program in whole or part Users may copy or modify Sun RPC without charge but are not authorized to license or distribute it to anyone else except as part of a product or program developed by the user SUN RPC IS PROVIDED AS IS WITH NO WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND INCLUDING THE WARRANTIES OF DESIGN MERCHANTIBILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING USAGE OR TRADE PRACTICE Sun RPC is provided with no support and without any obligation on the part of Sun Microsystems Inc to assist in its use correction modification or enhancement SUN MICROSYSTEMS INC SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY WITH RESPECT TO THE INFRINGEMENT OF COPYRIGHTS TRADE SECRETS OR ANY PATENTS BY SUN RPC OR
155. SEE ALSO PUNE HO GE 256 APPLICATION SETTINGS WINDOW Kaspersky PURE settings window may be opened from the main window see page 51 or from the context menu see page 50 To open this window click the Settings link in the top part of the main window or select the appropriate option in the application s context menu Fs Settings Kaspersky PURE LGT gt Kaspersky PURE Configure general settings We KEIT Launch Kaspersky PURE at computer startup E Self Defense Power Saving Password protection FJ compatibility Enable password protection et Proxy Server Old password Notifications Mew password oeeeee Reports BR badk Confirm password eeeeee Feedback Appearance Password scope Gaming Profile E Manage Settings Application settings configuration My Backup management My Parental Control management My Control Center management Exiting the application Help Restore OK Cancel Apply Figure 8 Configuring Kaspersky Anti Virus APPLICATION INTERFACE Also you can configure Computer Protection settings To do so click the My Computer Protection button in the Kaspersky PURE main window and in the window that will open click the Configure link in the top part of the window Fa Settings My Computer Protection Kaspersky PURE g Protection BG File Anti Virus a Mail Anti
156. STARTING WINDOW OF THE INSTALLATION PROGRAM If you have performed all the afore mentioned actions required for restoring the application or modifying the set of its components the welcoming window of the Kaspersky PURE installation program will open To proceed click the Next button STEP 2 SELECTING OPERATION At this step you should select which action on the application you want to take you will be offered to modify the set of application components restore the original state of the components you have installed before or remove some components or the entire application To take the required action click the corresponding button Further steps of the installation program depend on the operation you have selected Modification of the set of components is performed similarly to the custom installation of the application you can specify which components are to be installed and select the ones you want to exclude Restoration of the application is performed based on the set of components installed The application will update the files of all components that have been installed the Recommended protection level will be set for each of them When removing the application you can select which data items created and used by the application you want to save on your computer To delete all data of Kaspersky PURE select the Complete uninstall option To save the data select the Save application objects option and specify which obj
157. Service window that opens click the View button Open the sysinfo zip archive which contains report files SENDING DATA FILES After you have created the tracing files and the system state report you will have to send them to Kaspersky Lab s support experts You will need a request number to upload data files to the Technical Support server This number is available in your Personal Cabinet on the Technical Support website if your request is active SW norder to upload the data files to the Support service server 1 2 Open the main application window In the bottom part of the window click the Support link In the Support window that opens click the Support tools link In the Information for Technical Support Service window that opens in the Actions section click the Upload information for Technical Support Service to the server button In the window that will open check boxes next to the tracing files you wish to send to the Support service and click the Send button In the Enter request number window that opens specify the number assigned to your request when filling in the electronic form on the Support Service website The selected tracing files will be packed and sent to the Support Service server lf for some reason you cannot contact Technical Support Service you can save the data files on your computer SW To save data files to the disk 1 2 3 Open the main application window In the bottom par
158. Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Spam component 4 Inthe right part of the window click the Settings button and make the required changes of the component settings in the window that will open ANTI BANNER The Anti Banner component settings are grouped in this window see page 131 You can perform the following actions by editing the settings e 1 2 3 4 sb 1 2 3 4 disable Anti Banner use the heuristic analysis see page 131 specify the advanced component settings see page 132 create the list of allowed addresses see page 132 create the list of blocked addresses see page 132 export import banner lists see page 133 To disable Anti Banner please do the following Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Banner component Uncheck the Enable Anti Banner box in the right part of the window To proceed to editing the Anti Banner settings please do the following Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Banner component
159. Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the Network Attack Blocker component 4 Check the 4 Add attacking computer to blocked list for box for the component selected and enter the blocking time WS To unblock the attacking computer 1 Open the main application window and select the My Protection section 2 Inthe right part of the window in the Online activity section click the Network Monitor link 3 In the window that will open on the Blocked computers tab select the blocked computer and click the Unblock link TYPES OF DETECTED NETWORK ATTACKS There are currently a multitude of various network attacks that utilize vulnerabilities in operating systems and other software system type or otherwise installed on your computer To ensure the security of your computer you must know what kinds of network attacks you might encounter Known network attacks can be divided into three major groups 1 Port scan this threat type is not an attack itself but it usually precedes one since it is one of the common ways of obtaining information about a remote computer The UDP TCP ports used by the network tools on the computer targeted by an intruder are scanned to find out their status closed or open Port scans can tell a hacker what types of attacks will work on that system and what types will not In addition the information obtained by the scan a model of the sy
160. TI VIRUS The Mail Anti Virus component settings are grouped in the window see section Mail protection on page 69 You can perform the following actions by editing the settings e disable Mail Anti Virus e change security level see page 70 e change action to be performed on detected objects see page 71 e create a protection scope see page 71 e use the heuristic analysis See page 73 e configure the scan of compound files see page 74 e configure filtering the objects attached to the email message see page 74 e restore the default email protection settings See page 74 SW To disable Mail Anti Virus please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Mail Anti Virus component 4 Uncheck the J Enable Mail Anti Virus box in the right part of the window SW To proceed to the Mail Anti Virus settings please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Mail Anti Virus component 4 Inthe right part of the window select the component settings for security level and reaction to the threat Click the Sett
161. The email is broken down into its parts the email heading its body and attachments 3 The body and attachments of the email message including OLE objects are scanned for dangerous objects Malicious objects are detected with the databases used by Computer Protection and with the heuristic algorithm The database contains descriptions of all the malicious programs known to date and methods for neutralizing them The heuristic algorithm can detect new viruses that have not yet been entered in the database 4 After the virus scan the following behavior options are available e Ifthe body or attachments of the email contain malicious code the File Anti Virus component will block the email create a backup copy of it and attempt to disinfect the object After the email message is successfully disinfected it returns to the user If the disinfection fails the infected object will be deleted from the message After the virus scan special text is inserted in the subject line of the email notifying you that the email has been processed by Computer Protection e f potentially malicious code is detected in the body or an attachment but the maliciousness is not absolutely guaranteed the suspicious part of the email will be placed to the special storage area called Quarantine e f no malicious code is discovered in the email it is immediately made available again to the user An integrated extension module is provided for Microsoft Office Out
162. This security level is optimal for using in most situations e Low Use this security level if you have additional HTTP traffic protection tools installed on your computer If none of the preset levels meet your needs you can configure the Web Anti Virus s settings see section Web traffic protection on page 76 on your own As a result the security level s name will be changed to Custom To restore the default component s settings select one of the preset security levels SW To change the preset security level for web traffic 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Web Anti Virus component d Set the required security level for the component you have selected CHANGING ACTIONS TO BE PERFORMED ON DETECTED OBJECTS Once analysis of an HTTP object shows that it contains malicious code the response by the Web Anti Virus component depends on the action you have selected Web Anti Virus always blocks actions by dangerous objects and issues pop up messages that inform the user of the action taken The action on a dangerous script cannot be changed the only available modification is disabling script scan module see section Selecting the scan type on page 79 If you work in automatic mode see section Step 3 Selecting protection mode on page 41
163. USING OUTGOING messages ense1nnnneeneenrinnrnrrrnrrrrensrnnrrrrrnrrnnnrrrrnnsrnnrrrrenrnnrrrrnnnnnnnnrreenenn nenne 117 Training using the Training Wizard EE 116 Traming using email chert EE 117 CHANGING SECURITY LEVEL To filter messages the Anti Spam component uses two factors e Spam rating the probability value which will cause the message to be considered spam when exceeded If the probability is below this threshold value the message is assigned the potential spam status e Potential spam rating the probability value which will cause the message to be considered potential spam when exceeded If the probability is less than this value Anti Spam will consider the message not spam Kaspersky Lab specialists distinguish three security levels e High This security level should be used if you receive spam frequently for example while using free mail services When you select this level the frequency of false positives rises that is useful mail is more often recognized as spam e Recommended This security level should be used in most cases e Low This security level should be used if you rarely receive spam for example if you are working in a protected corporate email environment When this level is selected soam and potential soam messages are less frequently recognized SW norder to change the selected Anti Spam component security level 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Prot
164. United States as well as other countries and international treaties This Agreement does not grant to You any rights to the intellectual property including any the Trademarks or Service Marks of the Rightholder and or its partners Trademarks You may use the Trademarks only insofar as to identify printed output produced by the Software in accordance with accepted trademark practice including LICENSE AGREEMENT identification of the Trademark owner s name Such use of any Trademark does not give you any rights of ownership in that Trademark The Rightholder and or its partners own and retain all right title and interest in and to the Software including without limitation any error corrections enhancements Updates or other modifications to the Software whether made by the Rightholder or any third party and all copyrights patents trade secret rights trademarks and other intellectual property rights therein Your possession installation or use of the Software does not transfer to you any title to the intellectual property in the Software and you will not acquire any rights to the Software except as expressly set forth in this Agreement All copies of the Software made hereunder must contain the same proprietary notices that appear on and in the Software Except as stated herein this Agreement does not grant you any intellectual property rights in the Software and you acknowledge that the License as further defined herein granted
165. Virus gl Web Anti Virus gp IM Anti Virus Y Application Control T Firewall DI Proactive Defense EA Network Attack Blocker ig Anti Spam AE Anti Banner Q Scan My Computer E Full Scan 2 Quick Scan EE Objects Scan eh My Update Center Threats and Exclusions Network Quarantine and Backup Help Configure general protection settings Enable protection Interactive protection Select action automatically Do not delete suspicious objects ola Ea OK Close Apply Figure 9 Configuring Kaspersky Anti Virus Settings configuration windows consist of two parts e the left part of the window provides access to the general tasks and functions of Kaspersky PURE and Computer Protection related to the operation of all components e the right part of the window contains a list of settings for the application function task etc selected in the left part of the window MY COMPUTER PROTECTION My Computer Protection components protect your computer against various threats scan all system objects for viruses and vulnerabilities and regularly update Kaspersky PURE anti virus databases and program modules IN THIS SECTION Computer file system protection nn EE EE EEE EEE EEE EE I IEEE IE EI nnn nnn nnn nn niin iinnnnnnnnnnnneneneeneeeeeeeeeees 59 TIR ge GON EE 69 Ee WTI vele de DEE 76 Protecting instant messengers e 83 PRONG AOU SOO EE 86 Safe mode Of applications exec
166. a Rar Ea adamiani 89 SIE E EE 62 PT PAM EE 84 ER nl EE 71 EE OS a a 78 Q UEA EE 173 Guaraniine le Re EE 173 R Reaction to the threat FW IL E 61 EE 71 MENS SGN D 138 MVC EE a e E E 78 POPON Ga E S E S 175 VOE DE eege 176 EEE e EE 180 TUN UNG EAEE EE E PI E E A SE E AP PTEE A PI A E A E sate 179 SAVING WTO UE 179 s lecting a component Eege 175 Restoring the default settings PR A a E a E A AAE E A E E A ee ee 130 PIE ANE a a E E E sec cequacotieeacte 67 ET td El EE 74 S Safe Run EA WEE 98 Mode CIECO EE 97 EE ee 98 SNONCULCEAUON eee ees ee anne ne eee een RCo ee eee ee Ree ee este ee eee eee 96 Scan action to be performed on detected obiect rnt trrnent nnn ne een 138 automatic launch of skipped TASK wheisceucuiuctscausinonsteiacrninbagawslenesoteluusauenleecaniaiehatandliaussanunnenicaueeasriiebacaudlianssetaduhesian 142 scan Ol Compound UE 140 SCAN ODUM E e RE 139 SCAM TSC MIO OC SS csser pee eE O ER E sae ave esusete scien IEE 141 ee EE 142 Se GUI eebe 138 PES a e EE 135 peot objects t0 SCA EE 139 ue er ACG OU EE 143 Ki Ee le EE 144 Schedule NEE E 142 Scheduled te E 152 Security level PIE ANUV ar E E E EA 61 EIB dl EE 70 EE 78 Shared Folder RI E 98 Shortcut creation o WEE 96 Spam rate PAU OO AU E 114 124 T Threat rating eier ee CONE EE 88 Training Anti Spam usino email e asec ence cence osceteae snc tcacnancceecenceseacecodteacsoeatoecs che a o a a a T 117 using Be fl ele U
167. a is accidentally changed or deleted use Restore Password Database see page 224 From the Password Database it is possible to delete one or all elements To delete an element from the Password Database please do the following 1 Inthe context menu of the application select Password Manager 2 Inthe Password Manager window under the tab Edit select the element from the My Passwords list and click Delete or press DEL on the keyboard To delete all elements from the Password Database please do the following 1 Inthe context menu of the application select Password Manager 2 Inthe Password Manager window under the tab Edit click Delete all IMPORTING EXPORTING PASSWORDS Password Manager is able to import and export your passwords The application allows passwords to be added from unprotected unencrypted password databases You can import both passwords from other password management applications e g Internet Explorer Mozilla Firefox KeePass passwords and passwords that you have already exported from Password Manager Passwords are imported from xml and ini files Password Manager can export the Password Database to xml html or txt files Export is convenient for opening general access passwords printing the Password Database or saving a backup copy of the Password Database to a file in a different format to Password Manager Exported passwords are stored in unencrypted files and are not protected f
168. account 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe left part of the window select the Vulnerability Scan task in the Scan My Computer section 4 Inthe Run mode block click the Settings button for the task selected 5 In the window that will open on the Run mode tab in the User account block check the M Run task as box Specify the user name and password UPDATE Keeping the application updated is a prerequisite for reliably protecting your computer New viruses Trojans and malicious software emerge daily so it is important to update the application regularly to keep your personal data constantly protected Information about threats and methods of their neutralization is stored in Computer Protection databases therefore their timely updating is an essential part in the maintenance of reliable protection Application update downloads and installs the following updates on your computer e Computer Protection databases The protection of information is based on databases which contain signatures of threats and network attacks and the methods used to fight them Protection components use these databases to search for and disinfect dangerous objects on your computer The databases are added to every hour with records of new threats Therefore you are advised to update them on a regular basis In addition to t
169. activation of the account and the Caption Button see page 237 are working correctly for several browsers and mail clients Password Manager requests the installation of additional expansion modules plug ins By default plug ins are installed when Password Manager is first launched You can install additional plug ins Password Manager contains a list of web browsers and mail clients where each program is assigned the status Installed or Not installed depending on whether the required plug in is installed or not It is recommended to close all programs for which the plug in will be installed WS To install a plug in for a browser or mail client please do the following 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe Security section click Password Manager 3 Inthe left part of the Settings window select Supported browsers 4 Inthe right part of the window select a program from the list of Supported browsers and available extensions then click Install 5 Follow the instructions in the Installation wizard When the plug in is installed the program will automatically move to the group Installed It will be assigned the status Installed You can delete an installed plug in by clicking Uninstall ADDITIONAL SETTINGS You can configure the following additional settings for Password Manager e the time when the application is launched see page 236 e action launched by double clicking see page 236 e receipt of notifications see p
170. age 236 e the time when the password was stored in clipboard See page 237 e Caption Button see page 237 APPLICATION LAUNCH TIME By default Password Manager loads automatically when the operating system starts up You can change the application s start up parameters SW To launch the application manually please do the following 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe Security section click Password Manager 3 Inthe left part of the Settings window select the Main settings section 4 Inthe right part of the window in the Main settings block uncheck the i Launch Password Manager at computer startup box DOUBLE CLICK ACTION Password Manager can set a task to be launched by double clicking the application icon the taskbar notification area of Microsoft Windows One of the following tasks can be launched in this way e open the main Password Manager window see page 212 e lock unlock Password Manager default action SW To set the task to be launched by double clicking the application icon in the taskbar notification area please do the following 1 Open the main applicationwindow 2 Inthe Security section click Password Manager 3 Inthe left part of the Settings window select the Main settings section 4 Inthe right part of the window select the action from the drop down list On double click NOTIFICATIONS When Password Manager is running various events occur that are of an informati
171. ail Dispatcher is used to manage the messages residing on the server Mail Dispatcher window opens every time before mail retrieval provided it is enabled Mail Dispatcher opens only when mail is received via POPS protocol Mail Dispatcher does not appear if your POP3 server does not support viewing of email headers or all messages on server are from the addresses included into the list of allowed senders The list of email messages residing on the server is displayed in the central part of the Dispatcher window Select the message in the list for a detailed analysis of its header Header viewing may be useful for example in this situation spammers install a malicious program on your colleague s computer this program sends spam with his name on it using his mail client s contact list The probability that your address is present in the contact list of your colleague is quite high Certainly it will result in lots of soam sent to your mailbox In such cases you cannot determine if a message has been sent by your colleague or spammer using the sender address only That is why email headers should be checked It is recommended to check who and when has sent a message and also note its size When possible track the message route from sender to your email server relevant information should be available in the email header All this information should be contained in the email headers These steps allow you to decide if a message really should be download
172. am d Each Contributor represents that to its knowledge it has sufficient copyright rights in its Contribution if any to grant the copyright license set forth in this Agreement REQUIREMENTS A Contributor may choose to distribute the Program in object code form under its own license agreement provided that a it complies with the terms and conditions of this Agreement and b its license agreement i effectively disclaims on behalf of all Contributors all warranties and conditions express and implied including warranties or conditions of title and non infringement and implied warranties or conditions of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose ii effectively excludes on behalf of all Contributors all liability for damages including direct indirect special incidental and consequential damages such as lost profits iii states that any provisions which differ from this Agreement are offered by that Contributor alone and not by any other party and iv states that source code for the Program is available from such Contributor and informs licensees how to obtain it in a reasonable manner on or through a medium customarily used for software exchange When the Program is made available in source code form a it must be made available under this Agreement and b a copy of this Agreement must be included with each copy of the Program Contributors may not remove or alter any copyright notices contained within the
173. am protection item from the settings tree Displayed settings of anti spam protection apply to all installed Anti Spam modules that support integration with The Ba You need to define the rating level and specify how messages with certain rating should be handled in case of Anti Spam the probability of message being spam e delete messages with the rating that exceeds the specified value e move email messages with a given rating to a special spam folder e move spam marked with special headers to the spam folder e leave spam in the Inbox folder After processing an email Computer Protection assigns a spam or probable spam status to the message based on a rating with an adjustable value The Bat has its own email rating algorithm for soam also based on a spam rating To prevent discrepancies between spam rating in Computer Protection and The Bat all messages checked in Anti Spam are assigned the rating corresponding to the message status Not Spam email 0 Probable spam 50 Spam 100 Thus the email rating in The Bat corresponds to the rating of the corresponding status and not to the email rating assigned in Anti Spam For more details on the spam rating and processing rules see documentation for The Pa CONFIGURING SPAM PROCESSING IN THUNDERBIRD By default email messages classified by Anti Spam as spam or probable spam are marked with special labels SPAM or Probable Spam in the Subject field To
174. an optimum balance between the efficiency and security and is suitable for most cases This is also the default setting My COMPUTER PROTECTION e Low If you work in a well secured environment low security level can be used An example of such an environment might be a corporate network with centralized email security If none of the preset levels meet your needs you can configure the Mail Anti Virus s settings see section Mail protection on page 69 on your own As a result the security level s name will be changed to Custom To restore the default component s settings select one of the preset security levels SW To change the preset email security level 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Mail Anti Virus component d Set the required security level for the component you have selected CHANGING ACTIONS TO BE PERFORMED ON DETECTED OBJECTS Mail Anti Virus scans an email message If the scan indicates that the email or any of its parts body attachment is infected or potentially infected the component s further actions depend on the status of the object and the action selected As a result of scanning Mail Anti Virus assigns one of the following statuses to detected objects e malicious program such as a virus or a Trojan
175. and click the Edit link 6 Inthe window that will open on the Properties tab in the Additional subnetworks block click the Add link 7 Inthe IP address window that will open specify an IP address or an address mask SELECTING THE MODE OF NOTIFICATION ABOUT NETWORK CHANGES Network connection settings can be changed during the work You can receive notifications about the following changes e Connection to a network e Incase of changes in the MAC address correspondence to the IP address This notification will open once the IP address of one of the network computer will change e fa new MAC address appears This notification opens once a new computer is added to the network Jnorder to enable notification about changes of the network connection settings 1 2 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Firewall component Click the Settings button for the component you have selected In the window that will open on the Networks tab select an active network connection and click the Edit link In the window that will open on the Additional tab check the boxes for the events about which you want to receive notifications ADVANCED FIREWALL SETTINGS Advanced Firewall settings are as follows Permission to use active FTP mode Ac
176. and decryption it is called a symmetric key If two keys are used it is asymmetric Symmetric ciphers can be either block or stream Any information regardless of the format of the source data is interpreted in binary code A block cipher assumes all data will be broken into blocks each of which will then undergo an independent transformation In a stream cipher the algorithm is applied to each bit of information Password Manager offers the following symmetric algorithms DES Block cipher with the standard sized key of 56 bit By today s standards DES does not offer a high level of protection This algorithm is used when reliability is not the main requirement 3DES A block algorithm created based on DES It solves the main weakness of its predecessor the small key size 3DES keys are three times the size of those used by DES 56 3 168 bits The speed of operation is three times slower than for DES but the level of security is much higher 3DES is used more often since DES is not resilient enough against modern cracking techniques 3DES TWO KEY A block algorithm created based on DES This is a 3DES algorithm which uses a key size of 112 bits 56 2 RC2 A block cipher algorithm with variable length key quickly processes a large amount of information It is a faster algorithm than DES In terms of security and resilience it is comparable to 3DES RC4 A stream cipher with variable length key The key size can range from 40 to 256
177. and file system events to the report By default these events are not recorded in the report To add information about non critical events and registry and file system events to the report 1 Open the main application window and click the Settings link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe window that will open select the Reports section and check the required MH box CLEARING THE APPLICATION REPORTS Information about the Kaspersky PURE operation is logged in the reports You can clear them WS To clear the reports please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Settings link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe window that will open select the Reports section and click the Clear button 3 Inthe Deleting information from reports window that will open check boxes for the report categories you want to clear STORING REPORTS You can determine the maximum storage time for event reports the Store reports no longer than box By default it is equal to 30 days after it expires objects will be deleted You can change the maximum storage time or even discard any limits imposed on it Besides you can specify the maximum size of report file the Maximum file size box By default the maximum size is 1024 MB Once the maximum size has been reached the content of the file will be overwritten with new records You can cancel any limits set on the report s size or enter another value SW To configure
178. and other legal actions brought by a third party against the Indemnified Contributor to the extent caused by the acts or omissions of such Commercial Contributor in connection with its distribution of the Program in a commercial product offering The obligations in this section do not apply to any claims or Losses relating to any actual or alleged intellectual property infringement In order to qualify an Indemnified Contributor must a promptly notify the Commercial Contributor in writing of such claim and b allow the Commercial Contributor to control and cooperate with the Commercial Contributor in the defense and any related settlement negotiations The Indemnified Contributor may participate in any such claim at its own expense For example a Contributor might include the Program in a commercial product offering Product X That Contributor is then a Commercial Contributor If that Commercial Contributor then makes performance claims or offers warranties related to Product X those performance claims and warranties are such Commercial Contributor s responsibility alone Under this section the Commercial Contributor would have to defend claims against the other Contributors related to those performance claims and warranties and if a court requires any other Contributor to pay any damages as a result the Commercial Contributor must pay those damages NO WARRANTY EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT THE PROGRAM IS PROVIDED ON AN A
179. and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met e Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer e Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution e Neither the name of the University of Cambridge nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED INNO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE GNU BISON PARSER LIBRARY The bison parser skeleton
180. aphic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 Ifyou include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The license and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution license including the GNU Public License GECKO SDK 1 8 LIBRARY The Gecko SDK 1 8 Copyright Mozilla Foundation library was used during application development All rights reserved under MPL 1 1 license hittp Avww mozilla org MPL MPL
181. application window and click the Parental Control button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Reports section and in the dropdown menu select the user account for which you want to see the report The brief statistics for Internet usage for the selected user account is displayed in the Internet section Sg To obtain a detailed report please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Reports section and in the dropdown menu select the user account for which you want to see the report Click the Detailed report link 3 In the window that will open in the Internet section select the Usage component In the Usage window that will open a detail report will be displayed You can also open the detailed report in the Users section by clicking the Detailed report button ACCESS TO WEB SITES You can set restrictions on certain web resources access depending on their content To do this you should create lists of allowed and blocked web pages as well as choose the categories of web sites access to which should be blocked You can view web sites access statistics for each user account on the selected computer as well as a detailed report on the events To restrict the time of web resource access do the following 1 2 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button In the window that will open selec
182. archives Archives of backup copies are placed into a storage after having been assigned the name matching that of the task Once the necessity of restoring data from backup copies arises the restoring procedure gets started see section Restoring data on page 185 or the Kaspersky Restore Utility recovery tool is used Files may be restored from backup copies either into their initial location or into any available folder All events related to backup are recorded into the report see section Viewing event report on page 186 IN THIS SECTION Creating a DaCKUD storage E 181 COMME CLINGS e Le E 182 NS II Ee OS EE 182 Removmng a Storage sssr aa A cto etntu et Aaa aie aaa VAEA Aa eins Set ened se aana n a aaraa Et 183 Greating a backup WAI cect tgetecicee i inre aE NE Eea a Eea E E AAEREN 183 RUNMOG A DIC US EE 184 Serena Or DAC lt 0 e 184 VIEWING pecie tegnes a E 185 FS SUNN o Ea le EE 185 KA Le Sveni ne EE 186 CREATING A BACKUP STORAGE AREA A backup storage area may be created using the wizard Backup Storage Creation Wizard may be launched using one of the two following modes e from the main module window e from the Backup Task Creation Wizard see section Creating a backup task on page 183 This wizard consists of a series of screens steps navigated using the Back and the Next buttons to close the wizard once it has completed its work use the Finish button To stop the wizard at any stage use the Cancel
183. are reduirements Art EtEEEnEEAEEEEEESAEEEEEEEESEEEEEEEEESAEEEEEEEEOAEEEEEEEE REEE EEEE Een 22 DISTRIBUTION PACKAGE You can purchase Kaspersky PURE from our partners boxed edition or at an online store e g http www kaspersky com section eStore If you purchase the boxed product the distribution package includes the following e Sealed envelope with the installation CD where the product files and documentation in PDF format are recorded e Printed documentation namely User Guide and Quick Start Guide e License Agreement depends on the region e Activation card that contains the activation code and instructions on application activation depends on the region License agreement is a legal agreement concluded between you and Kaspersky Lab stating the terms for use of the software product you have purchased Please thoroughly read through the License Agreement If you do not accept the terms of the License Agreement you can return your boxed product to the partner from which you have purchased it in this case the product will be refunded at the purchase price However the envelope with the installation CD or floppy disks should remain sealed You accept the terms of the License Agreement by unsealing the envelope with the installation CD or floppy disks Before unsealing the envelope with the installation CD or floppy disks please thoroughly read through the License Agreement When purchasing Kaspersky PURE at eSt
184. art of the window In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Spam component Click the Settings button for the component you have selected In the window that will open on the Expert methods tab click the Additional button In the Additional window that will open check uncheck the M box next to the required spam signs ADDING A LABEL TO MESSAGE SUBJECT You can use the opportunity to add the SPAM or Probable Spam labels to the Subject field of the messages which will be recognized as spam or probable spam after check SW To enable disable addition of labels to the message subjects perform the following steps 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Spam component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 Inthe Additional window that will open check uncheck the appropriate J boxes in the Actions section You can edit the text of the label FILTERING EMAIL MESSAGES AT THE SERVER MAIL DISPATCHER You can view the list of email messages on the server without downloading them to your computer The opportunity allows you to reject some messages saving time and traffic while working with email and also decreasing the risk of downloading spam or viruses to your computer M
185. as well as for operation system settings which contribute to storing of information about user s activity Information about a user s activity in the system is constantly accumulated The launch of any file or the opening of any document will be logged The Microsoft Windows system log registers many events occurring in the system For this reason repeated running of the Privacy Cleaner Wizard may detect activity traces which were not cleaned up by the previous run of the wizard Some files for example the Microsoft Windows log file may be in use by the system while the wizard is attempting to delete them In order to delete these files the wizard will suggest that you restart the system However during the restart these files may be re created and detected again as activity traces This wizard consists of a series of screens steps navigated using the Back and the Next buttons to close the wizard once it has completed its work use the Finish button To stop the wizard at any stage use the Cancel button To start the wizard 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe Security section click the My System Tune Up button 3 In the window that will open click the Erase Your Activities History button MY VIRTUAL KEYBOARD When working on your computer the cases frequently occur when it is required to enter your personal data or username and password For instance when registering on Internet sites using online stores etc T
186. ating system If you want to use Firewall as the main protection tool for network activity click the Next button Microsoft Windows firewall will be disabled automatically If you want to protect your computer with Microsoft Windows firewall select the Keep Microsoft Windows Firewall enabled option In this case the Firewall component will be installed but disabled to avoid conflicts in the application s operation STEP 9 FINAL PREPARATION FOR INSTALLATION This step completes the preparation for installing Kaspersky My Computer Protection on your computer At the initial and custom installation see page 31 of the application please do not uncheck the Protect the installation process box If any errors occur during the application installation enabling the protection will allow you to perform a correct procedure of installation rollback When you retry the installation we recommend that you uncheck this box If the application is being remotely installed using Windows Remote Desktop you are advised to uncheck fe Protect _ the installation process box If this box is checked the installation procedure may be left unfinished or performed incorrectly To proceed with the installation click the Install button When installing Kaspersky PURE components which intercept network traffic current network connections will be _ terminated The majority of terminated connections will be restored after a pause Kaspersky PURE Conf
187. ation installation will go on To cancel the application installation click the Cancel button STEP 4 PARTICIPATING IN THE KASPERSKY SECURITY NETWORK PROGRAM You can participate in the Kaspersky Security Network program The purpose of the program consists in revealing new threats to data security and improve the quality of Kaspersky Lab s products To help us do it you can provide our company the right of using the information about the status of your computer s security and the threats you have detected To perform the analysis you can also send information about the operating system and the unique identifier which is assigned to your computer by Kaspersky PURE Kaspersky Lab guarantees that no personal data will be used Please view the regulations concerning the participation in Kaspersky Security Network If you accept all terms of it check e I accept the terms of participation in Kaspersky Security Network box Click the Next button The installation will continue STEP 5 SELECTING THE DESTINATION FOLDER This step is available if the custom selection of Kaspersky PURE is selected see page 31 At this step you can select the destination folder into which Kaspersky PURE should be installed The default path for the application installation is as follows e lt drive gt Program Files Kaspersky Lab Kaspersky PURE for 32 bit systems e lt drive gt Program Files x86 Kaspersky Lab Kaspersky PURE for
188. ation operation or maintenance theft vandalism acts of God acts of terrorism power failures or surges casualty alteration non permitted modification or repairs by any party other than Rightholder or any other third parties or Your actions or causes beyond Rightholder s reasonable control y any defect not made known by You to Rightholder as soon as practical after the defect first appears and z incompatibility caused by hardware and or software components installed on Your Computer You acknowledge accept and agree that no software is error free and You are advised to back up the Computer with frequency and reliability suitable for You The Rightholder does not provide any guarantee that the Software will work correctly in case of violations of the terms described in the User Manual or in this Agreement The Rightholder does not guarantee that the Software will work correctly if You do not regularly download Updates specified in Clause 2 6 of this Agreement The Rightholder does not guarantee protection from the threats described in the User Manual after the expiration of the period specified in Clauses 3 2 or 3 3 of this Agreement or after the License to use the Software is terminated for any reason 7 6 THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS AND THE RIGHTHOLDER MAKES NO REPRESENTATION AND GIVES NO WARRANTY AS TO ITS USE OR PERFORMANCE EXCEPT FOR ANY WARRANTY CONDITION REPRESENTATION OR TERM THE EXTENT TO WHICH CANNOT BE EXCLU
189. ation downloads databases and module updates to your computer ADMINISTRATION SERVER CERTIFICATE Certificate which allows Administration server authentication when connecting Administration console to it and when exchanging data with users computers Administration server certificate is created at the installation of Administration server and is stored in the Cert subfolder of the application installation folder NETWORK PORT TCP and UDP parameter that determines the destination of data packets in IP format that are transmitted to a host over a network and makes it possible for various programs running on a single host to receive data independently of each other Each program processes data received via certain port this is sometimes referred to as the program listening to that port For some common network protocols there are usually standard port numbers for example web servers usually receive HTTP requests on TCP port 80 however generally a program can use any protocol on any port Possible values 1 to 65535 SCRIPT A small computer program or an independent part of a program function which as a rule has been developed to execute a small specific task It is most often used with programs embedded into hypertext Scripts are run for example when you open a certain website If real time protection is enabled the application will track the scripts launching intercept them and scan for viruses Depending on the results o
190. atus parameter in the Additional section EDITING AN APPLICATION RULE When an application is started for the first time Application Control determines its status and includes it in a certain group After that the component logs the actions performed by this application in the system and manages its activity based on which group see section Application groups on page 88 it belongs to When an application accesses a resource the component checks if the application has the required access rights and performs the action determined by the rule You can edit the rule that was created for the application when determining its status and including the application in the corresponding group SW To change an application rule please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open select the Application Control section My COMPUTER PROTECTION 3 In the window that will open in the Application Control block click the Application activity link 4 Inthe Application Activity Control window that will open in the Category dropdown list select the required category 5 Inthe Status column left click the link with the application s status for the required application 6 Inthe menu that will open select the Custom settings item 7 Inthe window that will open on the Rules tab edit the access rules for the required resource category EDITING A RULE FOR AN APPL
191. automatically apply the action recommended by Kaspersky Lab specialists when dangerous objects are detected For malicious objects this action is Disinfect Delete if disinfection fails for suspicious objects Skip SW To change the specified action to be performed on detected objects 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe left part of the window select the required task in the Scan My Computer Full Scan Quick Scan Object Scan section My COMPUTER PROTECTION 4 Inthe Action block specify the required action for the task selected CHANGING THE TYPE OF OBJECTS TO SCAN When specifying the type of objects to scan you establish which file formats and sizes will be scanned when the selected scan task runs When selecting the file tyoe you should remember the following features e Probability of penetration of malicious code into several file formats Such as ft and its further activation is quite low At the same time there are formats that contain or may contain an executable code such as exe dll doc The risk of penetration and activation of malicious code in such files is fairly high e Remember that an intruder can send a virus to your computer in a file with the txt extension whereas it Is in fact an executable file renamed as txt file If you have selected the Files scanned by
192. base creates an empty copy of the Password Database that will become active SW To move or rename the Password Database please do the following 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe Security section click Password Manager 3 Inthe left part of the Settings window select My Passwords 4 Inthe right part of the window under Location click P located in the right part of the Path field 5 Inthe Select Password Database window specify the name and path of the file and click the Open button 6 Inthe Password Database location window select the required action to be performed on the Password Database and confirm it by clicking OK 7 Inthe Password Manager window enter the Master Password to confirm the changes To change the current Password Database please do the following 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe Security section click Password Manager 3 Inthe left part of the Settings window select My Passwords 4 Inthe right part of the window under Location click P located in the right part of the Path field 5 Inthe Select Password Database window select the Password Database file and click the Open button 6 Inthe Password Manager window enter the Master Password of the restored Password Database My PASSWORD MANAGER CREATING NEW PASSWORD DATABASE Password Manager allows the use of several Password Databases Creating a new Password Database allows your personal data to be separated
193. base of known applications included with Computer Protection installation package If a record for the application being started is found in the base it will be included in the corresponding group If no record for the application being started is found in the base the component will proceed to the next step 4 Sends information about the application s executable file to the base of known applications stored at a Kaspersky Lab s server If the base already contains a record related to the information sent the application will be included in the corresponding group If the base is inaccessible for example no Internet connection is active the component will proceed to the next step 5 Calculates the application s threat rating using the heuristic analysis Applications with lower rating are placed into the Low Restricted group If the application s rating is high Computer Protection will notify you about it and will offer you to select a group into which you should place this application When these scans are completed a notification displays the final decision regarding the application By default the notification is disabled When the application is restarted Application Control checks its integrity If the application has not been changed the component applies the existing rule to it If the application has been changed Application Control analyzes it using the algorithm described above SEE ALSO Jet ATI NON Spe cists cee E EE a a
194. bject is given as a link to www viruslist com where you can find more detailed information on the type of threat detected on your computer e Full name of the malicious object and a path to it You are asked to select one of the following responses to the object e Delete delete malicious object Before deleting a backup copy of the object is created in case the necessity arises to restore it or a portrait of its infection e Skip block access to the object but perform no actions on it simply record information about it in a report You can later come back to skipped malicious objects in the report window However you cannot postpone processing objects detected in emails To apply the selected action to all objects of the same status detected in the current session of protection component or a task operation check the J Apply to all box The current session is the time from when the component is started until it is disabled or the application is restarted or the time from beginning a virus scan task until it is complete UNAVAILABLE UPDATE SERVER If one or several networked computers use a currently unavailable computer as an update server regular update of Kaspersky PURE is impossible In this case network security is put in jeopardy and Kaspersky PURE displays a corresponding message in the network protection state report To ensure safe operation turn on the unavailable computer or assign another update source MALI
195. blocks the activity of this application Activity analysis is performed for all applications including those grouped as Trusted by the Application Control component on page 86 For these applications you can disable notifications of Proactive Defense As opposed to the Application Control component Proactive Defense reacts immediately to a defined sequence of an application s actions To edit Proactive Defense settings please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Proactive Defense component 4 Make the required changes in the settings for the component you have selected IN THIS SECTION Using the list Of dangerous activity cccccceeeecccceeeeceeecseseeeeeceeueeeecaeueeeeceeseeeeseeeaeeeseeeaeeeeessaasceeeseaaeceeesaaaeceesssagesessasees 107 Changing the dangerous activity monitoring rule cece ccccceccceeeeeeecceeecaeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeesssaeaeeseeeeenes 108 Creating a group Of trusted applications cccccccccssseeccecceeececcceuseceecsaaeceessuaseeeessauaeceeeseeeceessaaeceeessaueeeesssaneeeesssaneees 109 System AC COUNMMS COMILON eege 109 USING THE LIST OF DANGEROUS ACTIVITY Note that configuring the settings for activity control in Computer Protection under Microsoft Windows
196. button You can also switch between the wizard s steps that you have completed by using the browsing links in the top part of the window SW To create a backup storage area please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Backup button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Storages section and click the Create button 3 Backup Storage Creation Wizard will be launched Let us take a closer look at the wizard s steps a Inthe left part of the Drive window select the type of data storage medium which will be used as a backup storage To ensure data security we recommend that you create backup storages on removable disk drives b Inthe Protection window set a password to protect data against unauthorized access if necessary c Inthe Settings window set a limit on the number of files versions which may coexist within the storage and specify the time interval for storing backup copies if necessary d Inthe Summary window enter the name for the new storage and confirm the storage creation with the settings you have specified CONNECTING A STORAGE If you have created a storage with the Backup module but it is unavailable on the computer you are currently using for example after the operating system is reinstalled or if the storage is copied from another computer you will need to connect that storage in order to start working with the data SW Toconnect an existing storage please do the follow
197. by law or equity while preserving to the fullest extent possible its original intent No waiver of any provision or condition herein shall be valid unless in writing and signed by you and an authorized representative of Rightholder provided that no waiver of any breach of any provisions of this Agreement will constitute a waiver of any prior concurrent or subsequent breach Rightholder s failure to insist upon or enforce strict performance of any provision of this Agreement or any right shall not be construed as a waiver of any such provision or right 14 Rightholder Contact Information Should you have any questions concerning this Agreement or if you desire to contact the Rightholder for any reason please contact our Customer Service Department at Kaspersky Lab ZAO 10 build 1 17 Volokolamsky Proezd Moscow 123060 Russian Federation Tel 7 495 797 8700 Fax 7 495 645 7939 E mail info kaspersky com Web site www kaspersky com 1997 2009 Kaspersky Lab ZAO All Rights Reserved The Software and any accompanying documentation are copyrighted and protected by copyright laws and international copyright treaties as well as other intellectual property laws and treaties CONTENTS LICENSE AGREEMENT sxecececstece ect cececeesnceteenscetececsaeemcctoceceeeeeneceeensseeucecsaceucchodeemeeeeneeeeensneeuceceateeceteceemeeueuetseenecetneeeeseaees 3 ABOUT TRIS COIDE cearn e E E E E E 19 OBTAINING INFORMATION ABOUT THE APPU
198. cation s architecture HEADER The information in the beginning of a file or a message which is comprised of low level data on file or message status and processing In particular the email message header contains such data as information about the sender and the recipient and the date GLOSSARY DISK BOOT SECTOR A boot secior is a particular area on a computer s hard drive floppy or other data storage device It contains information on the disc s file system and a boot loader program that is responsible for starting the operating system There exist a number of viruses that infect boot sectors which are thus called boot viruses The Kaspersky Lab application allows to scan boot sectors for viruses and disinfect them if an infection is found TASK Functions performed by Kaspersky Lab s application are implemented as tasks such as Real time file protection Full computer scan Database update INFECTED OBJECT Object containing a malicious code It is detected when a section of the object s code completely matches a section of the code of a known threat Kaspersky Lab does not recommend using such objects since they may cause your computer to be infected EXCLUSION Exclusion is an object excluded from the scan by Kaspersky Lab application You can exclude files of certain formats from the scan use a file mask or exclude a certain area for example a folder or a program program processes or objects by threat type acco
199. cation status cccccccseeeecccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeseseeseeeeeesseeeeeeseeeeeeeags 92 Eding an ei eieiei RE UE 92 Editing a rule for an application group eee eee eee ee nese eeaeae eee eeaeaeeeeeeaaaeeeesaaaeeeeesaaaeeeesaaaeeesessaaeeeeesaaneeesenaaes 93 Creating a network rule for application nn nn EE EEE EEE IE IE II I nnn nnn i i ii iiiinnnnnnnnnnennnneneeeeeeeeeees 93 Ge ai elteren 94 Deleting rules for applications sadinzsandcendasnenamsiioniasmacsndaensnenddomdaeecigciensundcpaasatnie dxendsbedaansiaunniiendsendabnsxamivinndagmancaccomesendccmsetndinacanss 94 PLACING APPLICATIONS INTO GROUPS Applications included by the Application Control component in the Trusted group see section Application groups on page 88 do not impose any threat to the system You can use the option of specifying the range of trusted applications activities of which will not be scanned by Application Control Trusted applications may include those with a digital signature or those listed in Kaspersky Security Network s database For other applications which do not fit into the trusted group you can use heuristic analysis to determine a group or specify a particular group into which the application will be added automatically For Application Control to view applications with a digital signature and or contained in the Kaspersky Security Network database as trusted and not to notify of their activity please do the following 1 Ope
200. cation to continue working using the previous databases if the update fails The rollback option is useful if for example part of the databases has been corrupted Local databases may be corrupted by the user or by a malicious program which is possible only if the Kaspersky PURE s self defense see page 248 is disabled You can easily roll back to the previous databases and try to update the databases later SW To roll back to the previous database version 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe window that will open select the My Computer Protection section 3 In the window that will open select the Update section and click the Roll back button SELECTING UPDATE SOURCE Update source is a resource containing updates for databases and application modules of Computer Protection Update sources can be HTTP or FTP servers or local or network folders The main update source is Kaspersky Lab s update servers These are special Internet sites which contain updates for databases and application modules for all Kaspersky Lab products If you do not have access to Kaspersky Lab s update servers for example your computer is not connected to the Internet you can call the Kaspersky Lab main office at 7 495 797 87 00 or 7 495 645 79 39 to request contact information of Kaspersky Lab partners who can provide you with updates on floppy disks or ZIP disks You can copy the updates from a removable disk and upload them to an FT
201. cation window and click the Quarantine Perform the required actions in the window that will open on the Detected threats tab STORING THE QUARANTINE AND BACKUP OBJECTS You can edit the following settings for the quarantine and the backup Determine the maximum storage time for quarantined objects and for copies of objects in the backup the Store objects no longer than box By default the objects storage time is 30 days once it expires the objects will be deleted You can change the maximum storage term or remove this restriction altogether Specify the maximum size of data storage area the X Maximum size box By default the maximum size is 100 MB You can cancel the report size limit or set another value for it SW To configure the quarantine and backup settings 1 2 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window In the window that will open select the Reports and Storages section In the Quarantine and Backup section check the required boxes and enter the maximum size of data storage area if necessary REPORTS The operation of each component of Computer Protection and the performance of each virus scan and update are recorded in a report While working with reports you can perform the following actions e select the component or task See page 175 for which you wish to view the event report e manage
202. ccessful installation of the certificate The automatic installation of the certificate will only be available in Microsoft Internet Explorer To scan encrypted connections in Mozilla Firefox or Opera you should install the Kaspersky Lab s certificate manually SCANNING ENCRYPTED CONNECTIONS IN MOZILLA FIREFOX Mozilla Firefox browser does not use Microsoft Windows certificate storage To scan SSL connections when using Firefox you should install the Kaspersky Lab s certificate manually To install the Kaspersky Lab s certificate please do the following 1 Inthe browser s menu select the Tools Settings item 2 Inthe window that will open select the Additional section 3 Inthe Certificates section select the Security tab and click the Viewing certificates button 4 Inthe window that will open select the Certification Centers tab and click the Restore button 5 In the window that will open select the Kaspersky Lab s certificate file The path to the Kaspersky Lab s certificate file is as follows AllUsersProfile Application Data Kaspersky Lab AVP9 Data Cert fake Kaspersky Anti Virus personal root certificate cer 6 Inthe window that will open check the boxes to select the actions that should be scanned with the certificate installed To view information about the certificate click the View button To install the Kaspersky Lab s certificate for Mozilla Firefox version 3 x please do the following 1 Inthe browser s menu
203. cess to copy from a designated place offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place e Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy For an executable the required form of the work that uses the Library must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it However as a special exception the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed in either source or binary form with the major components compiler kernel and so on of the operating system on which the executable runs unless that component itself accompanies the executable It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute 7 You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side by side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License and distribute such a combined library provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted and provided that you do these two things a Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library unco
204. cify the protected range of addresses in the Network addresses window that will open After the resource has been added to the protection scope you can edit or delete the resource using the corresponding links in the bottom part of the tab To exclude the resource from the protection scope uncheck the box 4 next to it SW To add to the list of operating system s settings and resources to be protected please do the following 1 2 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Application Control component Click the Settings button for the component you have selected In the window that will open on the Operating system tab in the Category dropdown list select the required category of operating system objects and click the Add link In the User resource window that will open click the Browse button and specify required data depending on the resource being added e File or folder In the Select file or folder window that will open specify a file or a folder e Registry key In the Please specify a registry object window that will open specify the registry key being protected After the resource has been added to the protection scope you can edit or delete the resource using the corresponding links in the bottom part of the tab To exclude the resou
205. ck and the Next buttons to close the wizard once it has completed its work use the Finish button To stop the wizard at any stage use the Cancel button You are advised not to change the text of an AVZ script received from Kaspersky Lab experts If problems occur during script execution please contact Technical Support service To start the wizard 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe bottom part of the window click the Support link 3 Inthe Support window that opens click the Support tools link in the bottom part of the window 4 Inthe Information for Technical Support Service window that opens click the Execute AVZ script button If the script successfully executes the wizard will close If an error occurs during script execution the wizard displays a corresponding error message CREATING A TRACE FILE After installing Kaspersky PURE some failures in the operating system or in the operation of individual applications may occur The most likely cause is a conflict of Kaspersky PURE with the software installed on your computer or with the drivers of your computer components You may be asked to create a tracing file for Kaspersky Lab s specialists to successfully resolve your problem To create the trace file 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe bottom part of the window click the Support link 3 Inthe Support window that opens click the Support tools link 4 Inthe Information for Technical Support Ser
206. cket rules restrict inbound network activity on specified TCP and UDP ports and filter ICMP messages A packet rule consists of a set of conditions and operations over packets and data streams performed when these conditions are met When creating packet rules remember that they have the priority over application rules While creating the rule s conditions you can specify the network service and the network address You can use an IP address as the network address or specify the network status In the latter case the addresses will be copied from all networks that are connected and have the specified status at this moment SW To create packet rule 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the Firewall component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 In the window that will open on the Filtering rules tab select the Packet rules block and click the Add link 6 Inthe Network rule window that will open specify the rule settings 7 Assign the priority for created rule After you have created the rule you can modify its settings or delete it using links in the bottom part of the tab To disable the rule uncheck the H box next to the rule s name CREATING A RULE FOR APPLICATION Firewall analyzes the activity of each applica
207. click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Spam component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 In the window that will open on the Exact methods tab in the Consider message as spam block check the If it contains URLs from the base of suspicious web addresses box SW Toscan links inside the email messages using the database of phishing addresses please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Spam component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 In the window that will open on the Exact methods tab in the Consider message as spam block check the If it contains URLs from the base of phishing web addresses box CREATING THE LIST OF TRUSTED URLS You can create a list of trusted addresses Anti Spam will check if the recipient s address is included into the list To create the list of trusted addresses 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section
208. click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Web Anti Virus component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 Inthe Web Anti Virus window that will open in the Scan methods block check uncheck the M Heuristic analysis box and specify the scan detail level below SCAN OPTIMIZATION To detect malicious code more efficiently Web Anti Virus buffers fragments of objects downloaded from the Internet When using this method Web Anti Virus only scans an object after it has been completely downloaded Then the object is scanned for viruses and returned to the user for work or blocked depending on scan results However buffering objects increases object processing time and hence the time before the application returns objects to the user This can cause problems when copying and processing large objects because the connection with the HTTP client may time out To solve this problem we suggest limiting the buffering time for web object fragments downloaded from the Internet When this time limit expires the user will receive the downloaded part of the file without scanning and once the object is fully copied it will be scanned in its entirety This allows reducing the time period needed to transfer the object to the user and eliminating the problem of disconnection at that s
209. click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Spam component 4 Inthe Security level section click the Default level button for the component selected ANTI BANNER Anti Banner blocks advertising information located on banners built into interfaces of various programs installed on your computer or displayed online Not only are banner ads devoid of useful information but they also distract you from your work and increase the amount of traffic on your computer Anti Banner blocks the commonest types of banners that are currently known using masks which are included in the Computer Protection installation package You can disable banner blocking or create your own lists of allowed and blocked banners Kaspersky Lab specialists have compiled a banner ad mask list based on specially conducted research and have included it with the Computer Protection installation package Banner ads which match the masks on the list will be blocked by Anti Banner unless banner blocking is disabled To block banners with address masks not found in the standard list the heuristic analyzer is used see section Using heuristic analysis on page 131 Besides that you can create white See section Creating the list of allowed banner addresses on page 132 and black see section Creating the list of bloc
210. component you have selected 5 Make the required changes in the component settings IN THIS SECTION COMPONENT operation el ln EE Changing email protection security level oo cee ceccccccccsssseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeseaeeseceeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeesesseeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeessaaaeeeeeeeeeas Changing actions to be performed on detected obiecs 71 Greating A proiection ele Email scanning in Microsoft Office Outlook Using heuristic analysis ee cecnceteceeenescasesaa oarectceeceanesmcreoiegancende decd A Ene aae eaea Ease aR e TEE aR SC all OrCOMDOUNA TES seirer e eE acetates a E A E EE a E r A PAS TTS OME HREN eege 71 72 72 Restoring default mail Protection settings cccccsseccccccesseceecceeeececcceuececeseeseeeeeseeueeeeessuueceessuaaeceeessaaeeeesssaeeeesssageeesssaees 74 COMPONENT OPERATION ALGORITHM Computer Protection includes the component which ensures scanning the email for dangerous objects named Mail Anti Virus It loads when the operating system launches and runs continually scanning all email on the POP3 SMTP IMAP MAPI and NNTP protocols as well as on secure connections SSL for POP3 and IMAP The indicator of the component s operation is the application icon in the taskbar notification area which looks like Fos whenever an email message Is being scanned By default email protection is carried out as follows 1 Each email received or sent by the user is intercepted by the component 2
211. courage the use of this software as the basis of commercial products provided that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the product vendor ansi2knr c is included in this distribution by permission of L Peter Deutsch sole proprietor of its copyright holder Aladdin Enterprises of Menlo Park CA ansi2knr c is NOT covered by the above copyright and conditions but instead by the usual distribution terms of the Free Software Foundation principally that you must include source code if you redistribute it See the file ansi2knr c for full details However since ansi2knr c is not needed as part of any program generated from the IJG code this does not limit you more than the foregoing paragraphs do The Unix configuration script configure was produced with GNU Autoconf It is copyright by the Free Software Foundation but is freely distributable The same holds for its supporting scripts config guess config sub Itconfig Itmain sh Another support script install sh is copyright by M I T but is also freely distributable It appears that the arithmetic coding option of the JPEG spec is covered by patents owned by IBM AT amp T and Mitsubishi Hence arithmetic coding cannot legally be used without obtaining one or more licenses For this reason support for arithmetic coding has been removed from the free JPEG software Since arithmetic coding provides only a marginal gain over the unpatented Huffman mode it is unlikely that very man
212. cue Disk is designed to scan and disinfect infected x86 compatible computers It should be used when the infection is at such level that it is impossible to disinfect the computer using anti virus applications or malware removal utilities Such as Kaspersky AVPTool run under the operating system In this case a higher degree of efficiency of the disinfection is achieved since malware programs do not gain control when the operating system is being loaded Rescue disk is an iso file based on the Linux core that comprises the following e system and configuration Linux files e asetof operating system diagnostic utilities e a set of additional tools file manager etc e Kaspersky Rescue Disk files e files containing anti virus databases A computer with corrupted operating system is booted from a CD DVD ROM device To do so the computer should be equipped with suitable device To create a rescue disk please do the following 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe Security section click the My System Tune Up button 3 Inthe window that will open click the Create Rescue Disk button to run the disk creation wizard 4 Follow the wizard instructions 5 Using the file provided by the wizard create a boot CD DVD To do so you can use any CD DVD burning application such as Nero SEE ALSO EE 200 Booting the computer USING the rescue dek 201 CREATING THE RESCUE DISK Rescue disk creation means the creation of a disk
213. d click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open select the Network section 4 Inthe Monitored ports section click the Select button 5 Inthe Network ports window that will open uncheck the LJ box next to the port s description SW To create the list of applications for which you wish to monitor all the ports please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open select the Network section 4 Inthe Monitored ports section click the Select button 5 Inthe Network ports window that will open check the Monitor all ports for specified applications box and click the Add link in the section below 6 Inthe menu that will open select an application Once you select the Browse item a window will open in which you should specify the path to an executable file Once you select the Applications item the list of applications currently running will open 7 Inthe Application window that will open specify the description for the application selected SCANNING ENCRYPTED CONNECTIONS Connecting using the Secure Sockets Layer SSL protocol protects data exchange channel on the Internet The SSL protocol allows to identify the parties exchanging data using electronic certi
214. d confidential data of Rightholder and you shall exercise reasonable care in protecting the activation code and or license key in confidence provided that you can transfer the activation code and or license key to third parties as set forth in Clause 2 5 of this Agreement or in additional agreement You shall not rent lease or lend the Software to any third party You shall not use the Software in the creation of data or software used for detection blocking or treating threats described in the User Manual The Rightholder has the right to block the key file or to terminate Your License to use the Software in the event You breach any of the terms and conditions of this Agreement and without any refund to You If You are using the trial version of the Software You do not have the right to receive the Technical Support specified in Clause 4 of this Agreement and You don t have the right to transfer the license or the rights to use the Software to any third party Limited Warranty and Disclaimer The Rightholder guarantees that the Software will substantially perform according to the specifications and descriptions set forth in the User Manual provided however that such limited warranty shall not apply to the following w Your Computere deficiencies and related infringement for which Rightholder s expressly disclaims any warranty responsibility x malfunctions defects or failures resulting from misuse abuse accident neglect improper install
215. d eliminates the traces of actions by malware objects in the system Kaspersky Lab recommends that you run the wizard after the computer has been disinfected to make sure that all threats and damage due to the infections have been fixed You can also use the wizard if you suspect that your computer is infected The wizard checks whether there are any changes to the system such as access to the network is blocked known format file extensions are changed the toolbar is blocked etc Such damage can be caused by actions of malicious programs system failures or even incorrect operation of system optimization applications After the review is complete the wizard analyzes the information to evaluate whether there is system damage which requires immediate attention Based on the review a list of actions necessary to eliminate the problems is generated These actions are grouped by categories based on the severity of the problems detected This wizard consists of a series of screens steps navigated using the Back and the Next buttons to close the wizard once it has completed its work use the Finish button To stop the wizard at any stage use the Cancel button To start the wizard 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe Security section click the My System Tune Up button 3 In the window that will open click the System Restore button RESCUE DISK Kaspersky PURE includes a service that allows creation of a rescue disk Res
216. d the application will offer you to contact Kaspersky Lab s Technical Support service If any errors have occurred when connecting to an activation server and if you cannot obtain a key file please contact the Technical Support Service ACTIVATING THE TRIAL VERSION Use this activation option if you want to install a trial version of Kaspersky PURE before making the decision to purchase a commercial version You will be provided a free key file valid for a term specified in the trial version license agreement When the trial license is expired it cannot be activated for the second time If any errors have occurred when connecting to an activation server and if you cannot obtain a key file please contact the Technical Support Service COMPLETING THE ACTIVATION The Activation Wizard will inform you that Kaspersky PURE is successfully activated Additionally information about the license Is provided license type commercial trial expiration date and number of hosts for the license STEP 2 RESTRICTING ACCESS TO THE APPLICATION The purpose of access restriction consists in preventing unauthorized attempts of disabling the protection or modifying the settings of the components integrated into Kaspersky PURE Restricting access to Kaspersky PURE with a password may be useful in the following cases e if a personal computer is used by several persons probably with varying levels of computer literacy e if Kaspersky PURE ensures security
217. d them If the A Include subfolders box has been selected when adding the object the scan will run recursively Manually added objects will be also scanned for viruses To delete an object from the list select the object and click the Delete link Objects which appear on the list by default cannot be edited or deleted In addition to deleting objects from the list you can also temporarily skip them when running a scan To do so select the object from the list and uncheck the box to the left of the object s name If the scan scope is empty or it contains no selected objects a scan task cannot be started To create the list of objects for a vulnerability scan task 1 2 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window In the left part of the window select the Vulnerability Scan task in the Scan My Computer section In the Scan scope block click the Settings button for the task selected In the Vulnerability Scan list of objects window that will open create a list using the Add Edit Delete links To temporarily exclude any objects from the list of objects to be scanned uncheck the boxes next to them RUN MODE CREATING A SCHEDULE Vulnerability scan task can be scheduled to run automatically The main thing to choose is the time interval between task startups If it is not possible to start the task for a
218. d to individual tasks and security requirements Creating them may take a long time so you are advised to save them before restoring the application s default settings After you are finished with the Configuration Wizard the Recommended security level will be set for all components except for the settings that you have decided to keep customized when restoring In addition the settings that you have specified when working with the Wizard will also be applied SW To restore protection settings please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Settings link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe window that will open select the Application settings management section and click the Restore button 3 In the window that will open check the boxes for the settings requiring to be saved Click the Next button This will run the Application Configuration Wizard Follow its instructions NOTIFICATIONS When runtime events occur special notification messages are displayed on the screen Depending on how critical the event is for computer security you might receive the following types of notifications Alarm A critical event has occurred for instance a malicious object or dangerous activity has been detected on your system You should immediately decide how to deal with this threat The notification window of this type is of the red color Warning A potentially dangerous event has occurred For instance p
219. date please do the following 1 2 Open the main application window and click the Backup button In the window that will open select the Restore section Select the storage where the required backup copies are located and click the Restore data button In the left part of the Restore data from storage window select an archive In the right part of the window select the required file from the list and click the Versions button In the File versions window that will open select the required date and click the Open link RESTORING DATA The data may be restored from the backup copies of files if necessary Backup procedure is only available for connected storages Being restored data from backup copies are saved into the folder you have selected Files may be restored in various ways restore the most recent file version select a version to restore by date SW To restore the most recent file version please do the following 1 2 Open the main application window and click the Backup button In the window that will open select the Restore section Select the storage where the required backup copies are located and click the Restore data button In the left part of the Restore data from storage window select an archive In the right part of the window select the files you need to restore To do so check the M boxes next to the required files To select all files click the Select all button in the bottom pa
220. de 176 SEISCTING event TY OCS eeh eege 176 Displaying data ON the screen 177 Extended display mode for statistics cccccccssssseeeeeeeceeeesseeeeeeeeeaeaaaeeeeeeeseaeaseeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeeeesseaeseeeeseesnaaaaes 178 EU Deele ie ln e EC eee enee eee ee een eee eee ent Perino One eee ee eee 179 USNO COMPETEN e eee eee eee en nn tame a ee eee eee ane eee eee ere eee 179 SE TEE 180 BA FUP EE 181 Creato a Dackup Storage di gt een ee eee eee E e E E 181 CONAS A tel E e eee ee ee eee er 182 EE 182 Briet Te ez ec Ce 2 6 amen es ete trees iaeeee tr eer e E ee ee ee ele eee eee 183 Greating RE ae 183 RUNNIN A CIID EE 184 Searching for backup ele 184 Viewing backup copy data 185 PEONO Be E EE 185 VIEWING event Ce e sageccucasicezenansseaccdstentsinnienantietienereectiacudetecinexetnasadieisesesasannecoiededtecastanacOietietanccsveiwihedivbareateecdeets 186 MY PARENTAL CONTROL EE 187 Enabling and configuring Parental Control 188 Limiting time of Internet ACCESS ccccseeccecseeeecceeeeecseeeeecaeeeeeceeeeeaaueeeseeeeeesaaeeeessueeessaeeeesseeesseeeeessaeeeessaeeeeseeeeees 189 Aere 10 WED EE 190 Downloading files from the Internet ccccccccsseeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeesseeeeesueeessaeeeeseaeeeesegeeessaueessseeeeesneeees 190 TIS SENG gane ee e E T E E T E A A E A E E E A 191 Pean meS TGN ME 192 Sending personal data EE 193 Key words Sedlo NEE 194 Limiting computer usage me 194 FUMING APPUCATI ONS
221. ders window that will open click the Import link 7 Select the import source from the dropdown menu e Import from file After selection of this source a file selection dialog will be displayed The application supports import from csv or txt file types e Import from the Address Book After selection of this source an address book selection dialog will be displayed Select the required address book from this window DETERMINING SPAM AND POTENTIAL SPAM RATINGS Experts at Kaspersky Lab work to provide the best possible precision of soam and probable spam detection in Anti Spam Spam recognition is based on modern filtration methods which allow training Anti Spam to distinguish spam probable spam and useful email The training procedure is implemented as analysis of a certain number of user messages Anti Spam is trained by working with the Training Wizard and training from email clients In doing so every individual element of good emails or spam are assigned a factor When an email message enters your inbox Anti Spam scans the message using the iBayes algorithm for elements of spam and of good email The factors for each element are totaled and the spam rating and potential soam rating are calculated Probable spam rating defines the value that will cause assignment of the Probable spam status to a message if exceeded If the Recommended Anti Spam level is used any message with spam rating higher than 60 is considered probable spam
222. detected in emails For example you could select e Attempt to disinfect infected parts if this option is selected the infected object will be attempted to disinfect if it cannot be disinfected the object will remain in the message e Delete infected parts if this option is selected the dangerous object in the message will be deleted regardless of whether it is infected or suspected to be infected By default The Bat places all infected email objects in Quarantine without attempting to disinfect them The Bat does not give special headers to emails containing dangerous objects SW To set up email protection rules in The Bat 1 Open the main The Bat window 2 Select the Settings item from the Properties menu of the mail client 3 Select the Virus protection item from the settings tree USING HEURISTIC ANALYSIS Essentially the heuristic method analyzes the object s activities in the system If those actions are typical of malicious objects the object is likely to be classed as malicious or suspicious This allows new threats to be detected before they have been analyzed by virus analysts By default heuristic analysis is enabled Computer Protection will notify you when a malicious object is detected in a message You should react to the notification by further processing the message Additionally you can set the detail level for scans Light Medium or Deep To do so move the slider bar to the selected position
223. difications copies additions or maintenance packs etc 1 7 User Manual means user manual administrator guide reference book and related explanatory or other materials 1 8 Software Acquisition means purchase of the Software or acquisition of the Software on terms defined in additional agreement including acquisition at no charge 2 Grant of License 21 The Rightholder hereby grants You a non exclusive license to store load install execute and display to use the Software on a specified number of Computers in order to assist in protecting Your Computer on which the Software is installed from threats described in the User Manual according to the all technical requirements described in the User Manual and according to the terms and conditions of this Agreement the License and you accept this License Trial Version If you have received downloaded and or installed a trial version of the Software and are hereby granted an evaluation license for the Software you may use the Software only for evaluation purposes and only during the single applicable evaluation period unless otherwise indicated from the date of the initial installation Any use of the Software for other purposes or beyond the applicable evaluation period is strictly prohibited Multiple Environment Software Multiple Language Software Dual Media Software Multiple Copies Bundles If you use different versions of the Software or different language editions of the S
224. dified in the following manner The Agreement Steward reserves the right to publish new versions including revisions of this Agreement from time to time No one other than the Agreement Steward has the right to modify this Agreement IBM is the initial Agreement Steward IBM may assign the responsibility to serve as the Agreement Steward to a suitable separate entity Each new version of the Agreement will be given a distinguishing version number The Program including Contributions may always be distributed subject to the version of the Agreement under which it was received In addition after a new version of the Agreement is published Contributor may elect to distribute the Program including its Contributions under the new version Except as expressly stated in Sections 2 a and 2 b above Recipient receives no rights or licenses to the intellectual property of any Contributor under this Agreement whether expressly by implication estoppel or otherwise All rights in the Program not expressly granted under this Agreement are reserved This Agreement is governed by the laws of the State of New York and the intellectual property laws of the United States of America No party to this Agreement will bring a legal action under this Agreement more than one year after the cause of action arose Each party waives its rights to a jury trial in any resulting litigation PASSTHRU LIBRARY The Ndis Intermediate Miniport driver sample Copyright c 1992 20
225. disabled the Password Database is automatically locked Bluetooth device To access the Password Database use a Bluetooth device Bluetooth must be enabled on both the mobile phone and the computer which uses Password Manager When connecting a mobile phone and computer via Bluetooth the Password Database will be unlocked If the link drops e g you disable Bluetooth on the mobile phone the Password Database will be locked No authorization Access to the database is unprotected Without authorization your personal data is accessible to all users who work on your computer If you select authorization using a USB or Bluetooth device you are recommended to remember your Master Password If there is no authorization device available Password Manager enables the use of Master Password for access to your personal data WS To change the authorization method please do the following 1 2 3 Open the main application window In the Security section click Password Manager In the left part of the Settings window select Authorization method 4 Inthe right part of the window under Authorization method select an authorization option from the drop down list SEE ALSO Using USB and Me ee Be Eer 234 USING USB AND BLUETOOTH DEVICES To access the Password Database see page 233 Password Manager allows the use of various USB and Bluetooth devices SW To use a USB device to access the Password Database please d
226. distributed under this Agreement and b in the case of each subsequent Contributor i changes to the Program and ii additions to the Program where such changes and or additions to the Program originate from and are distributed by that particular Contributor A Contribution originates from a Contributor if it was added to the Program by such Contributor itself or anyone acting on such Contributor s behalf Contributions do not include additions to the Program which i are Separate modules of software distributed in conjunction with the Program under their own license agreement and ii are not derivative works of the Program Contributor means any person or entity that distributes the Program Licensed Patents mean patent claims licensable by a Contributor which are necessarily infringed by the use or sale of its Contribution alone or when combined with the Program Program means the Contributions distributed in accordance with this Agreement Recipient means anyone who receives the Program under this Agreement including all Contributors 2 GRANT OF RIGHTS a Subject to the terms of this Agreement each Contributor hereby grants Recipient a non exclusive worldwide royalty free copyright license to reproduce prepare derivative works of publicly display publicly perform distribute and sublicense the Contribution of such Contributor if any and such derivative works in source code and object code form b Subject to the
227. dor and which are not listed in the base of trusted applications However these applications have received a low value of the threat rating on page 88 They are allowed to perform some operations such as access to other processes system control hidden network access The user s permission is required for most operations e High Restricted Applications without a digital signature and which are not listed in the base of trusted applications These applications have a high value of the threat rating The applications of this group require the user s permission for most actions which affect the system some actions are not allowed for such applications My COMPUTER PROTECTION e Untrusted Applications without a digital signature and which are not listed in the base of trusted applications These applications have received a very high value of the threat rating Application Control blocks any actions performed by such applications The applications classed by Application Control in a certain group are assigned the corresponding status and inherit the rights of access to the resources from the group rule See section Application Control rules on page 90 Kaspersky Lab advises you not to move applications from one group to another Instead if required modify the application s rights to access specific system resources see section Editing an application rule on page 92 APPLICATION RUN SEQUENCE Application startup may be initiated
228. dow that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window In the left part of the window select the required task in the Scan My Computer Full Scan Quick Scan Object Scan section In the Security level block click the Settings button for the task selected In the window that will open on the Additional tab in the Scan technologies block select the required setting value CHANGING THE SCAN METHOD You can edit the scan settings which determine its thoroughness By default the mode of using application s database records to search for threats is always enabled Moreover you can apply various scan methods and scan technologies see page 141 The scan mode in which Computer Protection compares the object found to the database records is called signature analysis and is always used by default Additionally you can always use the heuristic analysis This method presumes the analysis of the actions an object performs within the system If its actions are typical of malicious objects the object is likely to be classed as malicious or suspicious Additionally you can select the detail level for heuristic analysis light medium or deep To do so move the slider bar to the selected position Apart from these scan methods you can also use the rootkit scan Rootkits are sets of tools that can hide malicious programs in your operating system These utilities are injected into the system hiding their presence and the
229. ds To specify keys words for a user name click and then fill in the Description field To copy a user name password to clipboard click To create a password automatically click on the Generate password link see page 239 IDENTITY In addition to user name and password other personal data is often used for registration on the website e g full name year of birth sex email address phone number country of residence etc Password Manager can store all this data in an encrypted Password Database in the form of Identities During registration on a new website Password Manager automatically fills in the registration form using data from a chosen Identity To save private and business information separately you can use several identity cards You can change the identity parameters later see page 221 To create an identity card please do the following 1 2 3 4 In the context menuof the application select Password Manager In the Password Manager window under the tab Edit click Add Identity In the window that will open in the Name field enter the name of the identity Enter values for the required fields and activate them by double clicking the mouse GROUP OF ACCOUNTS Using groups of accounts can help organize information in the Password Database A group consists of a folder with accounts added to it Newly created groups are displayed in the Password Manager context menu the Accounts gt lt Group name
230. e recommend that you use the Privacy Cleaner Wizard see page 204 When cleaning the system some files such as Microsoft Windows log file Microsoft Office event log may be in use by the system In order to delete these files the wizard will suggest that you restart the system This wizard consists of a series of screens steps navigated using the Back and the Next buttons to close the wizard once it has completed its work use the Finish button To stop the wizard at any stage use the Cancel button SW To start the wizard 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe Security section click the My System Tune Up button 3 In the window that will open click the Delete unused data button PRIVACY CLEANER WIZARD Many of a computer user s actions are registered in the system The following data is saved in this case e Histories containing information e about visited websites e about applications launch e about search requests e about opening saving files by different applications e Microsoft Windows system log records e Temporary files etc All these sources of information about the user s activity may contain confidential data including passwords and may become available to intruders for analysis Frequently the user has insufficient knowledge to prevent information being stolen in this way Kaspersky PURE includes the Privacy Cleaner Wizard This wizard searches for traces of user s activities in the system
231. e Compound files window check he Extract compound files in the background box and specify the minimum file size in the field below SW To prevent Computer Protection from unpacking large sized compound files 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the File Anti Virus component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected My COMPUTER PROTECTION 5 In the window that will open on the Performance tab in the Scan of compound files block click the Additional button 6 Inthe Compound files window that will open check the X Do not unpack large compound files box and specify the file size in the field next to it CHANGING THE SCAN MODE The scan mode is the condition which triggers File Anti Virus into activity By default Computer Protection uses smart mode which determines if the object is subject to scan based on the actions performed on it For example when working with a Microsoft Office document Computer Protection scans the file when it is first opened and last closed Intermediate operations that overwrite the file do not cause it to be scanned You can change the object scan mode The scan mode should be selected depending on the files you work with most of the time SW To change the object scan mode 1 Op
232. e My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Mail Anti Virus component 4 Specify the required action for the component you have selected CREATING A PROTECTION SCOPE Protection scope is understood as the type of messages to be scanned By default Computer Protection scans both incoming and outgoing messages If you have selected the scanning of incoming messages only you are advised to scan outgoing mail when you first begin using My Computer Protection because it is likely that there are worms on your computer which will propagate themselves via email This will avoid unpleasant situations caused by unmonitored mass emailing of infected emails from your computer The protection scope also includes the settings used to integrate the Mail Anti Virus component into the system and the protocols to be scanned By default the Mail Anti Virus component is integrated into the Microsoft Office Outlook and The Bat email client applications SW To disable scans of outgoing emails please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Mail Anti Virus component 4 Click the Settings button for
233. e Password Database will be locked The value of the interval varies from 1 to 60 minutes It is recommended that the Password Database be locked after 5 20 minutes of computer inactivity You can also disable the automatic blocking of Password Database Password Manager automatically locks the Password Database after a set period of computer inactivity If automatic locking of the computer is disabled your personal data will not be protected if you leave your computer without locking it manually SW To modify the interval after which the Password Database becomes locked please do the following 1 2 Open the main application window In the Security section click Password Manager In the left part of the Settings window select My Passwords In the right part of the window under Automatic locking use the drop down list to select the time after which Password Manager will be locked To disable the locking of Password Database select Never PASSWORD MANAGER AUTHORIZATION METHOD Authorization enables to control access to your personal data You can use one of the following authorization methods Master Password To unlock the Password Database you must enter the Master Password This is the default authorization method USB device To access the Password Database connect any USB device to your computer For example flash cards cameras MP3 players and external hard drives can be used as a USB device When the USB device is
234. e Security section click Password Manager 3 Inthe left part of the Settings window select Hot keys 4 Inthe right part of the window set the required key combination for each action PASSWORD DATABASE LOCATION Password Manager s Password Database is an encrypted file see page 232 that stores all your personal data accounts user names passwords and Identities To use the Password Database you need to unlock it see page 214 get authorized By default access to personal data is protected by the Master Password Additionally Password Manager secures the Password Database using USB or Bluetooth devices You can change the access parameters see page 233 for each Password Database The default paths for different versions of Microsoft Windows are as follows e Microsoft Windows XP C Documents and Settings User_name My Documents Passwords Database e Microsoft Windows Vista C Users User_name Documents Passwords Database e Microsoft Windows 7 C Users User_name My Documents Passwords Database You can use different media to store your Password Database removable disk local disk or network drive The following actions are possible when changing the path or names of the Password Database e Copy creates a copy of the Password Database with the specified path This copy will become an active Password Database e Move the active Password Database will be saved with the specified path e Create new Password Data
235. e Settings window select the Main settings section 4 Inthe right part of the window under Clipboard set the time in seconds CAPTION BUTTON Password Manager can manage accounts directly from the application browser window via the Caption Button located in the upper right corner of the application browser window Clicking the Caption Button opens a menu with a list of user names that are related to the application web page When selecting a user name Password Manager automatically fills in authorization fields using data from the Password Database The Caption Button is accessible if the Password Database is not locked see page 214 If in addition to the Program Manager menu the application you are working with has other embedded application menus you can set the position of the Caption Button in relation to the other buttons Besides it is possible to generate a list of browsers for which the Caption Button is used SW To change the Caption Button parameters please do the following 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe Security section click Password Manager 3 Inthe left part of the Settings window select Caption Button 4 Inthe right part of the window under Caption Button display set the required parameters in accordance with the task e Tochange the location of the Caption Button under Caption Button display enter the position number of the button how many buttons will be located to the right of
236. e This feature will become unavailable option from the context menu Note that if you cancel installation of any component you will not be protected against a number of hazardous programs When you have finished selecting components to be installed click the Next button To return to the default list of components to be installed click the Reset button STEP 7 SEARCHING FOR OTHER ANTI VIRUS APPLICATIONS At this step the wizard searches for other anti virus programs including other Kaspersky Lab s programs which may conflict with Kaspersky PURE If any anti virus applications were detected on your computer they will be listed on the screen You will be asked to uninstall them before you proceed with the installation To remove the anti virus programs that you have detected use the Remove button To proceed with the installation click the Next button STEP 8 DISABLING MICROSOFT WINDOWS FIREWALL This step is only performed if the My Computer Protection module is being installed on a computer with Microsoft Windows Firewall enabled and Firewall is among the application components which you wish to install At this step of the installation of Kaspersky PURE you are offered to disable the firewall integrated into Microsoft Windows The My Computer Protection module includes the Firewall component which ensures comprehensive protection of your network activities So there is no need to use additional protection provided by the oper
237. e administrator password you can enable pause or disable Parental Control as well as modify its settings When the component is enabled you can enable and configure various functions of Parental Control for individual accounts If the component is disabled no control is being performed To enable Parental Control please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Users section Click the Enable link To pause Parental Control please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Users section Click the Pause link 3 Inthe Pause Parental Control window select the mode of operation resuming You can also pause or resume Parental Control via Kaspersky PURE main window SW To configure Parental Control for an account please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button 2 Inthe window that opens select the Users section select the account for which Parental Control should be configured and click the Configure button 3 In the window that will open select the component on which you need to impose restrictions and specify the control settings My PARENTAL CONTROL SW To configure an alias and an image for an account please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the
238. e and or contained in the Kaspersky Security Network database as trusted and not to notify of their activity please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Proactive Defense component 4 Inthe Trusted applications section check ie Applications with digital signature box and or the Applications from Kaspersky Security Network database box for the component selected SYSTEM ACCOUNTS CONTROL User accounts control access to the system and identify the user and his her work environment which prevents other users from corrupting the operating system or data System processes are processes launched by system user accounts SW If you want Computer Protection to monitor the activity of system processes in addition to user processes please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the Proactive Defense component 4 Inthe Additional section check the Monitor system user accounts box for the component selected NETWORK ATTACK BLOCKER The Network Attack Blocker loads at the operating system startup and tracks incomi
239. e component settings for security level and reaction to the threat Click the Settings button in order to switch to the other Web Anti Virus settings IM ANTI VIRUS The IM Anti Virus component settings are grouped in the window see section Protecting instant messengers traffic on page 83 You can perform the following actions by editing the settings e disable IM Anti Virus e create a protection scope see page 84 e change the scan method see page 84 e use the heuristic analysis See page 85 To disable IM Anti Virus please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the IM Anti Virus component 4 Uncheck the M Enable IM Anti Virus box in the right part of the window SW To proceed to the IM Anti Virus settings please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the IM Anti Virus component 4 Inthe right part of the window make the required changes of the component settings APPLICATION CONTROL The Application Control settings are grouped in this window see page 86 You can perform the following actions by editing the set
240. e files are not deleted try to delete them again by clicking the Retry button in the window that will open To select another object to delete click the Finish button DELETE UNUSED DATA The system may often accumulate too many temporary or unused files which reduces its performance All applications or operating systems create temporary files when started But some of them remain undeleted when closing the application or operating system Temporary and unused files often require too large amounts of memory Additionally they may be exploited by malicious programs Unused information includes the following files e system event logs where the names of all active applications are recorded e event logs of various applications Such as Microsoft Office Microsoft Visio Macromedia Flash Player or update utilities such as Windows Updater Adobe Updater e system connection logs e temporary files of Internet browsers cookies e temporary files remaining after installation removal of applications e Recycle Bin contents e files in the TEMP folder whose volume may grow up to several gigabytes Kaspersky PURE includes the Unused Data Clearing Wizard The wizard s purpose is helping you optimize the system s functioning Besides the deletion of unused files from the system the wizard deletes the files which may contain confidential data passwords usernames data from registration forms However for complete deletion of such data w
241. e for application cece ccccccceccccseeeesesseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseeaaeeeessseececeeeeeeesessseaaessseeeeeeeeeeeess 93 Configuring ele EC 94 Deleting rules for ADDIICAN ONG EE 94 Safe mode of applications EXECUTION ssssseeeeeceeeeeeeeeceaauaeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeaasceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseaaaaaaaesseneeeseeees 95 Running an application in Safe mode ccccccccsseeseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaseeeeeeeseaaaaceeeeeeeeaeaaseeeeeeeesaaaeeeeeeeeesaaseeeees 95 Creating a Shortcut for program execution ccccccseeccccceeseeeeecaeeeeeeecaaesceeeceeueeeeeeeaaeceeeseeaeeeeessaaeeeeessaeeeeesaaeees 96 Creating the list of applications running in Safe mode nnnnnsssseeeesssssrrrrrttttrrtreeessssrrrrnrtttttteteeenssnnnnrnrneeeeeee 96 Selecting the mode running AN application 97 Selecting the mode clearing Safe mode data 97 Using a shared folder EE 98 Clearing the safe mode data 98 E UN 100 Changing the network status 100 Extending the range of network addresses cccccccsssseceeceeeeeeeccaeeceeecauseceeessaseceeeseauseeesseaeeeeeseageeeessaaeees 101 Selecting the mode of notification about network changes cccccccceseeeecceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeseeseeseeeeeeessaeeeeeeeeeeeas 101 Advanced Firewall Settings orccssasirieioeies caiiad O e a E eee ae a 102 FH SN E EE 102 Creating ele te DI 103 Creating a rule Leier e 103 PACE CONAN e EE 104 Selecting actions to be performed by fb
242. e interface of the Application Configuration Wizard see section Application Configuration Wizard on page 38 which starts after the installation is complete Following the wizard s instructions you will be able to activate Kaspersky PURE modify the update settings restrict access to the application using a password and edit other settings Your computer may turn out to be infected with malware before the installation of Kaspersky PURE To detect the malware on your computer run the full computer scan see section Scanning computer for viruses on page 43 As a result of malware operation and system failures the settings of your computer can be corrupted Run the vulnerability scan task see section Scanning computer for vulnerabilities on page 43 to find the vulnerabilities of the installed software and anomalies in the system settings At the moment of application installation databases included in the installation package may become outdated Start the application update on page 42 unless it has been done using the setup wizard or automatically immediately after the application had been installed The Anti Spam component included in the Computer Protection package uses a self training algorithm to detect unwanted messages Run the Anti Spam Training Wizard see section Training using the Training Wizard on page 116 to configure the component for working with your email If data loss occurs for quick data restoration configur
243. e management of Computer Protection s network activity SW To create an application rule please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Firewall component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 In the window that will open on the Filtering rules tab select a group of rules for the application and click the Add link 6 Inthe Network rule window that will open specify the rule settings 7 Assign the priority for created rule After you have created the rule you can modify its settings or delete it using links in the bottom part of the tab To disable the rule uncheck the LJ box next to the rule s name RULE CREATION WIZARD If a rule gets triggered and it is configured to Prompt for action the action is set by default for the applications included in the Low Restricted or High Restricted groups see section Application groups on page 88 a corresponding notification see page 261 is displayed on the screen You can select possible further actions in the notification window e gt Allow e Deny e Create a rule When this option is selected Rule Creation Wizard is started which will help you to create a rule controlling network activity of the application The action in a trigge
244. e maximum security of operating system objects and of users personal data Kaspersky Lab has implemented the option of running third party applications in a protected virtual environment named Safe Run You are advised to avoid running the applications whose authenticity is not evident to you when working in Safe Run mode This allows to avoid modifications in operating system objects which may lead to an improper functioning Functionalities of some applications in Safe Run mode may be reduced when started on computers running under Microsoft Windows Vista x64 and Microsoft Windows 7 x64 If such applications are started the corresponding message will be displayed on the screen if you have configured the notifications about the Application functionality is limited in safe mode event Running Internet browsers in a safe environment ensures security when viewing web resources including the protection against malware penetrating the computer and the protection of user data against any unauthorized attempts of changing and deleting as well as the possibility of deleting all objects accumulated during the Internet session temporary files cookies history of web pages browsed etc Microsoft Internet Explorer is included in the list of applications running in safe mode by default Running an application in safe mode is performed depending on the mode selected The option of creating shortcuts is provided for a quick start of applications in safe mode
245. e minimum extent necessary to make such provision valid and enforceable If Recipient institutes patent litigation against a Contributor with respect to a patent applicable to software including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit then any patent licenses granted by that Contributor to such Recipient under this Agreement shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed In addition if Recipient institutes patent litigation against any entity including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit alleging that the Program itself excluding combinations of the Program with other software or hardware infringes such Recipient s patent s then such Recipient s rights granted under Section 2 b shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed All Recipient s rights under this Agreement shall terminate if it fails to comply with any of the material terms or conditions of this Agreement and does not cure such failure in a reasonable period of time after becoming aware of such noncompliance If all Recipient s rights under this Agreement terminate Recipient agrees to cease use and distribution of the Program as soon as reasonably practicable However Recipient s obligations under this Agreement and any licenses granted by Recipient relating to the Program shall continue and survive Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute copies of this Agreement but in order to avoid inconsistency the Agreement is copyrighted and may only be mo
246. e oldest vulnerability types and the easiest for hackers to exploit e Format string attacks is a type of software vulnerability that arises from insufficient control of input values for I O functions such as printf forintf scanf and others from the C standard library If a program has this vulnerability the hacker able to send queries created with a special technique can take total control of the system Intrusion Detection System automatically analyzes and prevents attempts to exploit these vulnerabilities in the most common network services FTP POP3 IMAP if they are running on the user s computer Attacks aimed at computers with Microsoft Windows are based on the use of vulnerabilities of the software installed on a computer such as Microsoft SQL Server Microsoft Internet Explorer Messenger and system components available via the network DCom SMB Wins LSASS IIS5 In addition there are isolated incidents of intrusion attacks using various malicious scripts includes scripts processed by Microsoft Internet Explorer and Helkern type worms The essence of this attack type consists of sending a special type of UDP packets to a remote computer that can execute malicious code ANTI SPAM Computer Protection includes Anti Spam a component that allows detection of unwanted messages spam and their processing in accordance with the rules in your email client which saves time when working with email Anti Spam uses
247. e sticked to any application web page It is possible to stick the account to a program web page in the following ways e by following the link P in the list of your browser s chosen websites or the list of applications on your computer e by manually specifying the path to the application web page e by using the Password Manager pointer To check the entered path launch the application web page by clicking To select a link for the account please do the following 1 Inthe context menu of the application select Password Manager 2 Inthe Password Manager window that will open click Add account 3 Inthe displayed window under the Links tab in the field Link click fa 4 Inthe displayed window in the field Link enter the path for the application web page To specify a web page from the list of saved web pages Favorites in the Tabs list select a web page and click the Copy link from Favorites link To copy the path to the web page from the browser window click the Use path to the linked application link To select a link for the application in the field Link specify the path on your computer by clicking J To specify the path to the program web page manually please do the following 1 Inthe context menu of the application select Password Manager 2 Inthe Password Manager window that will open click Add account 3 In the displayed window under the Links tab in the field Link enter the path to the p
248. e tab CHANGING THE UPDATE TASK RUN MODE You should select the startup mode for the Computer Protection update task when the Computer Protection Configuration Wizard is active See section Step 4 Configuring application update on page 41 If you wish to modify the selected update startup mode you can reconfigure it The update task can be launched using one of the following modes Automatically Computer Protection checks the update source for updates at specified intervals Scanning frequency can be increased during anti virus outbreaks and decreased when there are none Having discovered new updates the program downloads and installs them on the computer By schedule time interval changes depending on settings Updates will run automatically according to the schedule created Manually If you select this option you will run Computer Protection updates on your own SW To configure the update task launch schedule 1 2 3 4 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window Select the My Update Center section in the left part of the window Click the Settings button in the Run mode section My COMPUTER PROTECTION In the window that will open on the Run mode tab select the update task startup mode in the Schedule section If the By schedule option is selected create the schedule
249. e the backup tasks see section My Backup on page 48 To protect confidential information against unauthorized access create encrypted containers for data storage see section My Encryption on page 48 To protect children and teenagers from threats related to computer usage specify Parental Control restrictions see section My Parental Control on page 48 After completion of the above actions Kaspersky PURE will be ready for the operation To evaluate the level of your computer protection use Security Management Wizard IN THIS SECTION Application Configuration Wizard E 38 oelecung MEIWONK YDE EE 42 Blieder VE elle LEE 42 Scanning computer tee 43 Scanning computer for vulnerabilities E 43 Managing en 43 Participating in Kaspersky Security Network sssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaaeseeeeeeeeeeeeeessesaaaaaagsseeeeeeeeeess 44 SOC UNI Manage meni EE 45 reien RE 47 EE 47 I e Die EE 48 POD FAR OO D 48 E ere E 48 My Fassword I AAG E 48 APPLICATION CONFIGURATION WIZARD The Application Configuration Wizard starts after the installation is complete It is designed to help you configure the initial settings of Kaspersky PURE based on the features and tasks of your computer The Application Configuration Wizard s interface is a series of steps in windows that you can navigate using the Back button and the Next link or close using the Cancel button LET US TAKE A CLOSER LOOK AT T
250. e way of managing passwords and other personal data e My Control Center see page 241 This section describes the remote management of home network security e Configuring Kaspersky PURE see page 246 This section describes the way of managing the application settings in order to ensure flexible and efficient protection e Eliminating problems see page 265 This section describes the actions that should be taken when any problems occur in the Kaspersky PURE operation OBTAINING INFORMATION ABOUT THE APPLICATION If you have any questions regarding purchasing installing or using Kaspersky PURE answers are readily available Kaspersky Lab provides various sources of information about the application You can choose the most suitable of them with regard to the question importance and urgency IN THIS SECTION Sources of information to research ON vour OWN cccsseeecccccecceeeeseeeeeeeeceeeeseeceeeessaeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesssaeseeeeeeeseeaeaeeseeeeeseaas 20 Contacting the Gales Department 21 Discussing Kaspersky Lab applications on the web forum 21 SOURCES OF INFORMATION TO RESEARCH ON YOUR OWN You may refer to the following sources of information about the application e application page at the Kaspersky Lab website e application page at the Technical Support Service website in the Knowledge Base e service page of FastTrack Support e Help system e documentation Application page at the Kaspersky Lab web
251. e window that opens on the Detected threats tab select the required object in the list of objects and right click it to open its context menu 4 Select the required action in the context menu that will open To view the report on protection components operation 1 Openthe main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that opens click the Report link 3 In the window that opens select the Report tab PAUSING PROTECTION Pausing protection means temporarily disabling all protection components for a certain period of time As a result of temporarily disabling protection all protection components will be paused This is indicated by e inactive grey application icon see section Notification area icon on page 50 in the taskbar notification area e red color of the status icon and the panel of the main Kaspersky PURE window If network connections were established at the same time as the protection was paused a notification about termination of such connections will be displayed To pause the protection of your computer 1 In the context menu see section Context menu on page 50 of the application select Pause protection 2 Inthe Pause protection window that opens select the time interval after which the protection should be resumed e Pause for the next lt time interval gt protection will be enabled in a specified amount of time Use the dropdown menu to select the
252. eb addresses in the following ways e directly during authorization on the website e manually from the Password Manager Configuration window To add a website to the list of trusted web addresses during authorization on the website wait to be redirected from one website to the other and then in the Password Manager window select the check box GC Always trust name of website gt SW To create a list of trusted web addresses manually please do the following 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe Security section click Password Manager 3 Inthe left part Settings window select Trusted web addresses 4 Inthe right part of the window click Add The field in the Trusted web addresses list will become active Then enter the web address and press ENTER To change the web address select it in the list and click Edit To delete the web address from the list select it in the list and click Delete QUICK LAUNCH OF APPLICATION FUNCTIONS To quickly access certain application functions it is convenient to use hotkeys You can specify hotkeys for the following actions e Lock Unlock Password Manager see page 214 e Enter the password e Show virtual keyboard To access functions quickly you can specify one key or a combination of two or three keys Avoid key combinations used by Microsoft Windows to access functions SW To change a key combination please do the following 1 Open the main application window 2 Inth
253. eceeeeeesaeeesceeeessseesseeeeeeeesseeaeeeeeeeeeas 61 Changing actions to be performed on detected objects cccccccccceccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeauaeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaas 61 Creating a protection SCOpe EE 62 Blieder WE 63 Se Elena 3 eee aes E cee ne AE oe one eer eee ene ee eee nee 63 ocan of compound TE 64 SCAnmiInG 1AVGS COMPOUNG WES sarisin 64 CCN ISS Oa Ee 65 SCE ION OC VE 65 Pausing the component Creating a schedule nenn nnn 66 Pausing the component creating an applications Iert 67 Restoring default Protection settings ccccccccsseeeeccceeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeesseaeeeeessaaeeeesssaeeeeesaegeeeeees 67 OS Wel ge e de EE 69 Component Operation algorithm ccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeseeeeeeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeesaaeaceeeeeeeeesaaeeeeeeeeesaeaneeeeeeeeeas 70 Changing email protection security Jevel 70 Changing actions to be performed on detected objects ccccccccccecccceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaaaaeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeasaas 71 EELER 71 CONTENTS Using heuristic analysis hep ecrescctene sec sencastesxetecdeserea eceencedecseene ceases dente chae sins ocasatersemcaseeeceteadenesen une anentecsecnq se enaesces 73 EE 74 Attachment NRErING sc5 ccerecastedccnnes icone pasee E pAn REER RAR OA R i EAEE RAR TEKE E PAR ESERE nik rit 74 Restoring default mail protection settinge 74 UE RE ee de EE 76 Component Operation algorithm cccccccecccececceeaeeecse
254. eck the box 7 By default to save the specified settings PASSWORD MANAGER POINTER Password Manager makes it easy to use your accounts Password Manager pointer allows you to quickly select the application web page for which you want to enter personal data When launching the application web page Password Manager automatically looks for a sticky account in the Password Database If an account is found the personal data is entered in the authorization fields automatically If there is no sticky account in the Password Database Password Manager provides the option to add a new account In the application browser window a search is automatically performed for fields containing the user name and password In the displayed application browser window the fields are automatically filled using data found in the Password Database You only need to fill in the empty fields Touse the Password Manager pointer please do the following Point the mouse cursor on the Password Manager icon the taskbar notification area and wait a few seconds When it appears drag the Password Manager pointer to the required application browser window Password Manager automatically defines the action to be performed on the chosen application web page MY CONTROL CENTER Control Center is designed for remote control of Kaspersky PURE installed on networked computers The control is performed from the administrator s workstation The network administ
255. ect during the scan You can exclude files of certain formats from the scan use a file mask or exclude a certain area for example a folder or a program program processes or objects according to the Virus Encyclopedia s threat type classification Threat type is the status Computer Protection assigns to an object during the scan A status is assigned based on the classification of malicious and potentially dangerous programs listed in the Kaspersky Lab s Virus Encyclopedia Adding an exclusion creates a rule that can be used by several application components such as File Anti Virus see section Computer file system protection on page 59 Mail Anti Virus see section Mail protection on page 69 Web Anti Virus see section Web traffic protection on page 76 and by virus scan tasks To create an exclusion rule please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open select the Threats and exclusions section 4 Inthe Exclusions section click the Settings button 5 In the window that will open on the Exclusion rules tab click the Add link 6 Inthe Exclusion rule window that will open edit the exclusion rule settings SEE ALSO Allowed file exclusion Masks EEN 168 Allowed threat ype MaS E eebe 169 ALLOWED FILE EXCLUSION MASKS Let s look at some exam
256. ection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Spam component d Set the required security level for the component you have selected SELECTING THE SCAN METHOD Scan methods consist in scanning the URLs in the messages of IM clients to know if they are included in the list of Suspicious web addresses and or the list of phishing web addresses Checking the links if they are included in the list of phishing addresses allows to avoid phishing attacks which look like email messages from would be financial institutions that contain links to their websites The message text convinces the reader to click the link and enter confidential information in the window that follows for example a credit card number or a login and password for an Internet banking site where financial operations can be carried out A phishing attack can be disguised for example as a letter from your bank with a link to its official web site By clicking the link you go to an exact copy of the bank s website and can even see the real address in the browser even though you are actually on a counterfeit site From this point forward all your actions on the site are tracked and can be used to steal your money SW Toscan links in the messages using the database of suspicious addresses please do the following 1 Open the main application window and
257. ects should remain intact e Keep activation data key file required for the functioning of the application e Anti Spam databases database used for recognizing unsolicited email messages This database contains detailed information used to tell soam messages from useful ones e Keep backup and quarantine files Backup objects are backup copies of the objects you have deleted or disinfected We recommend that you save such objects so that they can be restored in the future Quarantine objects are those probably infected with viruses or their modifications Such objects contain code which is similar to that from a known virus however we cannot affirm their maliciousness unambiguously We recommend that you save them since they may turn out to be uninfected or become disinfectible after the application databases are updated e Keep protection settings values set for the parameters of all the application components e Keep iSwift and iChecker data database that contains information about scanned NTFS objects It allows accelerating the object scan By using the data from this database Kaspersky PURE only scans the objects that have been modified since the last scan e Keep data of Safe Run Shared Folder data which are accessible both in Safe Run and in common run mode If a considerable time interval has elapsed between the moment you had removed an older version of Computer Protection and the moment you had installed a newer
258. ecurity level for Internet use will not reduce By default the buffering time for file fragments is limited to one second Increasing this value or removing the buffering time limit will result in better virus scans but somewhat slower access to the object SW To seta time limit for fragment buffering or remove it please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Web Anti Virus component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 Inthe Web Anti Virus window that will open in the Scan optimization block check uncheck the CC Limit fragment buffering time box and enter the time value in seconds in the field right to it RESTORING DEFAULT WEB PROTECTION SETTINGS When configuring Web Anti Virus you are always able to restore its recommended settings They are considered optimal recommended by Kaspersky Lab and grouped in the Recommended security level SW To restore default Web Anti Virus settings please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Web Anti Virus component 4 Inthe Security le
259. ed from server or it is safer to delete it To use Mail Dispatcher 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Spam component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 In the window that will open on the Additional tab in the Incoming messages block check be Open Mail Dispatcher when receiving email through POP3 protocol box SW norder to delete messages from the server using Mail Dispatcher 1 Inthe Dispatcher window check the box next to the message in the Delete column 2 Click the Delete selected button in the top part of the window My COMPUTER PROTECTION Messages will be deleted from the server You will receive a notification marked as SPAM and processed according to the rules set for your mail client EXCLUDING MICROSOFT EXCHANGE SERVER MESSAGES FROM THE SCAN You can exclude from anti spam scanning email messages which originate within the internal network for example corporate mail Please note that messages will be considered as internal mail if Microsoft Office Outlook is used on all network computers and user mailboxes are located on the same Exchange server or on servers linked via X400 connectors By default the Anti Spam component does not scan Microsoft Exchange Server messages
260. ed URLs see page 120 e blocked senders see page 120 My COMPUTER PROTECTION e blocked phrases see page 121 e obscene phrases see page 122 e allowed senders see page 122 e allowed phrases see page 123 import the list of allowed senders see page 124 determine spam and potential spam ratings see page 124 select the spam recognition algorithm see page 125 use additional spam filtering features see page 125 add a label to the message s subject see page 126 use Mail Dispatcher see page 126 exclude from scan Microsoft Exchange Server messages see page 127 configure spam processing e in Microsoft Office Outlook see page 127 e in Microsoft Outlook Express Windows Mail see page 129 e in The Bat see page 129 e in Thunderbird see page 130 restore the default Anti Spam settings see page 130 To disable Anti Spam please do the following 1 2 3 4 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Spam component Uncheck the 4 Enable Anti Spam box in the right part of the window To proceed to editing the Anti Spam settings please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the
261. ed messages without downloading them to your computer To edit Anti Spam settings 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Spam component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 Make the required changes in the component settings IN THIS SECTION Component operation GIG OFM E 114 Tanino Ani OO EE 115 TION Ee 119 Selecting the SCAN Meth ccccccsseeeecccceeceeeseeeeceeesaeeseeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseceeeeessaeeseeeeeeeeseeuseeceeeeessaesseeeeeeessseaeeeeeeeneeas 119 Creating the list Of trusted URLS wcccccceccccicerscesecnucilccecncstenecesdescinestetelincexteccncesdee saxinctuncieesiss axsuesiacncnisnsdwe bepinsdesciees de ebsacteilexewenedns 120 Creating the list Of blocked senders ccccceeeeeecccceeeceeeseeceeceeeeaesseeceeeeesaseeseeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeseeeeeeesseeaseeeeeeessseaaeeeeeeeeeas 120 Creating the list Of blocked obraeses EEEE 121 Creating the list Of obscene phrases nnnnnnnnneeneseeenessttttrtttttttttttnnnsttt rrtt ttt tttttttEnESSEEAEEEEEEEEEEEEEEESSEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE EE Ennn EEEE EE 122 Creating the list of allowed senders rreren 122 Creating the list of allowed obrases AAE AEEEEEEEEEEEESEEAEEE EEEE EEEE eee nnn nenn 123 Importing the list of allowed senders
262. eeceseeeceuseeceaeeecsusceeseeeeeeaeeeseueeeesaeeeseageeesseeeeseeeessaueeessueeessageeessseeeseaeeesseeessees 151 Actions to be performed after the update ENEE 151 Upaate Mom ee Be e EE 151 Changing the update task run MOE ccccccseeeeeccceecceeeeeceeeeeceaeeseceeeeeesseeesceeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeseessseeeeeeessaaseeeeeeesssaaeeseeeeeeas 152 Running updates under a different user s account 153 STARTING UPDATE You can start updating Computer Protection at any time Updates are downloaded from the selected update source You can update Computer Protection in one of the two following ways e from the context menu see section Context menu on page 50 e from the main application window see section My Computer Protection on page 53 Update information will be displayed in the My Update Center section of the main application window To start Computer Protection update from the context menu 1 Inthe taskbar notificationarea right click the application icon 2 Select the Update item from the dropdown menu SW To start Computer Protection update from the main application window 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe window that will open select the Protection section 3 Inthe window that will open select the Update section and click the Start update button ROLLING BACK THE LAST UPDATE At the start of the update process the application creates a backup copy of the current databases and modules This allows the appli
263. eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeeuscseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeaaaaaaaseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaas 77 Changing HTTP traffic security eye 78 Changing actions to be performed on detected objects ccceeccccccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeeeeeesseaeeeeeeeeeeeas 78 Creating a protection SCO EE 78 EH Eeer 79 adel 612 E E 80 Using be Bee E WE 81 OC OUI ZA ON DEE 81 Restoring default Web protection settngs 82 Protecting instant messengers raf 83 Component Operation algorithm ccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeesaeeceeeeeeeeeeaeaaeeeeeeeesaaaaceeeeeeeessaeeeeeeeeeessanneeeeseeeeas 83 Creating a protection SCOpe EE 84 Selecting the scan meibod 84 Using heuristic analysis ssiamsissirssissirontaruipnissiidsnainiia kani iiaeaa eiiean dapat iian centeeaceemaeedataboeceeaee pase eeeeee 85 Applic Onm CONU E 86 Component operation algorithm cccccccsssesseeceecceeeesseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeesseeceeeeesaeaaeeeeeesessaadeeeeeeeeeeaeaseeseseeseas 87 inheriting Wi Le 87 VST UNG E 88 PaO eal OIC ere 88 Application K IERE 89 Creating a protection ee 89 Application Control KEE 90 Placing applications into Ee lte rrcacasauuctisanccccdovicennateeancsdewnedsteresaesanaucysaaesnewstadwereasananedapantxanaassanctanemectandd 91 Changing the time used to determine the application status ccccccccececccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeessaeaeeeees 92 Edito an Applicaton EU 92 Editing a rule for an application group 93 Creating a network rul
264. eeeeeeeeeeseeeenaas 33 INSTALLING KASPERSKY PURE ON YOUR COMPUTER STEP 1 VERIFYING THAT THE SYSTEM SATISFIES THE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS Before installing Kaspersky PURE the following items are checked e ifthe operating system and the service packs meet the program requirements for installation e if the software required for the proper functioning of Kaspersky PURE is installed on the computer e if the user has rights to install the software If the check is successfully completed the Kaspersky PURE Installation Wizard window opens If a condition is not met a notification with the problem description will appear on the screen In this case before installing the Kaspersky Lab s application you are advised to install all necessary applications and the required service packs using the Windows Update service STEP 2 SELECTING THE TYPE OF THE INSTALLATION If the computer meets the system requirements the Installation Wizard window will open You will be offered to select one of the following installation modes e Express installation When this option is selected the W Custom installation box is unchecked the application will be installed on your computer in its entirety The protection settings recommended by Kaspersky Lab will be applied When the installation is completed you can activate Kaspersky PURE and then configure the application protection against unauthorized access e Custom installation In this case the X
265. eft part of the window 4 Select the required run mode in the right part of the window and select an update source Configure other task settings in the Additional section SETTINGS In the Settings window you can use the following additional functions of Computer Protection e Select detectable threat categories see page 166 e Create the trusted zone for the application see page 166 e Create exclusion rules see page 167 e Create a list of monitored ports see page 169 e Enable disable the encrypted connections scan mode using the SSL protocol see page 170 e Configure Quarantine and Backup see page 172 THREATS AND EXCLUSIONS In the Threats and Exclusions section of the Computer Protection settings window you can perform the following actions e select detectable threat categories see section Selecting the detectable threat categories on page 166 e create the trusted zone for the application Trusted zone is the user created list of objects which should not be controlled by the application In other words it is a set of exclusions from the scope of Computer Protection Trusted zone is created based on the list of trusted applications See section Selecting trusted applications on page 166 and exclusion rules See section Exclusion rules on page 167 The user creates a trusted zone based on the features of the objects he or she works with and on the applications installed on the computer Y
266. ege 77 P Packet rule E UE 103 Parental Control EE WEDS IE Ser ec ne T E E eee 190 downloading files from the Internet ccccsececcccceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeaeeeeeseeeeeeesseueeeeesseaseeeesseaeeeeessageeeeessaeeeeeees 190 enabling ANG COMMOUNMNG E 188 exporting importing Al EE 196 Mstan messagi e EE 192 ENEE eebe 194 limiting computer Le Eu 194 limiting time engl ue 189 FUMING applications and games EEN 195 EE 191 sending SS ON UIA EE 193 Password Manager ACCESSING Password DOA D E 214 EE 215 Capon BUTO EE 237 changing Master en ME 234 SCY pion d Le EE 232 ale Hate Mee e 222 OUND Ol AC COU INNS ceice crate seartenr tec nizeneo cechendanecneas ood enndctoseoncceentet deteceneeseedsonicaicnees core at oan a dceneneeescor 220 DNS 1 e EEN 220 Importing exporting passwordS AA 223 PSW elk GENEN esere r Rr E eee ee ee eee ee eee es 239 FS SOMA Eege 221 giel 240 QUICK later Bei lu 229 FS SA N E A N NE E A E N Ee 219 Potential spam R LEE 124 Proactive Defense dangerous activity monitoring rule cee cccccceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeecaeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeseeeeeeeesseeeeeeesseeeeeesseeeeeessseeeeeesaaneeeeees 108 group ei trusted E ee e e EE 109 TES Ge ie fz gle ee UE 107 system ACCOUNTS COMMUN ciiviandcnctcnndeavesscndnoteebantnenasednnd condensennsedandedeanaeonandvanddexbentbiesnerantegnceaseuasatnndsestcahetswedastedeneteesa 109 Protection scope Applicator COMO issectae pn eea eaa Ee aR E RR E E eee Edera AIRE E
267. eld we v Time J Proactive Defen ia Result Self Def 2 Self Defense x Application Application Cont Component Application Cont ania Je object J Anti Spam sii FF e eason Network Attack Safe Run Figure 19 Context menu To specify a limitation 1 Open the main application window and click the Report link in the top part 2 Inthe window that will open on the Report tab click the Detailed report button 3 In the window that will open click the area to the left of the heading of the table column for which you wish to impose a restriction Select a required restriction from the dropdown list If the Custom item is selected you will be able to specify complex filtering conditions see section Using complex filtering on page 179 Jon order to hide show table columns 1 Open the main application window and click the Report link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe window that will open on the Report tab click the Detailed report button 3 In the window that will open right click the area to the right of the heading of any table column To hide any table columns uncheck boxes next to the corresponding names in the context menu EXTENDED DISPLAY MODE FOR STATISTICS The bottom part of the report window contains statistics on the operation of the selected component or task of Computer Protection You can view comprehensive statistics in graphic or table presentation depending
268. en in the Protection section select the Firewall component Click the Settings button for the component you have selected In the window that will open on the Filtering rules tab click the Add link In the Network rule window that will open in the Addresses block specify the range of addresses a if you preset Subnetwork addresses with status option select the network status from the dropdown menu b select one of the existing groups of addresses if you specified the Addresses from group option If you do not wish to use range of addresses from any group create a new group To do so click the Add link in the bottom part of the block and specify the addresses included into the group in the Network addresses window that will open PROACTIVE DEFENSE Computer Protection protects both from known threats and from new threats information about which is not contained in Computer Protection databases This feature is ensured by a specially developed component named Proactive Defense The preventative technologies provided by Proactive Defense neutralize new threats before they harm your computer In contrast with reactive technologies which analyze code based on records in Computer Protection databases preventative technologies recognize a new threat on your computer by the sequence of actions executed by a program If as a result of activity analysis the sequence of application s actions arouses any suspicion Computer Protection
269. en the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the File Anti Virus component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 Inthe window that will open on the Additional tab in the Scan mode block select the required mode SCAN TECHNOLOGY Additionally you can specify which technologies will be used by the File Anti Virus component e iChecker This technology can increase scan speed by excluding certain objects from the scan An object is excluded from the scan with a special algorithm that uses the release date of Computer Protection databases the date the object was last scanned and any modifications to the scan settings For example you have an archive file with the not infected status assigned after the scan The next time the application will exclude this archive from the scan unless it has been altered or the scan settings have been changed If the archive s structure has changed because a new object had been added to it or if the scan settings have changed or if the application databases have been updated then the application will re scan the archive There are limitations to iChecker it does not work with large files and applies only to the objects with a structure that the application recognizes for example exe OI Jonk ttf inf
270. equired email scan mode EMAIL SCANNING IN THE BAT Actions on infected email objects in The Bat are defined using the application s own tools Mail Anti Virus settings determining if incoming and outgoing messages should be scanned which actions should be performed on dangerous objects in email and which exclusions should apply are ignored The only thing that The Bat takes into account is scanning of attached archives My COMPUTER PROTECTION The email protection settings extend to all the anti virus modules installed on the computer that support work with the Bat Please remember incoming email messages are first scanned by Mail Anti Virus and only after that by The Bat mail client plug in If a malicious object is detected Computer Protection will inform you of this without fail If you select the Disinfect Delete action in the notification window of Mail Anti Virus actions aimed at eliminating the threat will be performed by Mail Anti Virus If you select the Skip action in the notification window the object will be disinfected by The Bat plug in When sending email messages the scan is first performed by the plug in then by Mail Anti Virus You must decide e Which stream of email messages will be scanned incoming outgoing e At what point in time email objects will be scanned when opening an email message or before it is saved to the disk e The actions taken by the mail client when dangerous objects are
271. er Le 117 BS WS ei 118 USING the Training Wizard nsnennsnennnnennenrnnnorrrenrnrrnrnrrnrrrrnrrtrotntrorrttntntrotnttonntrotntto Antr arErAnEEo artEarEn arenon nnne nenen 116 Trusted zone e Ee TUTE 167 I SAO Tee 166 U Update trom alocal OVI EE 151 Wille E due aces cet nage cteccinc os nace E E R 151 rolling Dack the ele 149 Helef Ge 150 using Ihe proxy SEVE EE 150 Updating the application EE 148 Vulnerability Scan WES EOE Eege 145 Sie 216 EAE PE PEE PE E EEEE EEN 146 asard oU EE 146 Web Anti Virus base of phishing web addresees EEEE EE Enn 79 Ve E 81 Kaspersky Na CLO ee 80 OOS T STOR AGO FINAN ssenarisi EAE EE EERE EEE utecseusapbenbeseenciemrneiaebnsielnaeenentesdenst 77 OLS CUO SCC e 78 edel TOUS det EE 78 SC AMOD WN Zt le BEE 81 BS SO Cea eege 78
272. er mode in the window that will open Click the Additionally after manual marking emails as not spam link to select the mode of sending not spam samples i e samples mistakenly considered as spam earlier Furthermore you can select the algorithm for common operation of Microsoft Office Outlook and Anti Spam plug in e Scan upon receiving All emails that enter the user s inbox are initially processed according to the Microsoft Office Outlook rules After processing is complete the remaining messages that do not fall under any of the rules are processed by the Anti Spam plug in In other words emails are processed according to the priority of the rules Sometimes the priority sequence may be ignored if for example a large number of emails arrive in your inbox at the same time As a result situations could arise when information about an email processed by a Microsoft Office Outlook rule is logged in the Anti Spam report marked with the spam status To avoid this we recommend configuring the Anti Spam plug in as a Microsoft Office Outlook rule e Use Microsoft Office Outlook rule With this option incoming messages are processed using the hierarchy of Microsoft Office Outlook rules one of which must be a rule about Anti Spam processing emails This is the best configuration as it does not cause conflicts between Microsoft Outlook and the Anti Spam plug in The only shortcoming of this arrangement is that you should create and delete spam proces
273. erate with the Commercial Contributor in the defense and any related settlement negotiations The Indemnified Contributor may participate in any such claim at its own expense For example a Contributor might include the Program in a commercial product offering Product X That Contributor is then a Commercial Contributor If that Commercial Contributor then makes performance claims or offers warranties related to Product X those performance claims and warranties are such Commercial USING THIRD PARTY CODE Contributor s responsibility alone Under this section the Commercial Contributor would have to defend claims against the other Contributors related to those performance claims and warranties and if a court requires any other Contributor to pay any damages as a result the Commercial Contributor must pay those damages NO WARRANTY EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT THE PROGRAM IS PROVIDED ON AN AS IS BASIS WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF TITLE NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Each Recipient is solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using and distributing the Program and assumes all risks associated with its exercise of rights under this Agreement including but not limited to the risks and costs of program errors compliance with applicable laws damage to or lo
274. erating system and runs in your computer s memory scanning all files that are opened saved or executed By default File Anti Virus only scans new or modified files in other words files that have been added or modified since the previous scan Files are scanned according to the following algorithm 1 The component intercepts every attempt by the user or by any program to access any file 2 File Anti Virus scans iChecker and iSwift databases for information about the intercepted file and determines if it should scan the file based on the information retrieved The following operations are performed when scanning 1 The file is scanned for viruses Malicious objects are recognized based on My Computer Protection databases The database contains descriptions of all malicious programs and threats currently known and methods for processing them 2 After the analysis you have the following available courses of action for My Computer Protection a If malicious code is detected in the file File Anti Virus blocks the file creates a backup copy and attempts to perform disinfection If the file is successfully disinfected it becomes available again If disinfection fails the file is deleted b If potentially malicious code is detected in the file but the maliciousness is not absolutely guaranteed the file proceeds to disinfection and then is sent to the special storage area called Quarantine c Ifno malicious code is discovered in
275. ering a mask you can use the and wildcards where represents any combination of characters and stands for any single character If characters and are included into a phrase then they should be preceded by the character to prevent their misrecognition in Anti Spam Then two characters are used instead of one and SW To edit the list of obscene phrases perform the following steps 1 Open the main applicationwindow and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Spam component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 In the window that will open on the Exact methods tab in the Consider message as spam block check the If it contains blocked phrases box and click the Select button 6 Inthe List of blocked phrases window that will open check the X Consider as blocked obscene words box and click the obscene words link 7 Read the text in the Agreement window that will open and if you accept the terms and conditions stated in the window check the respective box and click the OK button 8 Inthe List of obscene words window that will open click the Add link 9 Inthe Blocked phrase window that will open enter a line or a mask CREATING THE LIST OF ALLOWED SENDERS The list of allowed senders contains the addresses of message sender
276. ernet address of web page settings defining relations between the account and the object settings defining how the account is activated comments settings for completing additional fields on the web page Password Manager allows using one or several account s for the application website Based on the path to the application Internet address of web page Password Manager allows specifying a scope for each account You can add an account in several ways by clicking the Caption Button to do this you need to select Add Account in the Caption Button menu from the context menu of My Password Manager to do this you need to select Add Account in the context menu of My Password Manager from the main Password Manager window SW To add a new account 1 2 In the context menu of the application select Password Manager In the Password Manager window that will open click Add account In the window that will open in the Name field enter the name of the new account e g the name of the application web page Under the tab Login information enter the user name and password The user name can consist of one or several words To specify key words see page 216 for the user name click To copy a user name password to clipboard click To create a password automatically click on the 239Generate password link Under the Links tab specify the path to the program web page and specify the account s setti
277. erule cc ceccccccccccceeeseeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeessaaanes 105 Configuring network service Settings cceeeccccccececeeeeeeceeeeeceeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesseeceeeeesaeseeeeeeessseaeseeeeeeesssaeaeeeeees 105 Selecting address6s range cccccceseeeeeccceeeceeesecceceeeeaesseeceeeeeseaeaeeeceeeeesueesseeeeeeessaesseeeeeeesseaaeeceeeesssaaaeeees 106 POAC HY RE 107 Using the list of dangerous activity E 107 Changing the dangerous activity monitoring rule ccccccceeeeeeseeeeeeeceeeesseceeeeceeaeesseceeceeeeaeeseeeeeeeeesaeaseeeeeeeees 108 Creating a group of trusted appltcatons nn tttttrteeennnnnn nnmn treerne 109 EE een OO a doen acetic ota nt ecto caeststie ses awetoecatste seoaesaeeccleenioudsuessteeckeeeeacctectioace 109 Kell le e 110 Blocking the attacking Computers 110 Types of detected network attacks ccccccceccccesesseeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeessseceeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeessaeaageeeeeeeesaaaseeeeseseesaaees 110 e e VE 113 Component Operation algorithm ccccccessesseeeecceeeeeseeceeeceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeasaeeeeeeeseaeasgeeeeeeseesasseeeeeeesssaasseeeseeeees 114 Training Anti Spam EE 115 Training using the Training Ward 116 Training Anti Spam USING outgoing messages ccccccccsesseeccceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeessaeeeeeeeeeesseaaeeeeeeeeeas 117 Training using CAN SG MSTIN EE 117 TANIA WIN FORDONS escroissir erae errea T E ER an er erein EEE e eiea rr a 118 EERSTEN a asieaceemaeseaea
278. es see section Training Anti Spam using outgoing messages on page 117 e Training directly while working with email See section Training using email client on page 117 using special toolbar buttons or menu items e Training when working with Anti Spam reports See section Training with reports on page 118 TRAINING USING THE TRAINING WIZARD Training Wizard allows Anti Spam training in batch mode To do so specify which folders of Microsoft Office Outlook or Microsoft Outlook Express accounts contain spam and useful mail Correct spam recognition requires training using at least 50 useful messages and 50 samples of unwanted mail iBayes will not be operational until these steps are completed To save time the Training Wizard only trains on 50 emails in each selected folder This wizard consists of a series of windows steps navigated using the Back and Next buttons to close the wizard use the Finish button To stop the wizard at any stage use the Cancel button To start the wizard 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Spam component 4 Inthe Anti Spam training section click the Train button for the component selected When performing training based on good email messages addresses of the message senders will be
279. es remote security management of all computers within home network SEE ALSO BOVEY Oe e EE 241 My ENCRYPTION Confidential information which is saved in electronic mode requires additional protection from unauthorized access Storing data in an encrypted container provides this protection Data encryption allows creating special encrypted containers on the chosen drive In the system such containers are displayed as virtual removable drives To access the data in the encrypted container a password should be entered SEE ALSO PU ee YOO DEE 206 My PASSWORD MANAGER At the moment registration and entering account data for authentication are required to access the majority of services and resources For security reasons it is not recommended to use identical user accounts for different resources or write down your user name and password As a result today s user is not able to remember huge amounts of account data which makes safe storing of passwords particularly up to date Password Manager makes it possible to store different personal data in encrypted form for example user names passwords addresses phone and credit card numbers Data access is protected with a single Master Password After entering the Master Password Password Manager can automatically fill in the fields of different authorization forms Thus you should remember only one Master Password to manage all account data SEE ALSO My SS WONG Oe 210
280. eseeesaneessees 248 EE 248 BE ln e D 249 COM le 249 Advanced disinfection technology cccccseeeecceceseeeccceeueeeeeceeuececccsuueceeesuaaeceessauaeceeessaueceeesaaaeeeesseegeeeeesaaaees 249 Computer performance during task exvecuton rE EErEEnnn EEEE rennn rrtt ereen 250 Er E o Oeste E E AE E E EENE E AE EE E E E E A E E 250 Klee orreee e E R E E E E E E 250 Disabling sound notifications sess sccuservscusdeensancceticehandeubsenddcadieudtemsodend docs deeb sonddekdnendduaieanedant Saseneeedsanedeewsoeddeeasenest 251 Delivery Of notifications USING email 251 POPON os gocernaatie ntti ae A E secu undecteaa naan epaee beanie selina aids nadeseeanenn eee E E 252 Logging events INTO report 252 Clearing the application re POM vccc cicccccecssedeecseenncoeccsedsnnececeecedsssseecisennecetenesdeacceesesedevasseedeceeesadetedescddeeansederenes 252 nS 0 14 0 e ic enn n cee E E ee ee ee ee ee ee eee eee 252 Eele PEE A E E E A E AIE A A AT E AA T E T 252 PAOPONCAUIO MT Eeler 253 Active interface elements E 259 Kepak PURE SKIN EE 254 Ee e Beie UE 254 Application settings MANAGSIMSMIM EE 254 Exporting importing Kaspersky PURE settings ccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseaeeeessaeeeeseeeeeesaeeeeseeseesseneeesaes 255 FC SUOMI AG deraut Seinge ete eet acer eae a e aa a a Ea aE eaa 255 NOTIFICATION ooreen E E se scbauesee ears 256 Object Cannot be deimteched n Kodiinnn as AE nian eninin Kediaman EEEa EE reres n E Erin
281. eseeseeeeeeees 31 Step 3 Accepting the License Agreement 31 Step 4 Participating in the Kaspersky Security Network program 32 Step 5 Selecting the destination Tolder nr ttErrenreeennn ennn ER Step 6 Selecting application components for the installation cccccccccsssssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeaeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaas 32 Step 7 Searching for other anti virus applcatons nnen 33 Step 8 Disabling Microsoft Windows Trewalt nnen 33 Step 9 Final preparation for mmetallaton REENEN 33 MODIFYING RESTORING AND REMOVING THE APPLICATION WITH THE INSTALLATION WIZARD 35 Step 1 Starting window of the installation program 35 Step 2 Selecting operation eegene 35 Step 3 Finishing application modification restoration or removal ccccccccccccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaaaenseeeeeeeeeeees 36 GETTING TARTE RE 37 Application Configuration Wizard rtrt trEtEEtEENESEEAAEEEEEEEEEEEEEESEE EEEE EEEE EEEren enna 38 Step 1 Activating the application cccccccccccececceeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeauaeauadaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaaeaceeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeaaas 39 Activating the commercial version 39 Activating the ET E reene 40 Completing TIS AGH de Te dE 40 Step 2 Restricting access to the applcaion 40 Step 3 Selecting protection mode E 41 Step 4 Configuring application update ccccecccccsssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaauaussdeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaasasseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaas 41 Step 5 Select
282. ethods for neutralizing them The heuristic algorithm can detect new viruses that have not yet been entered in the database 2 After the analysis you have the following available courses of action e lf aweb page or an object accessed by the user contains malicious code access to them is blocked A notification is displayed that the object or page being requested is infected e If the file or web page does not contain malicious code the program immediately grants the user access to it Scripts are scanned according to the following algorithm 1 Each script run on a web page is intercepted by Web Anti Virus and is analyzed for malicious code 2 Ifthe script contains malicious code Web Anti Virus blocks it and informs the user of it with a special pop up message 3 If no malicious code is discovered in the script it is run Scripts are intercepted only on the web pages opened in Microsoft Internet Explorer CHANGING HTTP TRAFFIC SECURITY LEVEL The security level is defined as a preset configuration of File Anti Virus settings Kaspersky Lab specialists distinguish three security levels The decision of which level to select should be made by the user based on the operational conditions and the current situation You will be offered to select one of the following options for security level e High This security level is recommended for sensitive environments when no other HTTP security tools are being used e Recommended
283. ewsctsan eewee E E E A E EA E 87 hale d Cl Le eere E E T E E A ateeseteeeeneeee 88 leiere le in Belge E 88 ele let Mie ni Ee le 89 INHERITING RIGHTS The important part of the Application Control component is the mechanism of the access rights inheritance This mechanism prevents the use of trusted applications by a non trusted application or an application with restricted rights in order to perform actions requiring certain privileges When an application attempts to obtain access to a monitored resource Application Control analyzes the rights of all parent processes of this application and compares them to the rights required to access this resource At that the minimum priority rule is observed when comparing the access rights of the application to those of the parent process the access rights with a minimum priority will be applied to the application s activity Access right priority 1 Allow Access right data have the highest priority 2 Prompt user 3 Block Access right data have the lowest priority If the application s activities are blocked due to insufficient rights of a parent process you can edit the rules See section Editing an application rule on page 92 You should modify the rights of a parent process only if you are absolutely certain that the process activities do not threaten the system s security SEE ALSO NONI AULT MUN Ee TEE 89 THREAT RATING Application Control determines the threat rat
284. execution on page 96 If the Always run in safe mode option is selected for the application it will be launched in safe mode regardless of the run mode Applications running in safe mode are highlighted with a green frame around the application window and highlighted with green color in the list of applications monitored by Application Control see section Application Control on page 86 SW To run an application in safe mode using a shortcut please do the following 1 Open the folder in which a shortcut was created 2 Runthe application by double clicking its shortcut SW To run an application in safe mode from the main window of My Computer Protection please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Application Control section 3 Inthe bottom part of the window select the icon of the required application 4 Double click the icon to run the application or open the context menu and select the Run item SW To run an application in safe mode from the Microsoft Windows context menu please do the following 1 Right click thename of the object selected of the application shortcut or executable file 2 Inthe menu that will open select the Safe Run item CREATING A SHORTCUT FOR PROGRAM EXECUTION To run applications quickly in safe mode Computer Protection provides the possibility of creating shortcuts This allows running the required
285. f the scan you can block or allow the execution of a script DOMAIN NAME SERVICE DNS Distributed system for converting the name of a host a computer or other network device into IP address DNS functions in TCP IP networks Particularly DNS can also store and process reverse requests by determining the name of a host by its IP address PTR record Resolution of DNS names is usually carried out by network applications not by users SPAM Unsolicited mass email mailings most often including advertising messages LIST OF BLOCKED WEB ADDRESSES List of masks and addresses of web resources access to which is blocked by Kaspersky Lab application The list of addresses is created by the user during application settings configuration LIST OF BLOCKED SENDERS also Black list of addresses The list of email addresses which send the messages that should be blocked by Kaspersky Internet Security regardless of their content GLOSSARY LIST OF CHECKED WEB ADDRESSES List of masks and addresses of web resources which are mandatory scanned for malicious objects by Kaspersky Lab application LIST OF ALLOWED WEB ADDRESSES List of masks and addresses of web resources access to which is not blocked by Kaspersky Lab application The list of addresses is created by the user during application settings configuration LIST OF ALLOWED SENDERS as well as White list of addresses The list of email addresses which send the mes
286. f you cannot find a solution to your problem in the application Help system in the Knowledge Base or at the User Forum we recommend that you contact Kaspersky Lab Technical Support IN THIS SECTION CrEAlING a system sidie VOD OM GE 265 Seana ee UE 266 Er CUUR PAY Ze ln 267 CS ING a A TE 267 CREATING A SYSTEM STATE REPORT When solving your problems Kaspersky Lab s specialists may require a report about the system state This report contains detailed information about running processes loaded modules and drivers Microsoft Internet Explorer and Microsoft Windows Explorer plug ins open ports detected suspicious objects etc When a system state report is created no user personal information is collected To create a system state report 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe bottom part of the window click the Support link 3 4 In the Support window that opens click the Support tools link In the Information for Technical Support Service window that opens click the Create system state report button The system state report is created in HTML and XML formats and is saved in sysinfo zip archive Once the information gathering process is complete you can view the report To view the report 1 2 Open the main application window In the bottom part of the window click the Support link In the Support window that opens click the Support tools link In the Information for Technical Support
287. ficates encode the data being transferred and ensure their integrity during the transfer These features of the protocol are used by hackers to spread malicious programs since most antivirus programs do not scan SSL traffic Computer Protection verifies secure connections sing Kaspersky Lab certificate This certificate will always be used to check whether the connection is secure Further traffic scans via the SSL protocol will be performed using the installed Kaspersky Lab s certificate If an invalid certificate is detected when connecting to the server for example if the certificate is replaced by an intruder a notification will pop up containing a suggestion to either accept or reject the certificate or view information about the certificate If the application works in automatic mode the connection using an invalid certificate will be terminated without any notification My COMPUTER PROTECTION SW To enable encrypted connections scan please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open select the Network section 4 Inthe window that will open check the H Scan encrypted connections box and click the Install certificate button 5 In the window that will open click the Install Certificate button This will start a wizard with instructions to follow for a su
288. following 1 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Reports section and in the dropdown menu select the user account for which you want to see the report Click the Detailed report link 3 In the window that will open in the Messaging section select the IM messaging component In the Instant messaging window that will open a detailed report will be displayed You can also open the detailed report in the Users section by clicking the Detailed report button SENDING PERSONAL DATA You can forbid sending data that contain personal information To do this create a list of records that contain confidential data for instance home address phone number etc The attempts to send data from the list are blocked and the information on the blocked messages is displayed in the report To block certain data sending 1 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Users section select a user account for which a restriction should be created and click the Configure button 3 In the window that will open in the Messaging section select the Personal data component 4 Inthe Control sending personal data window that will open check the W Enable box Add the record to the list of data forbidden to be sent by clicking the Add link To view brief statistics please do the following 1 Open t
289. formed by the rule AE eee cece eeeeaaaaaaaaaaeeeeeeeeesesaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaeeeeeeeeeseeaaaaas 105 selecting addresses range EE 106 Firewall rule lU 102 H Heuristic analysis REESEN 131 Eege 63 JET TE 85 EU ET EE 73 Ee acy EE 81 IM Anti Virus base of phishing Web addresees ttrt ntEArEEEEESEEEEEEEEESAEEEEEEEEOAEEEEEEEEESEEEEEEEE ennn EEEn een 84 FS SUS AY Sl eae eet electrics carers carl cars ce ipcete cc ectraccn tec E E A E eecenitoreact 85 OS ATIC UO FANN E 83 OS CONC e 84 Infected Eeer EE 295 Inheriting rights Applicaton Control E 87 K Kaspersky URL Advisor WED AMIE VIU EE 80 L Be 300 le 293 obtaining a Key Tle cates 4a cnet sce sens eane anni eare a iaa eaa eaae a ba Deade irain anepi ai eaea 300 M Mail Anti Virus attachment MINTO eege EEN 74 eUn UNG e 73 FTI AS OO INA EE 70 0 ele cy Le e 71 reachon Biet Ei 71 restoring the default settings nnesennnnesnestnrttnteertrrtttttttttttttttnn ttrt EErEEAEEAEEEEEESAEEEEEEEESAEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEESEEEEEEEEEEE EEEE EEE 74 See eene el bia olki EE 74 SEENEN Eeer 70 Mail Dispatcher EE 126 ele 149 Mode selection AR aerag cuits E E E E E E E E 97 N Network AGI ISO COMME EIERE 170 leie rege DON EE 169 Network Attack Blocker lee aie a e nen ees eee ett ear ee et eee eee en ee ee eee ene eee eee ee ene ee 110 types of detected network attacks AAA 110 El 9 9 SE 110 O Operation algorithm EE 114 Application OIA EE 87 EIERE 60 JE EL TE 83 WEN 70 E
290. ftware including any Updates and related materials Rightholder owner of all rights whether exclusive or otherwise to the Software means Kaspersky Lab ZAO a company incorporated according to the laws of the Russian Federation 1 3 Computer s means hardware s including personal computers laptops workstations personal digital assistants smart phones hand held devices or other electronic devices for which the Software was designed where the Software will be installed and or used 1 4 End User You Your means individual s installing or using the Software on his or her own behalf or who is legally using a copy of the Software or if the Software is being downloaded or installed on behalf of an organization such as an employer You further means the organization for which the Software is downloaded or installed and it is represented hereby that such organization has authorized the person accepting this agreement to do so on its behalf For purposes hereof the term organization without limitation includes any partnership limited liability company corporation association joint stock company trust joint venture labor organization unincorporated organization or governmental authority wech k hn 1 5 Partner s means organizations or individual s who distributes the Software based on an agreement and license with the Rightholder 1 6 Update s means all upgrades revisions patches enhancements fixes mo
291. g the URLs in IM clients messages to know if they are included in the list of suspicious web addresses and or in the list of phishing web addresses Check if URLs are listed in the base of suspicious web addresses IM Anti Virus will scan the links inside the messages to identify if they are included in the black list Check if URLs are listed in the base of phishing web addresses Computer Protection databases include all the sites currently known to be used for phishing attacks Kaspersky Lab supplements this list with addresses obtained from the Anti Phishing Working Group which is an international organization Your local copy of this list is updated when you update Computer Protection databases Toscan links in the messages using the database of suspicious web addresses please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the IM Anti Virus component 4 Inthe Scan methods section check the H Check if URLs are listed in the base of suspicious web addresses box for the component selected My COMPUTER PROTECTION SW Toscan links in the messages using the database of phishing web addresses please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will o
292. g web addresses If a threat is detected message text will be substituted with a warning message for the user 3 If no security threats are detected in the message it becomes operable for the user Files transferred via IM clients are scanned by the File Anti Virus component see section Computer file system protection on page 59 when they are attempted to save CREATING A PROTECTION SCOPE Protection scope is understood as the type of messages subject to scan e Incoming and outgoing messages IM Anti Virus scans both incoming and outgoing messages by default e Incoming messages only If you are sure that messages sent by you cannot contain dangerous objects select this setting IM Anti Virus will scan only incoming messages By default Computer Protection scans both incoming and outgoing messages of IM clients If you are sure that the messages sent by you cannot contain any dangerous objects you may disable the scan of outgoing traffic SW To disable the scan of outgoing messages please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the IM Anti Virus component 4 Inthe Protection scope section select the Incoming messages only option for the component selected SELECTING THE SCAN METHOD Scan methods consist in scannin
293. h the databases BOOT VIRUS A virus that infects the boot sectors of a computer s hard drive The virus forces the system to load it into memory during reboot and to direct control to the virus code instead of the original boot loader code OLE OBJECT An attached object or an object embedded into another file Kaspersky Lab application allows to scan OLE objects for viruses For example if you insert a Microsoft Office Excel table into a Microsoft Office Word document the table will be scanned as an OLE object SOCKS Proxy server protocol that allows to establish a point to point connection between computers in the internal and external networks ACTIVATING THE APPLICATION The application activation procedure consists in entering an activation code and obtaining a key which will allow the application to determine if the user has sufficient rights to use it and to find out the license expiration date ACTIVE LICENSE The license currently used for the operation of a Kaspersky Lab application The license defines the expiration date for full functionality and the license policy for the application The application cannot have more than one license with the active status ALTERNATE NTFS STREAMS NTFS data streams alternate data streams designed to contain additional attributes or file information Each file in NTFS file system is a set of streams One of them contain the file content that one will be able to view after opening the f
294. hat you specify the status of the connected network when first connected If the interactive mode is off the Firewall determines the status based on the network type ranges of addresses and other specifications Depending on the network status Firewall applies various rules to filtering network activities SW To modify Firewall s settings 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the Firewall component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 In the window that will open on the Filtering rules and Networks tabs modify the settings of Firewall operation IN THIS SECTION Changing the network status aiciesctccadacascncentet2ceddennctatecas tac deststatuacoeaaddenactatnersdcedecaseseeasaedesddenniceatnanddeodeccssiadxtanseacdenece lt tnanct 100 Extending the range of network addresses AAA 101 Selecting the mode of notification about network CHANGES nenn 101 Advanced Ml mildest ue EE 102 Bl UN OR 102 CHANGING THE NETWORK STATUS All network connections on your computer are monitored by Firewall Firewall assigns a specific status to each connection and applies various rules for filtering of network activity depending on that status Once you get connected to a new network Firewall will display a notification see page 262 o
295. he Application Control settings please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Application Control component 4 Make the required changes in the settings for the component you have selected Also 1 Open the main application window and selectthe Application Control section 2 Inthe right part of the window click the Application activity link 3 Inthe Application Activity Control window that will open make the required changes IN THIS SECTION Component Operation algorithm cccccecccceeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeseeeeeeeseeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeessauseeeeeeessaasseeeeeeeeseaanseeeseeeeas 87 Creating a protection ee 89 eieiei rte hr OU 90 My COMPUTER PROTECTION COMPONENT OPERATION ALGORITHM At the first startup of an application Application Control analyzes it using the following algorithm 1 Scans the application for viruses 2 Verifies the application s digital signature If the digital signature is confirmed the application will be included in the Trusted group If the application has no digital signature or if the digital signature is corrupted or included in the black list the component will proceed to the next step 3 Searches for a record of the application being started in the internal
296. he Computer Protection databases the network drivers that enable the application s components to intercept network traffic are also updated e Application modules In addition to Computer Protection databases you can also update program modules The update packages fix Computer Protection vulnerabilities and add new or improve the existing functionality Kaspersky Lab s update servers is the primary source of updates for Computer Protection To successfully download updates from servers your computer must be connected to the Internet By default the Internet connection settings are determined automatically If the proxy server is not properly configured automatically the connection settings see page 150 can be modified manually During an update the application modules and databases on your computer are compared with those at the update source If your computer has the latest version of the databases and application modules you will see a notification window confirming that your computer s protection is up to date If the databases and modules on your computer differ from those on the update server the application downloads only the incremental part of the updates The fact that not all the databases and modules are downloaded significantly increases the speed of copying files and saves Internet traffic If the databases are outdated the update package can be large and it can cause the additional internet traffic up to several tens of Mb
297. he Ignored web addresses section In the right part of the window click Add enter the web address and press ENTER To change a web address select it from the list and click Edit To delete a web address from the list select it and click Delete LIST OF TRUSTED WEB ADDRESSES Password Manager protects your personal data from phishing attacks If during authorization you were redirected to another website the application will notify you about it My PASSWORD MANAGER Phishers often use redirecting to websites that give access to bank accounts e g Internet banking sites payment systems etc On the company s official authorization page users are redirected to a counterfeit website visually similar to the official page All data entered on the counterfeit page falls into the hands of attackers Redirecting is often officially installed on websites If you don t want Password Manager to consider readdressing to be a phishing attack you can create a list of trusted web addresses The list of trusted web addresses includes websites to which the entered personal data are transferred During authorization Password Manager will not notify you of the personal data being transferred to a trusted website Password Manager allows transferring personal data to trusted websites from other websites Before adding a website to the list of trusted web addresses make sure it is completely reliable You can add a website to the list of trusted w
298. he Prompt for action option as the action on a detected object which is the default setting You can change the action For example if you are sure that each detected object should be attempted to disinfect and do not want to select the Disinfect action each time you receive a notice about the detection of an infected or suspicious object you should select the following action Do not prompt Disinfect Before attempting to disinfect or delete an infected object Computer Protection creates a backup copy of it to allow later restoration or disinfection If you work in automatic mode see section Step 3 Selecting protection mode on page 41 Computer Protection will automatically apply the action recommended by Kaspersky Lab s specialists when dangerous objects are detected For malicious objects this action is Disinfect Delete if disinfection fails for suspicious objects Skip SW To change the specified action to be performed on detected objects 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the File Anti Virus component 4 Specify the required action for the component you have selected CREATING A PROTECTION SCOPE A protection scope should be understood not only as the location of the objects to be scanned but also the type of files to be scanned B
299. he desired object s name right click to open the Microsoft Windows context menu and select the Scan for viruses option Explore Search MB Scan for viruses Format Copy Create Shortcut Rename Properties Figure 12 Microsoft Windows context menu You can also view the scan report containing full information about events which have occurred during the execution of the task SEE ALSO Si retailers Bue VUS CaS a tee Niet fre er el ee er ee E ene eee 135 Creating a shortcut for task execution i rcccc ccc nscesceessensnecdceeseiieaeacedesaedesaducemedserdosesaeedesuavesdddnndeedeundeendebedcuedennesanacdonebachense 137 Creating a list of objects 10 SCAN E 137 ENEE Ee 138 Changing actions to be performed on detected obiects ntt ttrrrreeennn nennen 138 Changing the type oi objects 10 SCAN EE 139 EEGENEN 139 e lala le uge AIS diok ON EE 140 Scan of compound Hee EE EE 140 ele 1818 ele VE 141 Changing the scan Method E 142 Run mode creating a schedule A 142 R n Mode SOCEIIVING an ee E 143 Feat res OF sched led task launCh BE 143 Restornngde laul scan Er e E 143 STARTING THE VIRUS SCAN TASK A virus scan task can be started in one of the following ways e from the Computer Protection context menu see section Context menu on page 50 e from the Computer Protection main window see section My Computer Protection on page 53 e using an existing shortcut see page 137 Task execution informatio
300. he settings of the default packet rules You change these rules The network status defines the set of rules being used for filtering the network activities for the particular network SW To change the network connection status 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the Firewall component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 In the window that will open on the Networks tab select an active network connection and click the Edit link 6 Inthe window that will open on the Properties tab select the required status from the dropdown list EXTENDING THE RANGE OF NETWORK ADDRESSES Each network matches one or more ranges of IP address If you connect to a network access to subnetwork of which is performed via a router you can manually add subnetworks accessible through it SW To extend the range of network addresses 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the Firewall component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 In the window that will open on the Networks tab select an active network connection
301. he window provides access to the main application functions to the management of backup tasks and storages of backup copies and to data restoration e the right part of the window contains a list of settings for the function selected in the left part of the window Fa My Back fo amp e E Report Kaspersky PURE My Backup Ka Backup tasks management creating editing monitoring and deleting Backup op Create fg Stop UU Pause ans Manage backup tasks Backup task Completed 7 minutes ago Storage on C available 7 1 GB of 7 2 GB Run mode Every 1 day s at 14 43 Backup task 1 s sStorage on C available 7 1 GB of 7 2 GB Run mode Manually Duration 00 00 03 N Restore E Restore data from backup Help Close Figure 6 Main window of the Backup module My PARENTAL CONTROL The Parental Control main window consists of two parts e the left part of the window provides access to the main functions of the application custom control configuration and report viewing APPLICATION INTERFACE e the right part of the window contains a list of settings for the function selected in the left part of the window rx My Parental Control LI ks Kaspersky PURE My Parental Control You can view My Parental Control report for each account registered on this computer User statistics Control user On Reports f H n ind Viewing reports on all users SSS Detailed report Entire
302. hecking them for spam signs Self training text recognition algorithm iBayes The iBayes algorithm defines whether a message is spam or non spam based on the frequency in the text of words characteristic of soam You should train see section Training Anti Spam on page 115 the iBayes algorithm before you use it To enable disable a specific spam recognition algorithm for analysis of email messages perform the following steps 1 2 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Spam component Click the Settings button for the component you have selected In the window that will open on the Expert methods tab in the Recognition algorithms block check uncheck the corresponding M boxes USING ADDITIONAL SPAM FILTERING FEATURES Besides basic properties used to filter messages lists of allowed and blocked senders recognition algorithms etc you can specify additional signs Based on these features a message will be assigned the spam status with a certain degree of probability To enable disable individual additional spam filtration properties perform the following steps 1 2 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top p
303. hemain application window and click the Parental Control button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Reports section and in the dropdown menu select the user account for which you want to see the report Brief statistics for personal data transfer for the selected account will be displayed in the Messaging section To obtain a detailed report please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Reports section and in the dropdown menu select the user account for which you want to see the report Click the Detailed report link 3 Inthe window that will open in the Messaging section select the Personal data component A detailed report will be displayed in the Personal data window that will open You can also open the detailed report in the Users section by clicking the Detailed report button KEY WORDS SEARCH You can control key words presence in the instant messaging Any key words from the list found in messages are mentioned in the report If IM control see section Instant messaging on page 192 is disabled key words are not searched for either SW To enable key words control in the messaging please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Users section select a user account for which a restriction should be created and clic
304. here is a danger that this personal information will be intercepted using hardware keyboard interceptors or keyloggers which are programs that register keystrokes My Virtual Keyboard prevents the interception of data entered at the keyboard My Virtual Keyboard cannot protect your personal data if the website that required entering such data has been hacked since in this case the information will be obtained directly by the intruders Many of the applications classified as soyware have the functions of making screenshots which then are transferred to an intruder for further analysis and for stealing the user s personal data My Virtual Keyboard prevents the personal data being entered from being intercepted with the use of screenshots My Virtual Keyboard only prevents the interception of privacy data when working with Microsoft Internet Explorer and Mozilla Firefox browsers SW To start using My Virtual Keyboard 1 Open themain application window and click the My Virtual Keyboard button 2 Enter the required data by pressing the buttons on the virtual keyboard Make sure that data is entered in the correct field When you press function keys Shift Alt Ctrl on the virtual keyboard that particular mode will be fixed for example when you press Shift all symbols will be entered in the upper case To exit the special mode press the same functional key again You can switch the language for the virtual keyboard using the key combinatio
305. hird Party Licenses The Software may include some software programs that are licensed or sublicensed to the user under the GNU General Public License GPL or other similar free software licenses which among other rights permit the user to copy modify and redistribute certain programs or portions thereof and have access to the source code Open Source Software If such licenses require that for any software which is distributed to someone in an executable binary format that the source code also be made available to those users then the source code should be made available by sending the request to source kaspersky com or the source code is supplied with the Software If any Open Source Software licenses require that the Rightholder provide rights to use copy or modify an Open Source Software program that are broader than the rights granted in this Agreement then such rights shall take precedence over the rights and restrictions herein 10 Intellectual Property Ownership 10 1 You agree that the Software and the authorship systems ideas methods of operation documentation and other information contained in the Software are proprietary intellectual property and or the valuable trade secrets of the Rightholder or its partners and that the Rightholder and its partners as applicable are protected by civil and criminal law and by the law of copyright trade secret trademark and patent of the Russian Federation European Union and the
306. his License Also you must do one of these things a Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above and if the work is an executable linked with the Library with the complete machine readable work that uses the Library as object code USING THIRD PARTY CODE and or source code so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions b Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library A suitable mechanism is one that 1 uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user s computer system rather than copying library functions into the executable and 2 will operate properly with a modified version of the library if the user installs one as long as the modified version is interface compatible with the version that the work was made with c Accompany the work with a written offer valid for at least three years to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a above for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution d If distribution of the work is made by offering ac
307. his option the application will be activated from a Kaspersky Lab s server that requires an Internet connection Activation is performed by entering an activation code that you receive by email when you purchase Kaspersky PURE via Internet If you purchase the application in a box retail version the activation code will be printed on the inner face of the disk envelope cover or under the protective layer of the sticker on the inner face of the DVD box The activation code is a sequence of digits divided by hyphens into four groups of five symbols without spaces For example 11111 11111 11111 11111 Note that the code should only be entered in Latin characters Activation Wizard establishes connection with a Kaspersky Lab s activation server on the Internet and sends it your activation code after which the code is verified If the activation code has passed the verification successfully the Wizard receives a key file which then will be installed automatically The activation process completes accompanied by a window with detailed information about the purchased license If the activation code has not passed the verification you will see the corresponding message on the screen In this case you should contact the software vendor from which you have purchased Kaspersky PURE If the number of activations with the activation code has been exceeded the corresponding notice will pop up on the screen Activation process will be interrupted an
308. hishing and suspicious URLs to web addresses detected in browsers Microsoft Internet Explorer and Mozilla Firefox SW Toscan links using the base of suspicious web addresses and or phishing web addresses please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Web Anti Virus component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 Inthe Web Anti Virus window that will open in the Scan methods block make sure that the Check if URLs are listed in the base of suspicious web addresses and or Check if URLs are listed in the base of phishing web addresses boxes are checked KASPERSKY URL ADVISOR Computer Protection includes the URL scanning module managed by Web Anti Virus This module checks if links located on the web page belong to the list of suspicious and phishing web addresses You can create a list of trusted web addresses the content of which should not be scanned and a list of web addresses the content of which should be scanned without fail This module is built in Microsoft Internet Explorer and Mozilla Firefox browsers as a plug in SW To enable the URL scanning module please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe
309. hole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License d If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that in the event an application does not supply such function or table the facility still operates and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful For example a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well defined independent of the application Therefore Subsection 2d requires that any application supplied function or table used by this function must be optional if the application does not supply it the square root function must still compute square roots These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves then this License and its terms do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole and thus to each and every part regardless
310. i 257 Unavailable update server EEN 258 Malicious opec EE E 258 Dangerous object detected in traie ccctscasecicdse casts nsganndnetiewedencdaseddesnadtwieatasedontaarstneunesidaehebandastanedeetaaendedncnseeedexteee 258 Suspicious object detected E 259 Dangerous activity detected in the system 259 Hidden veier SE E WEE 260 Attempt to access the system registry deteched nnne 261 Network activity of an application has been detected snnnnsnessnrrresreesrrrtrtttnstrrttrttnstrrttrttntrn ttnn tntnn rtnn nen en 261 CONTENTS New network detected AA 262 Phishing attack EE E 262 Suspicious link STC E 262 Invalid certificate detected EE 263 Limiting using the application EE 263 Special treatment required EEN 263 SI le UE 263 ELIMINATING PROBLEM EE 265 Creating a system State TEDOM srsssosevccceeuecesccentcaeenccestosteenssbeeseose saat ree Oppa E IAOEE Rp i 265 SMOG e 266 E xcun AVZ e 267 CAMINO aCe EE 267 CONTACTING THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT SERVICE occccxccccescsssssnckcweceesennnccetesoaseeesseatmecticatecwaeascceueceeabaoseoetenctenes 269 KASPERSKY SECURITY NETWORK DATA COLLECTION STATEMENT ssssssssssssssesssssssesssssssssssssessaaaes 270 USING THIRD PARTY Ee 271 ee e E 273 Crypto C library data security Software Iran 273 Se leg te MANY EE 273 Neit HF MMO A E 2 3 GNU Dison parser ll TEE 274 AOG ZA e EE 274 SS HOY AEE E E E E E E AT 275 E ee ERT en Ee EE 276 MO We NOG EE 276 CIDA e2 coms ER
311. i gl ISI ecicd WEE 257 Unavailable update server icasadietecednasetastaocenooaieugetemcmuetaeninnnebetionsuviaduaetetetieauelieeneetatiauaneonctetedabanicntieeananudaseeonboniesteteamemees 258 Malicious object detected E 258 Dangerous obje ctdetected in E 258 elle Le IER E 259 Dangerous activity detected in the system 259 Hidden process detected ciruscedsemnetice aseudelnsineeacntesew aeaee er anp dee aare AEE Airan NEE eA AEAEE r aaea 260 Attempt to access the system registry detected ccccccseeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeseueeeceaueeeseeeeesedeeesaaeeeeseaeeeesaeeeeseaeeessesessaes 261 Network activity of an application has been deiected Ettr tEnnEEEEEEEEnEn E EEEE en nennen 261 ESV AAS EO aele IOO BEER 262 alte lef andck CLS TOC lE arinira a e E E e EEE 262 Suspicious link detected EE 262 IEN te cemiicate ETS CIO EE 263 Limiting using Me AD PIIGCATIOMN E 263 Special treatment EE eege 263 SI ee 263 OBJECT CANNOT BE DISINFECTED There are some cases when it is impossible to disinfect a malicious object This could happen if a file is so damaged that it is impossible to delete malicious code from it and restore integrity The treatment procedure cannot be applied to several types of dangerous objects such as Trojans In such cases a special notification will pop up containing e Threat type for instance virus Trojan and the name of the malicious object as listed in the Kaspersky Lab Virus Encyclopedia The name of the dangerous o
312. ication s component The icon also provides access to the basic components of the application interface context menu see page 50 and main window see page 51 Context menu is opened by right clicking on the application icon To open the Kaspersky PURE main window left click on the application icon CONTEXT MENU You can run basic protection tasks from the context menu The Kaspersky PURE menu contains the following items APPLICATION INTERFACE e Update start the application module and database updates and install updates on your computer e Full Scan start a complete scan of your computer for malware objects Objects residing on all drives including removable storage media will be scanned e Virus Scan select objects and start a virus scan By default the list contains several objects such as My documents folder and mailboxes You can enlarge the list select other objects for scan and start virus scan e My Virtual Keyboard switch to the virtual keyboard see page 205 e Kaspersky PURE open the main application window see page 51 e Settings view and configure application settings e Activation activate Kaspersky PURE In order to obtain the status of a registered user you must activate your application This menu item is only available if the application has not been activated e About display window with information about the application e Pause protection Resume protection
313. ication window and click the My Computer Protection In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window In the window that will open in the Protection section select the File Anti Virus component Click the Settings button for the component you have selected Make the required changes in the component settings IN THIS SECTION Component operation algorithm EE 60 Changing security level of files and Memory cccccccseeeeececeeecceeeeeececeeeeeaeeseceeeeeeeaeeseeceeeesseaeeseeeeeeessseesseeeeeeesseaeeeseeeeneas 61 Changing actions to be performed on detected obiecs 61 Creating a ee e Ee EE 62 Using heuristic EE 63 el OU AZ e E 63 SCAN Of compound files cccccceeeceeeecceeeaeeesssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeaaseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeasaaeeausudeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesauaaaaagaedeeeeeeeeeeeesesenaas 64 Scanning large compound KU 64 Changing the scan INNO Oe EN 65 SERES lee 010 eee ieee eee eee E eee T ee P E E ee ee eee eee eee 65 Pausing the Component Creating a schedule nnnsnnneennnnennnrnrrnrnrnnrnrrnrrtrnrntrnrntrnrrtrntntrntnttntntrnnntrnantEnan rrean rena nnnn eneen nn 66 Pausing the component creating an applications jet 67 Restoring default Protection settings ccccsecccccccssseccecceeseceeccseeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeseeeeeeeseaeeeesssaaeceeessaeceeeseageeeesssageeesssnees 67 COMPONENT OPERATION ALGORITHM The File Anti Virus component loads when you start your op
314. icon e context menu see page 211 e main application window see page 212 e Password Manager pointer see page 240 The context menu is opened by right clicking the Password Manager icon By double clicking the Password Manager icon you can lock unlock the application To use the Password Manager pointer point the mouse cursor on the application icon and wait a few seconds The Password Manager pointer will be located above the application icon CONTEXT MENU OF My PASSWORD MANAGER The main application tasks are accessible from the context menu of Password Manager The Password Manager menu contains the following items e Lock Unlock allowing or forbidding of access to your personal data e List of frequently used accounts quick launch of one of the frequently used accounts The list is generated automatically based on how frequently the accounts are used The list is available if it is configured to be displayed in the context menu see page 227 When the application is first launched the list will not be available since no record will have been used e Accounts view list of all accounts and quickly launch one of them The number of accounts in the Password Database is specified in brackets e Add an account adding a new account to Password Manager e Password Manager switching to the main application window see page 212 e Settings configure application settings e Password generator crea
315. identified as a banner and blocked SW To begin using heuristic analyzer 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Banner component d In the Scan methods section check the M Use heuristic analyzer box for the component selected ADVANCED COMPONENT SETTINGS Kaspersky Lab specialists have compiled a banner ad mask list based on specially conducted research and have included it with the Computer Protection installation package Banner ads which match the masks on the list will be blocked by Anti Banner unless banner blocking is disabled When creating the lists of allowed banned banners either banner s IP address or its symbol name URL may be entered To avoid dubbing you can use an advanced option which allows converting IP addresses into domain names and vice versa SW To disable the use of the banner list included in the Computer Protection installation package 1 2 3 4 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Banner component In the Scan methods section uncheck the Use common banner list box for the component selected
316. identify the threat unambiguously and will neutralize it Due to this fact the application scans quarantine objects after each update BACKUP COPIES OF DANGEROUS OBJECTS Sometimes the integrity of objects cannot be maintained during disinfection If the disinfected file contained important information and after disinfection it became inaccessible in part or in full you can attempt to restore the original object from its backup copy Backup copy is a copy of the original dangerous object that is created when first disinfecting or deleting the object and it is saved in backup Backup is a special repository that contains backup copies of dangerous objects after processing or deletion The main function of a backup storage is the ability to restore the original object at any time Files in backup are saved in a special format and are not dangerous ACTIONS WITH QUARANTINED OBJECTS You can perform the following actions on the quarantined objects quarantine the files that you suspect of being infected scan and disinfect all potentially infected objects in the quarantine using the current Computer Protection databases restore files to the folders from which they were moved to quarantine or to the folders selected by the user delete any quarantined object or a group of selected objects send quarantined object to Kaspersky Lab for analysis To perform some actions on the quarantined objects 1 2 Open the main appli
317. if the work is itself a library The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law If such an object file uses only numerical parameters data structure layouts and accessors and small macros and small inline functions ten lines or less in length then the use of the object file is unrestricted regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6 Otherwise if the work is a derivative of the Library you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6 Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6 whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself 6 As an exception to the Sections above you may also combine or link a work that uses the Library with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library and distribute that work under terms of your choice provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License You must supply a copy of this License If the work during execution displays copyright notices you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of t
318. ify the technology which will be used during the scan You can select one of the following technologies iChecker This technology can increase scan speed by excluding certain objects from the scan An object is excluded from the scan using a special algorithm that takes into account the release date of the application database the date the object was last scanned and any modifications to the scan settings For example you have an archive file with the not infected status assigned to it by Computer Protection following a scan The next time the application will skip this archive unless it has been altered or the scan settings have been changed If the archive s structure has changed because a new object has been added to it or if the scan settings have changed or if the application databases have been updated the application will re scan the archive There are limitations to iChecker it does not work with large files and applies only to the objects with a structure that the application recognizes for example exe dll Jonk ttf mt sys Com chm Zip rar iSwift This technology is a development of the iChecker technology for computers using an NTFS file system There are limitations to iSwift it is bound to a specific file location in the file system and can apply only to objects in NTFS SW To change the object scan technology 1 2 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button In the win
319. iguration Wizard will automatically start after the installation MODIFYING RESTORING AND REMOVING THE APPLICATION WITH THE INSTALLATION WIZARD Restoring the application may be useful if you have detected some errors in its operation which have occurred due to an incorrect configuration or corrupted files Changing the set of components allows you to install new Kaspersky PURE components or remove those hampering your work or those you find unnecessary SW To begin restoring the original state of the application installing Kaspersky PURE components that have not been installed before or removing the application 1 Insert the installation CDinto the CD DVD ROM if you have already used it to install the application If you install Kaspersky PURE from a different source shared folder folder on the hard drive etc please make sure that the installation package is available from that source and you have access to it 2 Select Start Programs My Computer Protection Modify Repair or Remove installation This launches the installation program which functions as a wizard Let us view the detailed procedure for restoring the application modifying the set of components or removing the application IN THIS SECTION Step 1 Starting window of the installation program 35 Ee 22 SEIS ele e Operai OI eaer e e O E ra S E ra E A EE E 35 Step 3 Finishing application modification restoration or rermOoval 36 STEP 1
320. ile other streams called alternate are designed to contain meta information and ensure for example NTFS compatibility with other systems such as an older file system by Macintosh called Hierarchical File System HFS Streams can be created deleted stored apart renamed and even run as a process Alternate streams can be used by intruders to transfer data secretly or to steal them from a computer HARDWARE PORT Socket on a hardware component of a computer in which a cable or a plug can be connected LPT port serial port USB port ARCHIVE File containing one or several other objects which can also be archives BASE OF SUSPICIOUS WEB ADDRESSES List of web addresses which content can be considered as potentially dangerous The list is created by Kaspersky Lab specialists It is regularly updated and is included into the Kaspersky Lab application package BASE OF PHISHING WEB ADDRESSES List of web addresses which are defined as phishing by Kaspersky Lab specialists The base is regularly updated and it is a part of Kaspersky Lab application DATABASES Databases created by Kaspersky Lab s experts and containing detailed description of all currently existing threats to computer security as well as methods used for their detection and disinfection These databases are constantly updated by Kaspersky Lab as new threats appear In order to achieve higher quality of threat detection we recommend that you copy databases from Ka
321. ilities and weak points in the system s settings There are three groups of problems distinguished and respectively three groups of actions associated with them e Strongly recommended actions will help eliminate problems posing a serious security threat You are advised to perform all actions of this group e Recommended actions help eliminate problems posing a potential threat You are advised to perform all actions of this group too e Additional actions help repair system damages which do not pose a current threat but may threat the computer s security in the future The outcome of the search for potential vulnerabilities in the operating system and in installed user applications is represented by direct links to critical fixes application updates After the vulnerability scan task starts See page 145 its progress is displayed in the main application window and in the Vulnerability Scan window in the Finish field Vulnerabilities detected when scanning the system and applications are displayed in the same window on the System vulnerabilities and Vulnerable applications tabs When searching for threats information on the results is logged in a report of Computer Protection In the Vulnerability Scan section in the application settings window you can set a start schedule see page 146 and create a list of objects to be scanned for a vulnerability scan task see page 145 similarly to virus scan tasks By default the application
322. ill be displayed You can also open the detailed report in the Users section by clicking the Detailed report button RUNNING APPLICATIONS AND GAMES You can allow or block certain applications and games launch as well as limit allowed applications launch by time You can view applications and games launch statistics for each user account on the selected computer as well as a detailed report on the events SW To restrict applications and games launch 1 2 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button In the window that will open select the Users section select a user account for which a restriction should be created and click the Configure button In the window that will open in the Computer section select the Running applications component In the Control running applications window that will open check the H Enable box Create lists of applications allowed and blocked for running on the Allowed and Blocked tabs and set the run schedule for allowed applications To view brief statistics please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Reports section and in the dropdown menu select the user account for which you want to see the report Brief statistics on the launch of applications and games for the selected account is displayed in the Computer section SW To obtain a detailed rep
323. in Mozilla Firefox cccccccceeeeeecceeeeceeeeeeceeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeseeeseeeeeeessaeaeeeeeeeesssaeeeeeeeeeeeas 171 Scanning encrypted CONNECTIONS IN Opera 172 EIERE 169 CREATING A LIST OF MONITORED PORTS Protection components such as Mail Anti Virus see section Mail protection on page 69 Web Anti Virus see section Web traffic protection on page 76 and Anti Spam see page 113 monitor data streams transmitted via certain protocols and passing via certain opened ports on your computer Thus for example Mail Anti Virus analyzes information transferred via the SMTP protocol and Web Anti Virus analyzes HTTP packets You can select one of two port monitoring modes e Monitor all network ports e Monitor selected ports only A list of ports that are used for transmitted email and HTTP traffic is included in the application package SW In order to add a port to the list of monitored ports 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open select the Network section 4 Inthe Monitored ports section click the Select button 5 Inthe Network ports window that will open click the Add link 6 Inthe Network port window that will open specify the required data SW n order to exclude a port from the list of monitored ports 1 Open the main application window an
324. indow that will open in the Category dropdown list select the required category In the Status column left click the link with the application s status for the required application In the menu that will open select the Custom settings item In the window that will open on the Exclusions tab check the boxes that correspond to the actions you want to exclude When excluding the application s network traffic scan configure additional exclusion settings All exclusions created in the rules for user applications are accessible in the application settings window in the Threats and exclusions section DELETING RULES FOR APPLICATIONS You can use the option of deleting the rules for applications that have not been started for some time SW To delete rules for applications that have not been started for a specified time period 1 2 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Application Control component For selected component check the M Delete rules for applications remaining inactive for more than box in the Additional section and specify the necessary number of days in the field to the right SAFE MODE OF APPLICATIONS EXECUTION Safe mode of applications execution is not available on computers running Microsoft Windows XP x64 To ensur
325. indow using the Time column as an example A data query using a complex filter is based on the logical conjunction Logical AND function and disjunction Logical OR function which can be used to control the query The query limits in our case time are located in the fields on the right side of the window To specify the time you can use arrow keys on your keyboard The dropdown list Show rows where is used to pick the condition for events query for example is greater than i e exceeding the value specified in the field to the right Fa Custom filter Show rows where 22 12 2009 4 00 00 E And amp Or 22 17 2009 4 00 00 Figure 20 Specifying complex filtering conditions If you wish your data query to satisfy both specified conditions select AND If only one of the two conditions is required select OR For several types of data the search interval limit is not a numeric or a temporal value but a word for example the query could pick out the OK value for the Result column In this case the word specified as the limit will be compared against other word conditions in alphabetic order To specify complex filtering conditions 1 Open the main application window and click the Report link in the top part 2 Inthe window that will open on the Report tab click the Detailed report button 3 In the window that will open click the area to the left of the table column for which you wish to specify
326. ing 1 Open the main application window and click the Backup button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Storages section and click the Connect button 3 Select a storage type and specify the required connection settings in the Connect storage window If the settings are specified properly the storage appears on the list CLEARING A STORAGE If storage volume is not sufficient for your current operations you can delete obsolete versions and backup copies of files which have been already deleted from the computer SW To clear a storage please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the click the Backup button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Storages section 3 Select the storage you wish to clear and click the Clear button 4 Inthe Clear storage window that will open select the file versions that should be deleted from the storage BACKUP COPY REMOVING A STORAGE To remove a storage for backup data you should use Storage Removal Wizard During the removal you are asked to determine actions to be performed on the data in the storage that is to be removed and on the tasks that use the storage for backup copying This wizard consists of a series of screens steps navigated using the Back and the Next buttons to close the wizard once it has completed its work use the Finish button To stop the wizard at any stage use the Cancel button You can also switch between the wizard
327. ing for every application running on your computer using the heuristic analysis The threat rating is the indicator of how dangerous the application is for the system it is calculated based on two types of criteria e static these criteria include information about the application s executable file size creation date etc e dynamic which are used while simulating the application s operation in a virtual environment analysis of the application s calls to system functions Analyzing these criteria allows detecting a behavior typical of malware Based on rating values Application Control divides applications into groups see section Application groups on page 88 The lower the threat rating is the more actions the application will be allowed to perform in the system APPLICATION GROUPS All user s applications on the computer are divided by Application Control into groups based on the level of danger for the system which in turn affects the applications rights to access the system s resources There are four pre set groups of applications e Trusted Applications with a digital signature by trusted vendors or applications which are recorded in the base of trusted applications These applications have no restrictions applied on actions performed in the system Those applications activity is monitored by Proactive Defense and File Anti Virus e Low Restricted Applications that do not have a digital signature from a trusted ven
328. ing heuristic rules is performed If the analysis reveals in a message signs typical of spam the probability of its being spam increases 7 The application analyzes the email message using the GSG technology While doing it Anti Spam analyzes images attached to the email message If analysis reveals in the images signs typical of soam the probability of the message being spam increases 8 The application analyzes the rtf format documents attached to the message It scans attached documents checking them for the presence of spam signs After the analysis is complete Anti Spam calculates how much the probability of the message being spam increased By default the technology is disabled 9 It checks for the presence of the additional features see page 125 typical of spam Each detected feature increases the probability that the message being scanned is in fact spam 10 If Anti Spam was trained the message will be scanned using iBayes technology Self training iBayes algorithm calculates the probability of message being spam based on the frequency of phrases typical of soam found in message text Message analysis determines the probability of its being soam Spam authors keep improving the methods they use to disguise spam therefore calculated probability most often does not reach the specified value see section Determining spam and potential spam ratings on page 124 To ensure efficient filtering of the email message stream Anti Spam
329. ing personal CAA EE 215 EB CII DCIS OMA CAS pancnoccancecngenner sat sciiedia S sate scanecssanentwenceeedelue Rous ininatau ate cngnionen ase taten Sone dciunseneseosagzeds 221 Be ORS OMA ET E 221 PHANG ere 222 Deleting personal Galassie eee a EE seeudensiencmepseenanemiscsmseh anudia lene eccnc iamoanmicesmakiawedateacesmamsemaceess 223 importing exp rting paSSWOrO E 223 Password Database Backup Restore ccccccccssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeaseeeeeeeeeeeasaeeeeeeeseaeaaeeeeeeeesaaaaaeeeeeeeseaeaaeeeesessenaaess 224 ACCESSING PASSWORD DATABASE All your personal data is stored in encrypted form in the Password Database Password Database must be unlocked to use this data To access the Password Database select one of the following authorization methods e Master Password protection Master Password is used to access the Password Database e USB device To access the Password Database connect any USB device to your computer When the USB device is disabled the Password Database is automatically locked e Bluetooth device To access the Password Database connect a Bluetooth device to your computer When the Bluetooth device is disabled the Password Database is automatically locked e No authorization Access to the Password Database is unprotected By default protection is set by the Master Password which means that you only need to remember one password Master Password is the basic tool that protects your personal data
330. ing threats to be detected ccccccccccssssssssseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaueusaseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaesaseeeeeeeeeeeeeseseenaas 41 Step 6 Analyzing the applications installed on the computer 42 Step 7 Closing Configuration Wizard eceeccccccccccseeeeeececeesceaeeseeeceeeeeeaeaeeeeeeeesseueeeseeeeeesseseeeeeeeeesesseeeeseeeeeeas 42 ele lge et e E 42 Bieles Me ADI ARO E 42 Scanning computer for viruses eege 43 Scanning computer for vulnerabilities ccccceeceeeecceeseeeeeeseeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaausasceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaeeaacseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeaaas 43 Ewe ale EE 43 Participating in Kaspersky Security Network 44 SC UIE WAAC NM EE 45 er 47 Pausing ale TEE 47 We e E 48 PI IP eal OI eege 48 My SING CY DUO EEN 48 My Password OT e 48 PAP PICA IOIN IN Se sacri ctes eeners ected ee cece ete es aeeet eects ees acct cee tes tee nate ceed ones ceeotee dels oes aeeeateeeced eves dene 50 Keiler NC OMA EE 50 CO ug un LEE 50 Kaspersky PURE main WINKOW ANEREN 51 My Computer EE ebe 53 BEV UPN CODY EE 53 My Paremal COnN Ol E 54 Klee leie eese E R A E A E E S E 55 Application settings WINdOW EE 56 MY COMPUTER PROTEC TION Peete ee oo da eee ee ee ee ee 58 Computer Tile system protection EE 59 Component operation algorithm ccccccccsseeeeeeeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeaesaeeeeeeeeseaeeceeeeeeeessaegeeeeeeeessaeneeeeeeeeeas 60 Changing security level of files and Memory ccccceeeeecccceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeees
331. ings button in order to switch to the other Mail Anti Virus settings WEB ANTI VIRUS The Web Anti Virus component settings are grouped in the window see section Web traffic protection on page 76 You can perform the following actions by editing the settings e disable Web Anti Virus e change security level see page 78 e change action to be performed on detected objects see page 78 e create a protection scope see page 78 e change scan methods see page 79 e use the Kaspersky URL Advisor see page 80 e optimize the scan see page 81 e use the heuristic analysis see page 81 e restore the default Web Anti Virus settings see page 82 My COMPUTER PROTECTION SW To disable Web Anti Virus please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Web Anti Virus component 4 Uncheck he Enable Web Anti Virus box in the right part of the window To proceed to the Web Anti Virus settings please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Web Anti Virus component 4 Inthe right part of the window select th
332. ings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Web Anti Virus component 4 Inthe Security level section click the Settings button for the component selected 5 Inthe Web Anti Virus window that will open in the Additional block click the Settings button My COMPUTER PROTECTION 6 Inthe Kaspersky URL Advisor window that will open select the On the selected web pages option and click the Select button 7 Inthe List of checked web addresses window that will open click the Add link 8 Inthe Address mask URL window that will open enter a web address or a mask of it USING HEURISTIC ANALYSIS Essentially the heuristic method analyzes the object s activities in the system If those actions are typical of malicious objects the object is likely to be classed as malicious or suspicious This allows new threats to be detected even before they have been researched by virus analysts By default heuristic analysis is enabled Computer Protection will notify you when a malicious object is detected in a message You should react to the notification by further processing the message Additionally you can set the detail level of scanning Light Medium or Deep To do so move the slider bar to the selected position To enable disable the heuristic analysis and to set the detail level for the scan please do the following 1 Open the main application window and
333. ings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Proactive Defense component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 Inthe Proactive Defense window that will open uncheck the box next to the name of the activity which you do not want to be monitored Specifics of configuring application activity control under Microsoft Windows XP Professional x64 Edition Microsoft Windows Vista Microsoft Windows Vista x64 Microsoft Windows 7 or Microsoft Windows 7 x64 If the computer is running under one of the above mentioned operating systems then control will not apply to each event this is due to particular features of these operating systems For example control will not apply to the following event types sending data through trusted applications suspicious system activities CHANGING THE DANGEROUS ACTIVITY MONITORING RULE The list of dangerous activities is appended automatically when Computer Protection is updated and it cannot be edited You can e turn off monitoring for one dangerous activity or another see page 107 e edit the rule that Proactive Defense uses when it detects dangerous activity e create an exclusion list see page 167 by listing applications with activity that you do not consider dangerous SW To change the rule 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open clic
334. iod has expired Figure 5 Current status of the computer protection There are three possible values of protection status each of them is indicated with a certain color similar to traffic lights Green indicates that your computer s protection is at the correct level while yellow and red colors indicate that there exist various security threats In addition to malicious programs threats include obsolete application databases disabled protection components the selection of minimum protection settings etc Security threats must be eliminated as they appear For detailed information about threats and how to eliminate them quickly switch to Security Management Wizard click the status icon or the panel on which it is located see fig above e The left part of the window provides quick access to any function of the application including virus scan tasks updates etc e The right part of the window contains information about the application function selected in the left part allows to configure its settings provides tools for executing virus scan tasks retrieving updates etc You can also use the following links e Settings open the application settings window e Quarantine start working with quarantined objects e Report open the list of events occurred during application operation e Help view Kaspersky PURE help system BACKUP COPY The Backup copy main window consists of two parts e the left part of t
335. ion To train Anti Spam using the email client 1 Start the email client 2 Select a message using which you wish to train Anti Spam 3 Perform the following steps depending upon your email client e click the Spam or Not Spam button in the Microsoft Office Outlook toolbar e click the Spam or Not Spam button in the Microsoft Outlook Express toolbar Windows Mail e use the special Mark as Spam and Mark as Not Spam items in the Special menu of The Bat email client program e use the Spam Not Spam button in the Mozilla Thunderbird toolbar After selection of an option from the list above Anti Spam performs training using the selected message If you select several messages they will all be used for training If a message is marked as useful mail the address of its sender will be added to the list of allowed senders SW To disable adding the sender s address to the list of allowed senders 1 Open the mainapplication window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Spam component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 Inthe window that will open on the Exact methods tab in the Consider message as not spam block check the 1 If it is from allowed sender box and click the Select button 6 Inthe List of allowed senders window
336. ion or vulnerabilities in the protection on your computer They include for instance detection of a virus or an operation failure e mportant events Events that should always be attended to since they reflect important situations in the application s operation for example the terminated event My Protection k Group by task v Critical events v Critical events Time Resul Important events All events Date Today events 23 Figure 17 Selecting event type If the All events item is selected all events will be displayed in the report but only in case if the corresponding boxes are checked in the Reports section of the Reports and Storages block of settings These are boxes which allow to log records of non critical events as well as file system and registry events in the report If these boxes are not checked a warning icon and the Disabled link are displayed near the dropdown event type selection list Use this link to go to the reports settings window and to check the corresponding boxes SW norder to create a report about a particular event type 1 Open the main application window and click the Report link in the top part of it 2 Inthe window that will open on the Report tab click the Detailed report button 3 Select the event type from the drop down menu in the window that will open If report on all events should be created select the All events value DISPLAYING DATA ON THE SCREEN Even
337. is restarted or the time from beginning a virus scan until it is complete DANGEROUS OBJECT DETECTED IN TRAFFIC When Web Anti Virus detects a malicious object in traffic a special notification pops up on screen The notification contains e The threat type for instance virus modification and the name of the dangerous object as listed in the Kaspersky Lab Virus Encyclopedia The name of the object is given as a link to www viruslist com where you can find detailed information on the type of threat detected e Full name of the dangerous object and a path to the webpage You are asked to select one of the following responses to the object e Allow continue the object downloading NOTIFICATIONS e Block block the object downloading from the web resource To apply the selected action to all objects of the same status detected in the current session of protection component or a task operation check the M Apply to all box The current session is the time from when the component is started until it is disabled or the application is restarted or the time from beginning a virus scan until it is complete SUSPICIOUS OBJECT DETECTED If File Anti Virus Mail Anti Virus or a virus scan detects an object containing code from an unknown virus or modified code of a known virus a special notification will pop up It contains e The threat type for instance virus Trojan and the name of the object as listed in the Kaspersky Lab
338. ists of a series of screens steps navigated using the Back and the Next buttons to close the wizard once it has completed its work use the Finish button To stop the wizard at any stage use the Cancel button You can also switch between the wizard s steps that you have completed by using the browsing buttons in the top part of the window You can also specify an existing container if it is unavailable on the computer you are currently using for example after the operating system is reinstalled or if the container is copied from another computer In this case the container appears in the list but it remains disabled The container should be connected in order to work with data See section Connecting and disconnecting container on page 207 SW To create a container please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Encryption button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Create container button 3 The Encrypted Container Creation Wizard will be started Let us take a closer look at the wizard s steps a Enter the name of the container as well as its size and access password in the Main settings window b Specify the location of the container file in the Location window My ENCRYPTION c Select a letter of virtual drive to connect this container specify the advanced settings if necessary and confirm creation of the container with the specified settings in the Summary window To specif
339. it EE 77 Changing HTTP traffic SeCUrity level ceceececcceeccceeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeesseeeeeeesseeeseeeeeessseeaeeeeeeeesssaaaeeeeeeeteas 78 Changing actions to be performed on detected obiects rr rttttrrreeennnnn nnen 78 Creating a Bee e e E ee 78 SElISCHIMG NS SCAN TY TEE 79 FSO Ny Ls PAC ISO ates vec scrap eccencisee esata hice neers r samaciee tec R wee tare suee teen euseanootiegstiastseesaancticnssenacseceoucinonesentventeeeaes 80 USING heuristic ANALYSIS cc cc ceeeeccecceeeeeeeeceeeeceeesaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeesaeeeeeeseeeeeeesseaeeeeeeseaeeeeesseaeeeeeseaseeceeseeeeeeesueneeeeesaageeeeessaneees 81 Sei ele len EE 81 Restoring default Web protection settings cccccseecccecceseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeseeseeeeeseeseeeeeseeaeeeeeseaaeeeeessaaeeeeesaaeeeeeesaees 82 COMPONENT OPERATION ALGORITHM Web Anti Virus protects your computer against data coming onto the computer via HTTP and prevents hazardous scripts from running on the computer This section discusses the component s operation in more detail HTTP traffic is protected using the following algorithm 1 Each web page or file that is accessed by the user or by a program via the HTTP protocol is intercepted and analyzed for malicious code by Web Anti Virus Malicious objects are detected using both Computer Protection databases and the heuristic algorithm The database contains descriptions of all the malicious programs known to date and m
340. it requires more time for execution e Bruce Schneier algorithm The process consists of seven rewriting cycles The method differs from VSITR by its rewriting sequence This enhanced method of data deletion is considered the most reliable My SYSTEM TUNE UP e NAVSO P 5239 26 MFM standard USA and NAVSO P 5239 26 RLL standard USA The algorithm carries out three rewriting cycles The standards differ from one another by their sequences of data deletion e DoD 5250 22 M standard USA The algorithm carries out three rewriting cycles It is considered a reliable method of protection against people who do not have special tools but however data are successfully restored in many cases You can only delete the data that you can access under your personal account Before deleting the data make sure that the file or the folder is not opened or it is not in use by other applications To start the wizard 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe Security section click the My System Tune Up button 3 In the window that will open click the Permanently delete data button 4 Inthe Permanently delete data window that will open select an object using the Browse button then select an object to delete in the Select folder window that will open From the Data deletion method dropdown list select the required data deletion algorithm 5 In the window that will open confirm the data restoration by clicking the OK button If som
341. ith test and ending in any three characters is always spam for example ivan ivanov test com ivan petrov test org SW norder to create a list of blocked senders and use it in your further work 1 Open the main applicationwindow and click the My Computer Protection button 2 In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Spam component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 In the window that will open on the Exact methods tab in the Consider message as spam block check the If it is from blocked sender box and click the Select button 6 Inthe List of blocked senders window that will open click the Add link 7 Inthe Email address mask window that will open enter the required address or mask CREATING THE LIST OF BLOCKED PHRASES The list of blocked phrases is used to store key fragments of messages which you consider to be spam The list is filled manually You can also use masks for phrases When entering a mask you can use the and wildcards where represents any combination of characters and stands for any single character Examples of phrases and phrase masks e Hi Ivan An email message that contains this text only is a spam The use of the lines similar to the following lines is not recommended e Hi Ivan Message beginning with the Hi Ivan string is spam e Hi
342. itten permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Julian Seward jseward bzip org LIBSPF2 1 2 9 LIBRARY The libspf2 2 1 09 library was used during application development Copyright 2005 by Shevek and Wayne Schlitt All rights reserved used under the conditions of The two clause BSD license Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVID
343. k 6 Trying to configure network connections based on data found in system files of the computer being loaded 7 Loading graphical subsystem and starting Kaspersky Rescue Disk In system rescue mode only virus scan tasks and database updates from a local source are available as well as update rollback and viewing of statistics SW To load the operating system of an infected computer please do the following 1 Inthe BIOS settings enable bootingfrom CD DVD ROM for detailed information please refer to the documentation for the motherboard installed on your computer 2 Insert the CD DVD with rescue disk image into the CD DVD drive of an infected computer 3 Restart your computer Further the boot continues according with the algorithm described above For more details on the features of rescue disk please refer to Kaspersky Rescue Disk Help SEE ALSO UIA ihe OSC EE 200 PERMANENTLY DELETE DATA Data security is ensured not only by the protection against viruses Trojans and other types of malware but also by the protection against unauthorized restoration of deleted information Deleting data with the standard Microsoft Windows tools cannot ensure safety and prevent possible restoration The data do not disappear from the hard drive when deleted They are stored in the disk sectors and marked as free The file record in the file table is the only thing which is deleted Formatting data storage media such as hard disk drive
344. k for which a rule is created are described by the network service Network service has the following settings e Name This text is displayed in the list of available network services which can be selected e Direction Firewall monitors connections with the following directions e Inbound A rule is applied to data packets received by your computer It is not applied in the application rules e Inbound stream The rule is applied to network connections opened by a remote computer e Inbound Outbound The rule is applied both to the incoming and the outgoing data stream regardless of what computer yours or a remote computer initiated the network connection e Outbound A rule is applied to data packets transferred from your computer It is not applied in the application rules e Outbound stream The rule is only applied to network connections opened by your computer e Protocol Firewall monitors connections using TCP UDP ICMP ICMPv6 IGMP and GRE protocols If protocol ICMP or ICMPv6 was selected as the protocol you can specify the type and the code of the ICMP packet Application rules control connections only via TCP and UDP protocols e Remote and local ports For TCP and UDP protocols you can specify ports of your computer and the remote computer the connection between which will be monitored Computer Protection includes network services that describe most commonly used network connections When creating Firewall rules
345. k the Configure button 3 Inthe window that will open in the Messaging section select the Key words component 4 Inthe Control using key words window that will open check the Enable box Add the record to the list of key words that are controlled in messaging by clicking the Add link To view brief statistics please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Reports section and in the dropdown menu select the user account for which you want to see the report Brief statistics for the key words in messages for the selected user account is displayed in the Messaging section To obtain a detailed report please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Reports section and in the dropdown menu select the user account for which you want to see the report Click the Detailed report link 3 In the window that will open in the Messaging section select the Key words component A detailed report will be displayed in the Key words window that will open You can also open the detailed report in the Users section by clicking the Detailed report button LIMITING COMPUTER USAGE TIME You may create a schedule of user access to the computer weekdays and hours during the day as well as limit total computer usage time per day You can view comp
346. k the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open select the Application Control section 3 Inthe bottom part of the window select the icon of the required application 4 By right clicking open the context menu 5 Select the Always run in safe mode item The Y box will be displayed next to the menu item To allow the application to run in standard mode select this item again SELECTING THE MODE CLEARING SAFE MODE DATA If an application runs in safe mode all modifications performed by the application are performed within the scope of safe mode only By default at the next application startup all changes made and files saved will be available during the safe mode session If you do not need the safe mode data any more you can clear it see page 98 If you do not want the changes you have made to be available for an application at the next run in safe mode you can enable the Clear Safe Run data on exit mode for it This means that the changes you have made during the session will be lost Applications running in the specified mode are marked with the d icon SW To clear Safe Run data every time the application closes please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Application Control section 3 Inthe bottom part of the window select the icon of the required application 4 By right clicking open the contex
347. k the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Proactive Defense component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 Inthe Proactive Defense window that will open in the Events block select the required event for which you want to edit the rule 6 Configure the settings for the selected event using the links in the rule description section My COMPUTER PROTECTION e click the link with the preset action and select the required action in the Select action window that will open e click the link with the preset time period not for any activity type and specify the scan interval for hidden processes in the Hidden processes detection window that will open e click the On Off link to indicate that the report on task execution should be created CREATING A GROUP OF TRUSTED APPLICATIONS Applications included by the Application Control component in the Trusted group see section Application groups on page 88 do not impose any threat to the system However their activities will also be monitored by Proactive Defense Use the option of specifying the range of trusted applications activities of which will not be scanned by Proactive Defense Trusted applications may include those with a digital signature or those listed in Kaspersky Security Network s database SW For Proactive Defense to view applications with a digital signatur
348. ked banner addresses on page 132 lists of banners to determine whether a banner should be allowed or blocked After Computer Protection is installed Anti Banner is disabled To edit Anti Banner settings please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Banner component 4 Make the required changes in the settings for the component you have selected IN THIS SECTION Using heuristic analysis co setsieeeeeicoteicicscieet eorctnctieowinseiactnacciecelcteieeb calstewnikes ede odaicecserare ne bidendinuceresimenisesidesieneieww a seiieaesckaeicectnea Meoseseeenettces 131 Advanced COMPONENT settings ccccccccceseeseeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeaeaseeeeeeeeeaeaseeeeeeeeeeeasaeceeeeeseaaaeeeesesesseeseeeeeesessasseseseeenas 132 Creating the list of allowed banner addresees cc cceeeeecccceccceeeeeeeceeeeseeeeseeceeeeeseeesseeeeeessseeeseeeeeeeesueeseeeeeeessaaaeeseseeeeas 132 Creating the list of blocked banner addlresees 132 Exporting importing Danner TE 133 USING HEURISTIC ANALYSIS Banners which addresses are not included in the standard list can be scanned using heuristic analyzer If it is in use Computer Protection will analyze the images being downloaded for features typical of banners Based on such analysis the image may be
349. kin Specify the folder with the skin settings in the entry field To select the folder click the Browse button GAMING PROFILE Using some applications such as gaming programs in full screen mode may lead to the need of disabling certain functions of Kaspersky PURE such as the notification service Additionally those applications often require significant system resources so that executing certain Kaspersky PURE s tasks may slow down their performance To avoid manually disabling notifications and pausing tasks every time you are launching full screen applications Kaspersky PURE provides the option of temporarily editing the settings using the gaming profile The gaming profile allows simultaneously editing the settings of all the components when switching to full screen mode and rolling back the changes made when exiting the mode When switching to full screen mode event notifications will be disabled automatically Additionally you can specify the following settings Select action automatically If this setting is selected the automatic selection of action will be applied to all the components as a reaction even if the Prompt for action option is selected in their settings So the user will not receive offers to select an action on the detected threats as the application will select the action automatically e Do not run updates Do not run scheduled scan tasks and Do not run backup tasks These settings are recommended
350. l eiegedeugstegceeh ege zeg Zgeh Sege cece ioenacnspinddaci teen eege cet Deg eeh ege eeh egene 251 DISABLING SOUND NOTIFICATIONS By default all notifications are accompanied by an audio signal Microsoft Windows sound scheme is used for this purpose The H Use Windows Default sound scheme box allows to change the scheme being used If the box is unchecked the sound scheme from previous application versions will be used To disable sound notifications please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Settings link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe window that will open select the Notifications section In the Audio messages block uncheck the Enable sound notifications box DELIVERY OF NOTIFICATIONS USING EMAIL If notifications are to be delivered by email edit the delivery settings To modify the email settings for notification delivering please do the following 1 Open the main application windowand click the Settings link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe window that will open select the Notifications section 3 Check the J Enable email notifications box and click the Email settings button 4 Inthe Email notification settings window that will open specify the delivery settings REPORTS In this section you can configure report creation See page 252 and storage see page 252 LOGGING EVENTS INTO REPORT You can add information about non critical events and registry
351. lect the scan type and the computers you need to scan SW Toscan an individual computer for viruses or vulnerabilities please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Control Center link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe window that will open select a computer in the top part of the window and go to the Scan section 3 Inthe right part of the window select the required scan task UPDATING DATABASES AND APPLICATION MODULES Using the Control Center you can remotely manage the updating of Kaspersky PURE on the networked computers You can select one of the following update modes e Independent update of the databases on the computers e Centralized update via a dedicated update server To change the update mode for the networked computers please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Control Center link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe Control Center Configuration Wizard that opens proceed to the Update server step and select the required update mode When the centralized update is selected one of the networked computers should be the update server Other computers download updates from the server you have selected To select the update server please do the following 1 Open the main applicationwindow and click the Control Center link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe t
352. lected MAIL PROTECTION Mail Anti Virus scans incoming and outgoing messages for the presence of malicious objects It is launched when the operating system loads is located in computer RAM and scans all email messages received via the POP3 SMTP IMAP MAPI and NNTP protocols A collection of settings called the security level determines the way of scanning the email Once a threat is detected Mail Anti Virus performs the action you have specified see section Changing actions to be performed on detected objects on page 71 The rules with which your email is scanned are defined by a collection of settings They can be divided into groups determining the following features e from the protected mail stream e of using the methods of heuristic analysis e of scanning the compound files e of filtering the attached files Kaspersky Lab advises you not to configure Mail Anti Virus settings on your own In the majority of cases selecting a different security level is sufficient You can restore default settings of Mail Anti Virus To do so select one of the security levels To edit Mail Anti Virus settings please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Mail Anti Virus component 4 Click the Settings button for the
353. licious objects appear daily there is always some malware which are not described in the databases and which can only be detected using heuristic analysis This method presumes the analysis of the actions an object performs within the system If those actions are typical of malicious objects the object is likely to be classed as malicious or suspicious This allows new threats to be detected even before they have been researched by virus analysts If a malicious object is detected you will receive a notification prompting for action Additionally you can set the detail level for scans It sets the balance between the thoroughness of searches for new threats the load on the operating system s resources and the time required for scanning The higher the detail level the more resources the scan will require and the longer it will take SW To use the heuristic analysis and set the detail level for scans 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the File Anti Virus component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 In the window that will open on the Performance tab in the Scan methods block check the W Heuristic analysis box and specify the detail level for the scan SCAN OPTIMIZATION To shorten the duration of scans and increase
354. licious programs spread via email are most frequently sent as attachments By renaming or deleting certain attachment types you can protect your computer against potential hazards such as automatically opening attachments when a message Is received If your computer is not protected by any local network software you access the Internet directly without a proxy server or a firewall you are advised not to disable scanning of attached archives SW To configure attachment filtering settings 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Mail Anti Virus component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 Inthe window that will open on the Attachment filter tab specify the filtering conditions for email attachments When you select either of the last two modes the list of file types will become enabled in which you can specify the required types or add a mask to select a new type If you need to add a mask of a new type click the Add link and enter the required data in the Input file name mask window that will open RESTORING DEFAULT MAIL PROTECTION SETTINGS When configuring Mail Anti Virus you are always able to restore its recommended settings They are considered optimal recommended by Kaspersky Lab and grouped in the Reco
355. look see section Email scanning in Microsoft Office Outlook on page 72 that allows for fine tuning the email client If you are using The Bat Computer Protection can be used in conjunction with other anti virus applications At that the email traffic processing rules See section Email scanning in The Bat on page 72 are configured directly in The Bat and override the application s email protection settings When working with other mail programs including Microsoft Outlook Express Windows Mail Mozilla Thunderbird Eudora and Incredimail the Mail Anti Virus component scans email on SMTP POPS IMAP and NNTP protocols Note that when working with Thunderbird mail client email messages transferred via IMAP will not be scanned for viruses if any filters moving messages from the Inbox folder are used CHANGING EMAIL PROTECTION SECURITY LEVEL The security level is defined as a preset configuration of File Anti Virus settings Kaspersky Lab specialists distinguish three security levels The decision of which level to select should be made by the user based on the operational conditions and the current situation You may select one of the following security levels e High If you work in a non secure environment the maximum security level will suit you the best An example of such environment is a connection to a free email service from a network that is not guarded by centralized email protection e Recommended This level provides
356. ly defined and standardized set of rules governing the interaction between a client and a server Well known protocols and the services associated with them include HTTP WWW FTP and NNTP news INTERNET PROTOCOL IP The base protocol for the Internet used without change since the time of its development in 1974 It performs basic operations in transmitting data from one computer to another and serves as a foundation for higher level protocols like TCP and UDP It manages the connection and error processing Technologies such as NAT and masking make it possible to hide a large number of private networks using a small number of IP addresses or even one address which make it possible to respond to the demands of the constantly growing Internet using the relatively restricted IPv4 address space BACKUP COPY Creating a backup copy of a file before any processing and putting the copy into the backup storage area with the possibility of restoring the file later for example to scan it with updated databases BACKUP STORAGE Special storage designed to save backup copies of objects created before their first disinfection or deletion RECOMMENDED LEVEL Level of security based on application settings recommended by Kaspersky Lab experts to provide the optimal level of protection for your computer This level is set to be used by default KASPERSKY LAB S UPDATE SERVERS A list of Kaspersky Lab s HTTP and FTP servers from which the applic
357. ly high MAIL DATABASES Databases containing emails in a special format and saved on your computer Each incoming outgoing email is placed in the mail database after it is received sent These databases are scanned during a full computer scan Incoming and outgoing emails at the time that they are sent and received are analyzed for viruses in real time if real time protection is enabled TRAFFIC SCAN A real time scan using information from the latest version of the databases for objects transmitted over all protocols for example HTTP FIP etc APPLICATION MODULES Files included in the Kaspersky Lab installation package responsible for performing its main tasks A particular executable module corresponds to each type of the task performed by the application real time protection on demand scan updates By running a full scan of your computer from the main window you initiate the execution of this task s module PROXY SERVER Computer network service which allows users to make indirect requests to other network services First a user connects to a proxy server and requests a resource e g a file located on another server Then the proxy server either connects to the specified server and obtains the resource from it or returns the resource from its own cache in case if the proxy has its own cache In some cases a user s request or a server s response can be modified by the proxy server in certain reasons PROTOCOL Clear
358. m the probability of being spam Anti Spam algorithm consists of the following steps 1 Address of message sender is checked for the presence in the lists of allowed or blocked senders e f a sender s address is in the allowed list the message receives the Not Spam status e lf a sender s address is in the black list the message receives the Spam status My COMPUTER PROTECTION 2 Ifa message was sent using Microsoft Exchange Server and scanning of such messages is disabled see page 127 the message will be assigned the not spam status 3 Message analysis is performed to check if it contains strings from the list of allowed phrases see page 123 If at least one line from this list has been found the message will be assigned the not spam status This step is skipped by default 4 Message analysis is performed to check if it contains strings from the list of blocked phrases see page 121 Detection of words from this list in the message increases the chances of the messages being spam If calculated probability exceeds the specified value see page 124 a message receives the Spam or Probable spam status Message analysis is performed to check if it contains strings from the list of obscene phrases see page 122 This step is skipped by default 5 If message text contains an address included into the database of phishing or suspicious web addresses see page 119 the message receives the Spam status 6 Message analysis us
359. mbined with any other library facilities This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above b Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work 8 You may not copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to copy modify sublicense link with or distribute the Library is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License However parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance 9 You are not required to accept this License since you have not signed it However nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or distributing the Library or any work based on the Library you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so and all its terms and conditions for copying distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it 10 Each time you redistribute the Library or any work based on the Library the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy distribute link with or modify the Library subject to
360. me available and will run in the background For the scan not to depend on the performance of those applications system resources should not be conceded to them Note that this setting can be configured individually for every scan task In this case the configuration for a specific task has a higher priority SW n order to postpone the execution of scan tasks if it slows down other programs 1 Open the main application window and click the Settings link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe window that will open select the Compatibility section and check the 4 Concede resources to other applications box PROXY SERVER If the computer s Internet connection is made through a proxy server you may need to edit its connection settings Kaspersky PURE uses those settings for certain protection components and for updating databases and application modules If your network includes a proxy server using a nonstandard port you should add the port number to the list of monitored ports See section Creating a list of monitored ports on page 169 SW To configure the proxy server please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Settings link in the top part 2 Inthe window that will open select the Proxy Server section and configure the connection settings NOTIFICATIONS During Kaspersky PURE s operation various events may occur They may be of informative character or contain important information For e
361. mmended security level SW To restore default mail protection settings please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window My COMPUTER PROTECTION 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Mail Anti Virus component 4 Inthe Security level section click the Default level button for the component selected WEB TRAFFIC PROTECTION Whenever you use the Internet you subject information stored on your computer to the risk of infection by dangerous programs These can infiltrate your computer while you are downloading free software or browsing knowingly safe sites which have recently suffered network attacks Moreover network worms can penetrate your computer before you open a webpage or download a file just because your computer is connected to the Internet The Web Anti Virus component is designed to ensure the security while using the Internet It protects your computer against data coming into your computer via the HTTP protocol and also prevents dangerous scripts from being executed on the computer Web protection monitors HTTP traffic that passes only through the ports included in the monitored port list A list of ports that are most commonly used for transmitting email and HTTP traffic is included in the My Computer Protection installation package If you use por
362. mpeting non free programs These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries However the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances For example on rare occasions there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library so that it becomes a de facto standard To achieve this non free programs must be allowed to use the library A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non free libraries In this case there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only so we use the Lesser General Public License USING THIRD PARTY CODE In other cases permission to use a particular library in non free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software For example permission to use the GNU C Library in non free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system as well as its variant the GNU Linux operating system Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users freedom it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow Pay close attention to the difference between a work based on the library and a work that use
363. mponent 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 Inthe Web Anti Virus window that will open in the Scan optimization block check the X Do not scan HTTP traffic from trusted web addresses box and click the Select button 6 Inthe List of trusted web addresses window that will open click the Add link 7 Inthe Address mask URL window that will open enter a trusted web address or a mask for trusted address SELECTING THE SCAN TYPE The protection scope creation task see page 78 along with creation of the trusted web addresses list also includes the selection of traffic scan type performed by Web Anti Virus By type the scan is divided into script scan and HTTP traffic scan By default Web Anti Virus scans HTTP traffic and scripts simultaneously HTTP traffic scan includes not only virus scan but also checking links to know if they are included in the list of Suspicious web addresses and or in the list of phishing web addresses Checking the links if they are included in the list of phishing web addresses allows to avoid phishing attacks which as a rule look like email messages from would be financial institutions and contain links to their websites The message text convinces the reader to click the link and enter confidential information in the window that follows for example a credit card number or a login and password for an Internet banking site where financial operations can be carried out Si
364. mputer Full Scan Quick Scan Object Scan section 4 Inthe Security level block click the Settings button for the task selected 5 Inthe window that will open on the Scope tab in the Scan optimization block check the 4 Scan only new and changed files box SW Toimpose atime restriction on the scan duration 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe left part of the window select the required task in the Scan My Computer Full Scan Quick Scan Object Scan section 4 Inthe Security level block click the Settings button for the task selected 5 In the window that will open on the Scope tab in the Scan optimization block check the H Skip files scanned longer than box and specify the scan duration in the field next to it SCANNING REMOVABLE DISK DRIVES Nowadays malicious objects using operating systems vulnerabilities to replicate via networks and removable media have become increasingly widespread Use the option of scanning removable drives when connecting them to the computer To do so you have to select one of the actions to be performed by Computer Protection e Do not scan Removable drives are not scanned automatically when being connected to the computer e Ask User By default Computer Protection prompts the user for further action when a removable drive is being connected
365. mputer Protection comprehensive protection of your computer from any type of threats e My Backup creation and storage of backup copies of files that ensure restoration of important data if data loss occurs e My Parental Control restriction of the users access to web resources and applications on the computer and to instant messaging From the lower part of the window you can switch to additional functions which secure advanced protection and optimize the system s functioning In the lower part of the window in the Security section the following components and services are grouped e My System Tune Up optimizing the system operation and solving specific computer security tasks e My Virtual Keyboard preventing the interception of data entered at the keyboard e My Encryption preventing unauthorized access to confidential information e My Password Manager protection of personal data such as passwords user names Internet pager accounts contacts etc We Kaspersky PURE fo e ex 2 My Control Center Settings Kaspersky PURE Your computer is protected Restrictions enabled g My Computer Protection e My Backup v My Parental Control J 4 Your computer is protected Anti Spam Last backup completed Restrictions apply to not selected training required lt 1 minute ago Databases status Up to date Status Completed Select action y Select action y Select action Security My System Tune
366. n Ctrl right clicking Shift or Ctrl right clicking Left Alt depending on the settings selected MY ENCRYPTION Data encryption is designed for protecting confidential information against unauthorized access At that encrypted information is stored in a special container Container is an encrypted object created by the user with the Data encryption function Files and folders are moved into the container To access the data stored in the container you should enter a password Additionally Kaspersky PURE must be installed on the computer The container should be connected in order to work with the data At that the system requests a password for access When connected the container is displayed in the system as a virtual removable drive onto which you can copy or move files and folders with data IN THIS SECTION CI NGO VS scepter EE a E Hectic a td EE ESEE IEAA 206 Connecting and disconnecting Container 207 Adding files into ee TE TEE 208 ein tie lee EE 208 Creating shortcut to ACCESS the container ccccccccceeeeeecceeeecseeeseeeceeeeeaaeeseeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeesseeeseeeeeeessuaeseeeeeeessaaaseeeeeeeeeas 209 CREATING A CONTAINER To store encrypted data you need to create a container You can create a container on a local or removable drive A container can be created using the wizard When creating a container you need to specify its name size access password and container file location This wizard cons
367. n the Subject field You can assign the following processing rules for both soam and probable spam e Move to folder spam is moved to the folder of your inbox that you specify e Copy to folder a copy of the email message is created and moved to the specified folder The original email is saved in your Inbox e Delete delete spam from the user s mailbox e Skip leave the email in the Inbox folder To define the required processing rule select the appropriate value from the dropdown list in the Spam or Probable spam section When training Anti Spam with mail client See section Training using email client on page 117 a marked message will be sent to Kaspersky Lab as a spam sample Click the Additionally after manually marking emails as spam link to select the soam sample transfer mode in the window that will open Click the Additionally after manual marking emails as not spam link to select the mode of sending not spam samples i e samples mistakenly considered as spam earlier The window used for configuration of soam processing methods can be opened by clicking the Settings button next to other Anti Spam buttons in the task bar Spam and Not Spam CONFIGURING SPAM PROCESSING IN THE BAT Actions on spam and probable spam in The Bat are defined by the client s own tools SW To setup spam processing rules in The Bat please do the following 1 Inthe Properties menu of the mail client select Settings 2 Select the Sp
368. n the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Application Control component 4 Inthe Trusted applications section check the H Applications with digital signature box and or the Applications from Kaspersky Security Network database box for the component selected SW JE you want Application Control to use heuristic analysis for allocating untrusted applications to groups 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Application Control component 4 Select the Use heuristic analysis to define status option in the Trusted applications section When the status is assigned the application will be attributed to the corresponding group If you want Application Control to assign the specified status automatically when allocating untrusted applications to groups 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the Application Control component 4 Select the Assign the followi
369. n the screen To select a method for network activity filtering you should specify the status for the detected network You can select one of the following statuses e Public network Internet We recommend that you select this status for networks not protected by any anti virus applications firewalls or filters for example for Internet cafe filters Users of such networks are not allowed access to files and printers located on or connected to your computer Even if you have created a shared folder the information in it will not be available to users from networks with this status If you allowed remote access to the desktop users of this network will not be able to obtain it Filtering of the network activity for each application is performed according to the rules for this application By default this status is assigned to Internet e Local network We recommend that you assign this status to networks to which users you wish to grant access to files and printers on your computer for example for your internal corporate network or home network My COMPUTER PROTECTION e Trusted network This status is only recommended for areas that you consider absolutely safe within which your computer will not be subjected to attacks or unauthorized attempts to gain access to your data If you select this status all network activity is allowed within this network Types of network activities allowed for networks with a certain status depend on t
370. n the top part of the window 2 Inthe window that will open select the Feedback section and check the M I agree to participate in Kaspersky Security Network box APPLICATION S APPEARANCE You can change the appearance of Kaspersky PURE by creating and using various graphics and color schemes Also using various active interface elements can be configured such as the application icon in the Microsoft Windows taskbar notification area or pop up messages SEE ALSO Active interface elements EE 253 Kaspersky PURE skin AA 254 ACTIVE INTERFACE ELEMENTS To configure the active interface elements such as the Kaspersky PURE icon in the system tray and pop up messages you can use the following features of Kaspersky PURE Animate taskbar icon when executing tasks Depending on the operation being performed by the application the application icon in the system tray will change For example if an email message is being scanned a small depiction of the letter appears in the background of the icon The Kaspersky PURE icon is animated In this case it will only reflect your computer s protection status if the protection is enabled the icon will be colored if it is paused or disabled it will be grey Use semi transparent windows All the application s operations which require your immediate attention or your decision are presented as pop up messages displayed above the application icon in the system tray The message windows are translucent
371. n the window that will open select the Vendors tab and click the Import button In the window that will open select the Kaspersky Lab s certificate file The path to the Kaspersky Lab s certificate file is as follows AllUsersProfile Application Data Kaspersky Lab AVP9 Data Cert fake Kaspersky Anti Virus personal root certificate cer In the window that will open click the Install button Kaspersky Lab s certificate will be installed To view information about the certificate and to select actions for which the certificate will be used select the certificate in the list and click the View button SW To install the Kaspersky Lab s certificate for Opera version 9 x please do the following 1 2 In the browser s menu select the Tools Settings item In the window that will open select the Additional section In the left part of the window select the Security tab and click the Manage Certificates button In the window that will open select the Certification Centers tab and click the Import button In the window that will open select the Kaspersky Lab s certificate file The path to the Kaspersky Lab s certificate file is as follows AllUsersProfile Application Data Kaspersky Lab AVP9 Data Cert fake Kaspersky Anti Virus personal root certificate cer In the window that will open click the Install button Kaspersky Lab s certificate will be installed If your computer runs under Microsoft Windows Vista the path to
372. n will be displayed in the main window of My Computer Protection In addition you can select an object to be scanned with the help of standard tools of the Microsoft Windows operating system for example in the Explorer program window or on your Desktop eic Explore Search BM Scan for viruses Format Copy Create Shortcut Rename Properties Figure 13 Microsoft Windows context menu SW To start the task using a shortcut 1 Open the folder in which a shortcut was created 2 Start the task by double clicking a shortcut Task execution progress will be displayed in the main window of My Computer Protection in the Scan My Computer section SW To start a virus scan task from the application context menu 1 Right click the application icon in the taskbar notification area 2 Select the Virus Scan item in the context menu that will open 3 Inthe main window of My Computer Protection that opens in the Scan My Computer section click the button with the name of the required task To start the full scan of the computer select the Full Scan item from the context menu This will start a full computer scan Task execution progress will be displayed in the main window of My Computer Protection in the Scan My Computer section SW To start the virus scan task from the main application window 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe left part of the window select the Scan My Computer section 3 Click the button
373. nce the link to a phishing site may be received not only in an email message but in any other way for example in the text of an ICQ message Web Anti Virus component traces the attempts of accessing a phishing site at the level of HTTP traffic scan and blocks them Checking the links if they are included in the list of suspicious web addresses allows to track web sites included in the black list The list is created by Kaspersky Lab s specialists and is part of the application installation package In order for Web Anti Virus to scan scripts please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the Web Anti Virus component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 Inthe Web Anti Virus window that will open in the Additional block make sure that the Block dangerous scripts in Microsoft Internet Explorer box is checked Web Anti Virus will scan all scripts processed in Microsoft Internet Explorer as well as any other WSH scripts JavaScript Visual Basic Script etc launched when the user works on the computer Additionally you can use the Kaspersky URL Advisor see page 80 To do so check the Mark phishing and suspicious URLs in Microsoft Internet Explorer and Mozilla Firefox box Web Anti Virus will mark p
374. nced disinfection technology see page 249 e Postponing the virus scan task execution when it slows down other applications see page 250 ADVANCED DISINFECTION TECHNOLOGY Today s malicious programs can invade the lowest levels of an operating system which makes them practically impossible to delete If a malicious activity is detected within the system Kaspersky PURE will offer you to perform a special advanced disinfection procedure which will allow to eliminate the threat and delete it from the computer After this procedure you will need to restart your computer After restarting your computer you are advised to run the full virus scan SW To start the advanced disinfection procedure please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Settings link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe window that will open select the Compatibility section and check he Enable advanced disinfection technology box COMPUTER PERFORMANCE DURING TASK EXECUTION Virus scan tasks may be postponed to limit the load on the central processing unit CPU and disk storage subsystems Executing scan tasks increases the load on the CPU and disk subsystems thus slowing down other applications By default if such a situation arises Kaspersky PURE will pause virus scan tasks and release system resources for the user s applications However there is a number of applications which will start immediately when CPU resources beco
375. ndow that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Spam component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 Inthe window that will open on the Additional tab in the Outgoing messages block check the 4 Train using outgoing email messages box SW To disable adding the sender s address to the list of allowed senders 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Spam component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 Inthe window that will open on the Exact methods tab in the Consider message as not spam block check the M If it is from allowed sender box and click the Select button 6 Inthe List of allowed senders window that will open uncheck e Add allowed senders addresses when training Anti Spam in the mail client box SEE ALSO Training USING the Training Wizard E 116 TANINO lie TS e 118 Training USING email cent 117 TRAINING USING EMAIL CLIENT Training Anti Spam while working directly with email messages involves using special interface elements of your mail client program Buttons used for training Anti Spam appear in the interface of Microsoft Office Outlook and Microsoft Outlook Express Windows Mail mail clients only after you have installed Computer Protect
376. nencsenecoeuesenesinatose avaennewensseaseeweecehesseecesnaeee 119 Selecting the SCAN Meth s serisiresseepisedsinen eein eriari EAE R Er APRENER RE iki 119 Creating the list of trusted URLS 0 0 0 0 ccceeccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeceeeeeeeeesseeceeeesssaeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeseeeeeeas 120 Creating the list Of blocked senders cccseeeeeccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeeeseeaeeceeeeesseeeeseceeeesseuesseeeeeeessaeaeeeeeeeeeas 120 Creating the list of blocked phrases nnnnnnnnnnneneneeennestetrrrrttttrrrrttensssstrrnrttttttttttenssrrrrrttEEEEEEEEEnnnnnnn nnn E teeren 121 Creating the list of obscene phrases ccccccceeceeceececaaneeseeseeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeaaaaeusaaeeeeeeeeeeeeesesseeaaaaaagaseaeeseeeeeees 122 Creating the list of allowed senders ccccceeecccccceeeceeseeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeceeeeeseeeeaeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesssaaeeeeeeeeeeas 122 Creating the list of allowed phrases sascccsceieseeecccasicted conaeseenccdsidndekerausnosentedsanaeetdestdededshersadcaddenedrenseebdeeseiabedenens 123 Importing the list of allowed senders cccccccsseesseeeeecceeeeseeceeeeeeaeesseeeeeeeesaeasaeeeeeeseeaeaaeeeeeeesesaeaseeeeeesensaaess 124 Determining spam and potential spam ratings cccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeeeesseaeaeeeeeeeesaeaeeeeeseessaaaneeeees 124 Selecting the spam recognition algorttbm 125 Using additional spam filtering features 125 Adding a label to message sue 126
377. ner Wizard see page 204 searching for and eliminating traces of user s activities in the system IN THIS SECTION ein tre lt te the DONS OTa 198 Restonng alter WSC de E 199 STEE 199 Permanently Delete Data EE 202 Fe Unused Dila ME 203 Privacy Cleaner Wizard op cscdnast er eatecotiaeseteneaenretdacnnstoteusnerassadanectead vaiedsdedateticneasueddeateseseadceuadeeieeedeedareeddendeeecceaseeedccnateteeess 204 CONFIGURING THE BROWSER The Browser Configuration Wizard analyzes Microsoft Internet Explorer settings from the perspective of security since some seitings selected by the user or set by default may cause security problems The Wizard checks whether the latest software updates for the browser have been installed and whether its settings contain any potential vulnerabilities which can be used by intruders to inflict damage on your computer Examples of the analyzed objects e Microsoft Internet Explorer cache The cache contains confidential data from which can be also obtained a history of websites visited by the user Some malware objects also scan the cache while scanning the disk and intruders can obtain the user s email addresses You are advised to clear the cache every time you close your browser e Displaying extensions for files of known formats One option for Windows Explorer is to hide file extensions Many malware objects use double extension in which case the user can only see a part of the filename without My SYST
378. ng 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Application Control section 3 Inthe window that will open in the Application Control block click the Application activity link 4 Inthe Application Activity Control window that will open in the Category dropdown list select the required category 5 Inthe Status column left click the link with the application s status for the required application 6 Inthe menu that will open select the Custom settings item 7 Inthe window that will open on the Rules tab select the Network rules category from the dropdown list and click the Add link 8 Inthe Network rule window that will open configure the packet rule 9 Assign the priority for created rule CONFIGURING EXCLUSIONS When you create a default application rule Computer Protection will monitor any of the user application s actions including access to files and folders access to the execution environment and network access You can exclude certain actions of a user application from the scan SW norder to exclude applications actions from the scan 1 2 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection In the window that will open select the Application Control section In the window that will open in the Application Control block click the Application activity link In the Application Activity Control w
379. ng actions by editing the settings e disable Network Attack Blocker e add an attacking computer to blocked list see page 110 To disable Network Attack Blocker please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Network Attack Blocker component 4 Inthe right part of the window uncheck the X Enable Network Attack Blocker box To switch to editing the Network Attack Blocker settings please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Network Attack Blocker component 4 Inthe right part of the window make the required changes of the component settings ANTI SPAM The Anti Spam component settings are grouped in this window see page 113 You can perform the following actions by editing the settings e disable Anti Spam e train Anti Spam see page 115 e using the Training Wizard see page 116 e with outgoing messages see page 117 e using email client see page 117 e using the reports see page 118 e change security level see page 119 e change the scan method see page 119 e create a list of e trust
380. ng is complete Kaspersky Lab guarantees that no gathering and distribution of users personal data is performed within Kaspersky Security Network GETTING STARTED SW To configure the statistics sending settings 1 Open the main application window and click the Settings link in the top part of the window 2 Select the Feedback section in the left part of the window 3 Check the H I agree to participate in Kaspersky Security Network box to confirm your participation in Kaspersky Security Network SECURITY MANAGEMENT Problems in computer protection are indicated by the computer protection status See section My Computer Protection on page 53 which is displayed by changes in the color of the protection status icon and of the panel in which this icon is located Once problems appear in the protection system you are advised to fix them immediately Your computer security ts at risk Trial license validity period has expired Fix t now Figure 1 Current status of the computer protection You can view the list of problems occurred their description and possible methods of resolving on the Status tab see figure below you can select it by clicking on the status icon or on the panel on which it is located see figure above Fa Protection state Kaspersky PURE Kaspersky PURE The databases that the application uses to protect your computer are obsolete You are advised to update databases as soon as possible
381. ng lists of contacts allowed or blocked for intercourse e viewing messaging text e forbidding certain personal data transfer e searching for key words in messaging texts the number of key words found is displayed in the Reports section e creating lists of applications allowed and blocked for launch as well as timely restrictions for allowed applications running Every restriction is enabled separately which allows to adjust Parental Control for different users For each user account you can view reports that display events in controlled categories for the chosen period IN THIS SECTION Enabling and configuring Parental Control 188 Limiting time of Internet EE 189 ACESS e WED EE 190 Downloading files from the Internet iveiacescussiseonoscsnnwonsunnchedueinsnevedusnaaincbenvendeeaceadesmanaeuatieenedeatsanoatemsahedeabanwensdvnesadesdsawerictinn 190 EE EE 191 Metan Messaging EE 192 Sending hee E EE 193 Me EE 194 Limiting compu ter USAC S MC sien 2 0ccaccdearpanigtodetaesmere aia stauecgsdecsbacedeeenedsGadnatdeesueacedecihanicacneesoodeanentesnegedecreaiicaoueccrsearbened 194 Running applications and ln 195 Saving and downloading Parental Control settings cccccssssseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaeeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeaeaeaaesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 196 ENABLING AND CONFIGURING PARENTAL CONTROL You need to perform the authentication procedure to begin managing the component After you have entered the name and th
382. ng network traffic for activities characteristic of network attacks Once an attempt of attacking your computer is detected Computer Protection blocks any network activity of the attacking computer towards your computer By default the blocking persists for one hour A notification see section Notifications on page 256 will appear on the screen informing of a network attack attempt perpetrated with specific information about the computer which attacked you Descriptions of currently known network attacks see section Types of detected network attacks on page 110 and methods to counteract them are provided in the Computer Protection databases The list of attacks which the Network Attack Blocker can detect is updated when the application s databases are updated IN THIS SECTION Blocking the attacking computers ocasascncesveskinctiosassteupsaimanseocanseerdadnatiepasue aventennssagohanctesdaloationsGantiveedasioshesasenentesaduatenccoatveehaties 110 Types of detected network attacks ccccccccseccecseeceeceececceececaeeeeeceeeceeseeeceeeeeceeseeeceeseeecesaueeessaeceeseuecessueeeesaaeeesseeeeeeas 11 BLOCKING THE ATTACKING COMPUTERS By default Network Attack Blocker on page 110 blocks the activity of an attacking computer for one hour SW To modify the time for which the attacking computer will be blocked 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the
383. ng status automatically option in the Trusted applications section Applications will be distributed to corresponding groups CHANGING THE TIME USED TO DETERMINE THE APPLICATION STATUS If heuristic analysis is used to determine the application status Application Control analyzes the program for 30 seconds by default If threat rating has not been calculated during this time the application receives a Low Restricted status and is placed to the corresponding group Threat rating calculation continues in the background After the application has been studied with the help of heuristic analyzer it receives the status according to its threat rating and is placed to the corresponding group You can change the time allocated for applications analysis If you are sure that all applications started on your computer do not impose any threat to security you can decrease the time spent for analysis If on the contrary you are installing the software and are not sure that it is safe you are advised to increase the time for analysis To change the amount of time allocated to checking the unknown applications 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Application Control component 4 For selected component set the value for Maximum time to define the application st
384. ng the operations When the container is disconnected you need to enter a password to obtain access to the encrypted data SW To open a container via the application interface 1 Open the main application window and click the Encryption button 2 Inthe window that will open select a connected container and open it with a double click 3 Place in it the data you want to encrypt SW To open a container via the context menu please do the following 1 Right click to open the context menu of a connected container file or shortcut to access the container see section Creating shortcut to access the container on page 209 on the desktop 2 Select the Open container item from the menu that will open CONFIGURING CONTAINER You can change the container s name and the access password You can modify the settings for a disconnected container only Torename a container please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Data encryption button 2 Inthe window that will open select a container and click the Configure button 3 In the window that will open enter the password to obtain access to the container 4 Inthe Container settings window that will open specify the new name of the container SW To change the password for the container please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Encryption button 2 Inthe window that will open select a container and click the Configure button
385. ngs On the Manual form edit tab modify the settings for populating other fields of the web page if necessary If necessary under the Comments tab enter some explanatory text for the account To display comments in a notification after activating the account check the box H Show comments in the notification KEYWORD SEARCH To quickly search for personal data in the Password Database you can use keywords They are generated for each user name It is recommended to assign keywords when adding an account See page 215 user name see page 219 To specify keywords for the user name please do the following 1 In the context menu of the application select Password Manager My PASSWORD MANAGER 2 Inthe Password Manager window under the Edit tab select the user name from the My Passwords list and open it for editing by clicking Edit 3 Inthe displayed window click next to the Login field and fill in the Description field If an account was chosen with one user name in the Account with a single Login window under the Login information tab click ADDING PATH TO PROGRAM WEB PAGE Personal data from the account will be automatically entered into the authorization fields of the web page program A link is used to define a web page application For a web page it is the address and for a program it is the path to the executable file of the application on the computer Without this data the account will not b
386. nk in the top part 2 Inthe window that will open select the General section and under Password protection check the WH Enable password protection box and click the Settings button 3 Inthe Password protection window that will open enter the password and specify the scope to be covered by the access restriction Now whenever any user on your computer attempts to perform the actions you have selected Kaspersky PURE will always request the password SELF DEFENSE Kaspersky PURE ensures your computer s security against malware and because of that can be the target of malicious programs which may try to block or even delete it To ensure the reliability of your computer s security system Kaspersky PURE is provided with features of self defense and protection against remote access CONFIGURING KASPERSKY PURE SETTINGS On computers running under 64 bit operating systems and Microsoft Windows Vista self defense is only available to prevent changing or deleting Kaspersky PURE s own files on local drives and system registry records Frequent are the situations when remote administration programs such as RemoteAdmin are needed while using the remote access protection To ensure their normal performance you should add these programs to the list of trusted applications and enable the Do not monitor application activity option for them To enable Kaspersky PURE s self defense mechanisms please do the following 1 Open the main a
387. nthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Banner component 4 Inthe Additional section click the Settings button for the list that should be copied for the component selected 5 Inthe White list or Black list window that will open use the Import or Export links COMPUTER SCAN Scanning the computer for viruses and vulnerabilities is one of the most important tasks in ensuring the computer s security The virus scan detects the spreading of malicious code which has not been detected by the malware protection for some reasons Vulnerability scan detects software vulnerabilities that can be used by intruders to spread malicious objects and obtain access to personal information Kaspersky Lab distinguishes virus scan tasks See page 134 including scan of removable drives see page 140 and system s and applications vulnerability scan see page 144 SW norder to change the settings of any scan task 1 Open the main application window and click the Settings link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe left part of the window select the required task in the Scan My Computer Full Scan Quick Scan Object Scan Vulnerability Scan section 3 Make the required changes in the settings for the task selected IN THIS SECTION VOS SC EE 134 WIIG le Ee EE 144 VIRUS SCAN Kaspersky Lab specialists distingui
388. nu IN THIS SECTION PO CLON EE 156 FS at ENEE 157 Mal nd TE 157 Ee E E 158 NEE 159 Application Control EE 159 EE UE 160 Focie De EG 161 Ne twork Attack elei 162 PAU O EE 162 Aa I EEN 163 aA EE eege ee 164 GANG E 165 PROTECTION In the Protection window you can use the following additional functions of Computer Protection e Enabling disabling the protection provided by Computer Protection see page 156 e Using interactive protection mode see page 156 ENABLING DISABLING COMPUTER PROTECTION By default Computer Protection is launched when the operating system loads and protects your computer until it is switched off All protection components are running You can completely or partially disable the protection provided by Computer Protection The Kaspersky Lab specialists strongly recommend that you do not disable protection since this could lead to an infection of your computer and data loss When the protection is disabled all its components become inactive This is indicated by the following signs e inactive grey icon of My Computer Protection see section Notification area icon on page 50 in the taskbar notification area e red color of the security indicator In this case protection is being discussed in the context of the protection components Disabling or pausing protection components does not affect the execution of virus scan tasks and Computer Protection updates To disable protection
389. ny reason for example the computer was not on at that time you can configure the task to start automatically as soon as it becomes possible SW To edit a schedule for scan tasks 1 2 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window In the left part of the window select the Vulnerability Scan task in the Scan My Computer section In the Run mode block click the Settings button for the task selected In the window that will open on the Run mode tab in the Schedule block select the Manually option if you wish to start the scan task at the most suitable time If you wish the task to run periodically select By schedule and create a task launch schedule SW To configure automatic launches of skipped tasks 1 2 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window In the left part of the window select the Vulnerability Scan task in the Scan My Computer section In the Run mode block click the Settings button for the task selected In the window that will open on the Run mode tab in the Schedule block check e Run skipped tasks box RUN MODE SPECIFYING AN ACCOUNT You can specify an account used by the application when performing a vulnerability scan My COMPUTER PROTECTION To specify an
390. o the following 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe Security section click Password Manager 3 Inthe left part of the Settings window select Authorization method 4 Inthe right part of the window under Authorization method select the USB device value from the drop down list 5 Connect the removable device to the computer 6 Select a device from the Disk drives list and click Set The icon O appears next to the chosen device If the connected device does not appear in the list check the 4 Show additional devices box If necessary you can change the authorization device by clicking Reset SW To use a Bluetooth device to access the Password Database please do the following 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe Security section click Password Manager 3 Inthe left part of the Settings window select Authorization method 4 Inthe right part of the window under Authorization method select the value Bluetooth device from the drop down list 5 Enable Bluetooth on your computer and then on the device 6 Select a device from the Phones and modems list and then click Set The icon O appears next to the chosen device If necessary you can change the authorization device by clicking Reset CHANGING MASTER PASSWORD Password Manager allows the Master Password to be used to access your Password Database see page 233 Thus you only need to remember one password By default a Master Password is created
391. oT eet Pa eee eee ern cee eee 120 Microsoft Exchange Server messages 127 Microso Omice OUNOOK En ION EE 127 Microsoft Outlook Express evtension rrr ArEtEEEEEEEEEEAAEEAEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEnEE EEEE EErEE EEEE eenean 129 Oor O IMM eea sec pemauetgeseaecne teenie Slaw ooeeenamats 114 OFS ME Ee Uu RE 114 124 restoring the ET E e EE 130 EISEN A EE 119 EISE 114 124 Re A O E 129 Th nderbird E e TN 130 Eer Le EE 115 Application Control Application Weer EU 90 EOC ARON EOS EE 88 application Een e 89 editing an application UIE sescccasiinsxncensecisiaxagitienedaeniesaniedsuteudadiainvandiounas ardederinstwayladdniuwasdeeieeteidusasiinsseniuaetidianaaienennetdes 92 SS aa E donee ene see E E E A E A 94 INU TEMG AE VIVES EE 87 SET ATI ls eil e secs crt ce ere gctetersc aise cents E E E soho neeoaemneessseee anes sahcauessche 87 EONS CUI OM ee 89 EES 88 Application Control rules Applicaton eer e EE 90 Application groups Applicaton eer EE 88 Application rule FW EE A A A niece erates E EEA SEA E ET 103 Application run sequence Application Conio E 89 B Backup US ANC SOA E E AE E T E E E E E N E EEE E A 182 SO MSC Ee Le 182 creating ele KEE 183 el ere le Eege EE 181 removing a tele 183 AEE n a ES E 185 Wille Ee El BEE 184 searching Tor DaCKUP Beer EE 184 viewing DAC KU COPY dla ME 185 viewing event ee E 186 BACKUP COD E 298 Se te Ree 173 Base of phishing web addresses EES OU E 119 I RT EE 84 Wen EE 79 C Clear data el a EE 98
392. oaded from Kaspersky Lab servers to a local folder and then granting access to them to other computers on the network to reduce network traffic INSTALLING KASPERSKY PURE ON YOUR COMPUTER Kaspersky PURE is installed on the computer in interactive mode using the Installation Wizard that starts when you open the installation file Before beginning the installation you are advised to close all applications currently running To install Kaspersky PURE on your computer run the installation file file with the exe extension on the product CD you have purchased You can also receive the application installation package via the Internet The installation of Kaspersky PURE from the installation package downloaded via the Internet is identical to that from the installation CD When the installation package is opened the application will automatically search for the installation file with the msi extension If it is found the application will search for a newer version of the product on Kaspersky Lab servers on the Internet If the installation package file cannot be found you will be offered to download it When the download is complete the installation of Kaspersky PURE starts If the download is cancelled the application installation will proceed in standard mode The Installation Wizard is presented as a sequence of windows steps To ease the management of the installation process each window contains the following set of buttons
393. ocal port from which it is being initiated remote port and address being connected to are given e Application run sequence e Action series of operations that Computer Protection should perform regarding the network activity detected You are asked to select one of the following actions e Allow e Deny e Create a rule When this option is selected Rule Creation Wizard see page 104 is started which will help you to create a rule controlling network activity of the application You can e Perform an action only once To do so select Allow or Deny e Apply an action to the session of the application whose network activity has been detected To do so select Allow or Deny and check the X Apply to current application session box e Apply the action selected for the application to all sessions To do so select Allow or Deny and check the Apply always e Create a rule to regulate the application s network activity To do so select Create a rule NEW NETWORK DETECTED Every time your computer connects to a new zone i e network a special notification will pop up The upper portion of the notification contains a brief description of the network specifying the IP address and subnet mask The lower part of the window requests you to assign a status to the zone and network activity will be allowed based on that status e Public network block external access to computer A high risk network in which your comp
394. of who wrote it Thus it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you rather the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library In addition mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library or with a work based on the Library on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License 3 You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library To do this you must alter all the notices that refer to this License so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License version 2 instead of to this License If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared then you can specify that version instead if you wish Do not make any other change in these notices Once this change is made in a given copy it is irreversible for that copy so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that Is not a library 4 You may copy and distribute the Library or a portion or derivative of it under Section 2 in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 ab
395. of Kaspersky PURE components or of virus scan tasks is logged in the report which contains summary information about the computer protection status There you can learn how many dangerous and suspicious objects have been detected by the application and find out which of them have been disinfected deleted or quarantined The Computer Protection status see section My Computer Protection on page 53 warns the user about the malicious objects detected by the application by changing the color of the protection status icon and that of the panel on which it is located If malicious objects are detected the color of the icon and the panel will change to red In this case all emerging threats should be eliminated immediately S To view information on the computer protection status 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that opens click the Report link To eliminate problems occurred in the computer protection 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that opens click the Report link 3 In the window that opens on the Status tab perform the required actions To make hidden messages re appear in the general list check the M Show hidden messages box In order to perform an action on a detected object 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that opens click the Report link 3 In th
396. of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so provided that the above copyright notice s and this permission notice appear in all copies of the Software and that both the above copyright notice s and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE Except as contained in this notice the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder All trademarks and registered trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective owners OTHE
397. oftware if you receive the Software on multiple media if you otherwise receive multiple copies of the Software or if you received the 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 0 2 6 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 3 9 4 Software bundled with other software the total permitted number of your Computers on which all versions of the Software are installed shall correspond to the number of computers specified in licenses you have obtained from the Rightholder provided that unless the licensing terms provide otherwise each acquired license entitles you to install and use the Software on such a number of Computer s as is specified in Clauses 2 2 and 2 3 If the Software was acquired on a physical medium You have the right to use the Software for protection of such a number of Computer s as is specified on the Software package or as specified in additional agreement If the Software was acquired via the Internet You have the right to use the Software for protection of such a number of Computers that was specified when You acquired the License to the Software or as specified in additional agreement You have the right to make a copy of the Software solely for back up purposes and only to replace the legally owned copy if such copy is lost destroyed or becomes unusable This back up copy cannot be used for other purposes and must be destroyed when you lose the right to use the Software or when Your license expires
398. oftware to be sent to the Rightholder You should not activate and or de activate the Kaspersky Security Network service Limitations You shall not emulate clone rent lend lease sell modify decompile or reverse engineer the Software or disassemble or create derivative works based on the Software or any portion thereof with the sole exception of a non waivable right granted to You by applicable legislation and you shall not otherwise reduce any part of the Software to human readable form or transfer the licensed Software or any subset of the licensed Software nor permit any third party to do so except to the extent the foregoing restriction is expressly prohibited by applicable law Neither Software s binary code nor source may be used or reverse engineered to re create the program algorithm which is proprietary All rights not expressly granted herein are reserved by Rightholder and or its Suppliers as applicable Any such unauthorized use of the Software shall result in immediate and automatic termination of this Agreement and the License granted hereunder and may result in criminal and or civil prosecution against You You shall not transfer the rights to use the Software to any third party except as set forth in Clause 2 5 of this Agreement or in additional agreement You shall not provide the activation code and or license key file to third parties or allow third parties access to the activation code and or license key which are deeme
399. om this software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Code generated by the Protocol Buffer compiler is owned by the owner of the input file used when generating it This code is not standalone and requires a support library to be linked with it This support library is itself covered by the above license SQLITE 3 5 9 LIBRARY The sqlite 3 5 9 library has been used when creating the application Copyright C Dan Kennedy D Richard Hipp http www sqlite org copyright html Icu 4 0 LIBRARY The icu 4 0 library has been used when creating the application Copyright c 1995 2009 International Business Machines Corporation and others All rights reserved Permission is hereby granted free
400. omain2 web site com pointer php or http Awww domain4 domain2 web site com pointer php For the website lt name of website gt The account will be used for all web pages with fields for entering user names and passwords For example Password Manager automatically adds identity cards for web pages http www domain1 domain2 web site com login html http Awww domain2 domain2 web site com pointer php http www domain3 domain2 web site com pointer php or http Awww domain4 domain2 web site com pointer php SW To set parameters for using an account please do the following 1 2 In the context menu of the application select Password Manager In the Password Manager window under the Edit tab select the account from the My Passwords list and then open it by clicking Edit In the displayed window under the Links tab select one of the options for using the account My PASSWORD MANAGER AUTOMATIC ACTIVATION OF THE ACCOUNT By default automatic activation of the account is enabled Password Manager only enters the user name and password in the identity fields You can modify the advanced settings for the account activation see page 215 A range of web addresses for which automatic activation is used is additionally specified for the web page The following options are available for activating the account e For the chosen web page The account is activated only for the given web page e For the website The accoun
401. ommercial version of the application and you have been provided an activation code You can use this code to obtain a key file providing access to the application s full functionality throughout the effective term of the license e Activate trial license Use this activation option if you want to install the trial version of the application before making the decision to purchase a commercial version You will be provided a free key file valid for a term specified in the trial version license agreement e Activate later If you select this option the stage of Kaspersky PURE activation will be skipped The application will be installed on your computer but you will not be able to use certain application functions for example update you will be able to update the application only once after its installation creation of an encrypted container additional tools etc The Activate later option is only available at the first start of Activation Wizard immediately after the application installation If Kaspersky PURE has been installed and then removed with activation information saved this step will be skipped In this case Configuration Wizard will automatically receive information about the existing license which will be displayed in the wizard window SEE ALSO Activating the commercial version 39 Activating the Re EE 40 CGompleung the ene ieee tee eee an ener ee eae ree ea rn ee eee 40 ACTIVATING THE COMMERCIAL VERSION If you select t
402. on 3 From the list in the right part of the window select the task which should be executed and click the Run link The line of the task you have selected displays the time elapsed since the beginning of the task run Task run may be paused or cancelled by using respective buttons in the top part of the window Task execution results in creating an archive of current backup copies in the storage SEARCHING FOR BACKUP COPIES To search for backup copies in a storage you can use the filter and the search field Backup copy filter allows displaying only the copies which conform to the search criteria you have specified e Inthe Archive dropdown list select the name of the task which has resulted in creating an archive with the required backup copies when executed e Inthe Date field specify the date when the archive with the required backup copies has been created e From the Category dropdown list select the file types for which backup copies should be found You can find a backup copy in the archive by entering its name in the search field To display the backup copies of files which have not been included into the list of files subject to backup at the last execution of the task eg which have been deleted from the computer check the Show deleted files box BACKUP COPY SW To filter backup copies please do the following 1 2 3 Open the main application window and click the Backup button In the window
403. on does not entitle You Updates and Technical support via the Internet and Technical support telephone hotline Your License to Use the Software is limited to the period of time as specified in Clauses 3 2 or 3 3 as applicable and the remaining period can be viewed via means described in User Manual If You have acquired the Software that is intended to be used on more than one Computer then Your License to Use the Software is limited to the period of time starting from the date of activation of the Software or license key file installation on the first Computer Without prejudice to any other remedy in law or in equity that the Rightholder may have in the event of any breach by You of any of the terms and conditions of this Agreement the Rightholder shall at any time without notice to You be entitled to terminate this License to use the Software without refunding the purchase price or any part thereof You agree that in using the Software and in using any report or information derived as a result of using this Software you will comply with all applicable international national state regional and local laws and regulations including without limitation privacy copyright export control and obscenity law Except as otherwise specifically provided herein you may not transfer or assign any of the rights granted to you under this Agreement or any of your obligations pursuant hereto Technical Support The Technical Support described in Clause
404. on will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others Finally software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder Therefore we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license Most GNU software including some libraries is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License This license the GNU Lesser General Public License applies to certain designated libraries and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non free programs When a program is linked with a library whether statically or using a shared library the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work a derivative of the original library The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library We call this license the Lesser General Public License because it does Less to protect the user s freedom than the ordinary General Public License It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over co
405. onal nature To keep up to date use the notifications service Users are notified of events by prompts and pop up messages The following types of notifications are implemented in the application e Application start A message appears upon application restart when the application has already been started and the Password Database is not locked e Account activation A message appears when the account is activated e Clear clipboard Password Manager can temporarily store the password in clipboard This is convenient when data needs to be copied and then pasted in the selected field When the specified time expires See page 237 the password will be deleted from clipboard e Automatically block Password Manager The message appears when Password Manager automatically blocks the password database By default Password Manager automatically locks the Password Database after the operating system starts up and after a specified time see page 233 during which the computer is not used My PASSWORD MANAGER e Exporting passwords to unencrypted file A warning message saying that after export your passwords will be saved in a non encrypted file and will consequently be made accessible to any user working on your computer We recommend that before exporting data you consider ways of protecting the file containing passwords e Manual form edit To set parameters for additional fields the application requests permission to use the default
406. one we recommend that you abstain from using the iSwift n iChecker database saved since the previous installation of the application During this time interval a malicious program may have penetrated into your computer and taken malicious actions that cannot be detected with this database which may eventually lead to the infection of your computer To start the operation you have selected click the Next button This launches the process of copying the required files to your computer or removing the components and data you have selected STEP 3 FINISHING APPLICATION MODIFICATION RESTORATION OR REMOVAL The process of restoration modification or removal is displayed on the screen and you are notified of its completion As a rule the removal requires that you restart your computer since it is necessary for applying the changes to the system The request for restarting the computer will be displayed on the screen Click the Yes button to restart your computer immediately To restart your computer manually later click the No button GETTING STARTED One of the main goals of Kaspersky Lab when creating Kaspersky PURE was comprehensive protection of computers within home network The optimal configuration of all application settings allows users with any level of computer literacy to ensure his or her computer s protection immediately after the installation For the users convenience the initial configuration stages are combined in th
407. onfigure button 3 In the window that will open click the Load settings link in the top part of the window 4 Inthe Load control settings window that opens select the Template option and specify the template whose settings you want to use MY SYSTEM TUNE UP Ensuring computer s security is a difficult task that requires the expertise in operating system s features and in ways of exploiting its weak points Additionally volume and diversity of information about system security makes its analysis and processing difficult To facilitate the solving of specific tasks of providing computer security a set of wizards and tools was included in the Kaspersky PURE package e Browser Configuration Wizard see page 198 performing the analysis of the Microsoft Internet Explorer s settings and evaluating them primarily in relation to the security e System Restore Wizard see page 199 eliminating traces of a malware object s presence in the system e Rescue Disk Creation Wizard see page 199 restoring the system s operability after a virus attack or if the system files of the operating system are corrupted and it cannot be rebooted as it was e Data Deletion Wizard see page 202 ensuring deletion of confidential data without any opportunity of restoring them in the future e Unused Data Clearing Wizard see page 203 deleting temporary and unused files from your computer and optimizing the system s functioning e Privacy Clea
408. ons The inactive button is displayed in the application window if the Caption Button is additionally configured see page 237 CONFIGURATION WIZARD The configuration wizard for the application is launched when Password Manager is started for the first time Its purpose is to help you perform the initial configuration of Password Manager in accordance with your personal preferences and tasks The wizard is presented as a sequence of windows steps You can move through the steps by clicking Next and Back as required To exit the wizard at any stage click Exit To complete the wizard click Finish Now we shall discuss each of the wizard s steps in more detail PASSWORD DATABASE MANAGEMENT The Password Database stores all accounts for applications and web pages with one or several user names as well as Identities cards containing for example contact details phone numbers Internet pager numbers etc You can use the Password Database if it is unlocked See page 214 Before entering any changes in the Password Database it is recommended that you configure Password Database backup see page 231 If this data is accidentally changed or deleted use Restore Password Database see page 224 You can do the following e add see page 215 change see page 221 delete see page 223 personal data e import export See page 223 restore see page 224 Password Database IN THIS SECTION ACCESSING Password RE Ee EE 214 Add
409. op part of the window that will open select a computer and go to the Update section 3 Click the Select as the update server button You can run an update task remotely either for the whole network or for an individual computer Torun update on all the networked computers please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Control Center link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe top part of the window that will open click the Perform update link in the Actions for network menu My CONTROL CENTER 3 Inthe Group start of update window that will open select the computers on which you need to download the updates SW Torun the update on an individual computer please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Control Center link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe top part of the window that will open select a computer and go to the Update section 3 Inthe right part of the window click the Perform update button REMOTE BACKUP Using the Control Center you can remotely run backup tasks on the networked computers as well as view the report on executed backup tasks and data restoration tasks To backup objects remotely please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Control Center link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe window that will open select a computer in the top part of the window and go to the Backup section 3 Inthe right pa
410. or implied with respect to this software its quality accuracy merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose This software is provided AS IS and you its user assume the entire risk as to its quality and accuracy Permission is hereby granted to use copy modify and distribute this software or portions thereof for any purpose without fee subject to these conditions 1 If any part of the source code for this software is distributed then this README file must be included with this copyright and no warranty notice unaltered and any additions deletions or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation 2 If only executable code is distributed then the accompanying documentation must state that this software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group 3 Permission for use of this software is granted only if the user accepts full responsibility for any undesirable consequences the authors accept NO LIABILITY for damages of any kind These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on the IJG code not just to the unmodified library If you use our work you ought to acknowledge us Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG author s name or company name in advertising or publicity relating to this software or products derived from it This software may be referred to only as the Independent JPEG Group s software We specifically permit and en
411. ore you copy the product from the Kaspersky Lab website The installation package includes the product itself and this Agreement The activation code will be sent to you by email when paid HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS For the proper functioning of Kaspersky PURE your computer should meet the following minimum requirements KASPERSKY PURE General requirements e 320 MB free hard drive space e CD ROM for installation of Kaspersky PURE from the installation CD e Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 0 or higher for updating application s databases and software modules via Internet e Microsoft Windows Installer 2 0 Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition Service Pack 3 Microsoft Windows XP Professional Service Pack 3 Microsoft Windows XP Professional x64 Edition Service Pack 3 e Intel Pentium 300 MHz processor or higher or a compatible equivalent e 256 MB free RAM SW Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium Microsoft Windows Vista Business Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate e Intel Pentium 800 MHz 32 bit x86 64 bit x64 processor or higher or a compatible equivalent e 512 MB free RAM Microsoft Windows 7 Home Premium Microsoft Windows 7 Professional Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate e Intel Pentium 1 GHz 32 bit x86 64 bit x64 processor or higher or a compatible equivalent e 1 GB free RAM 32 bit 2 GB free RAM 64 bit
412. ormed for vulnerabilities in installed applications as well as for damages and anomalies in the operating system and browser settings SW To start the vulnerability scan task 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe left part of the window that will open select the Scan My Computer section 3 Click the Open Vulnerability Scan window button 4 In the window that will open click the Start Vulnerability Scan button MANAGING LICENSE Kaspersky PURE needs a valid key to operate A key file is provided using the activation code obtained when purchasing the application it ensures the right to use it since the date of activation The key file contains information about the license the type the expiration date and the number of hosts Without a key file unless a trial version of the application has been activated Kaspersky PURE will run with limited functionality For example only one application update will be available after the installation the application will not download any new updates A number of other application functions will also be not available for example additional tools creation of an encrypted container etc If a trial version of the program has been activated after the trial period expires Kaspersky PURE will not run When the commercial license expires the application also switches to the mode of limited functionality in which My System Tune Up and a number of
413. ort please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Reports section and in the dropdown menu select the user account for which you want to see the report Click the Detailed report link 3 In the window that will open in the Computer section select the Running applications component A detailed report will be displayed in the Running applications window that will open You can also open the detailed report in the Users section by clicking the Detailed report button SAVING AND DOWNLOADING PARENTAL CONTROL SETTINGS If you have configured Parental Control for an account you can save the settings as a file You can import the settings from this file for quick configuring in the future Additionally you can apply control settings of another account or use a configuration template preconfigured set of rules for various types of users depending on their age experience and other parameters After the import is completed you can always modify the settings that you have selected for an individual account WS To save the control settings into a file please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button 2 Inthe window that opens select the Users section select the account for which Parental Control settings should be saved and click the Configure button 3 In the window that will open click the
414. otentially infected files or Suspicious activity have been detected on your system You should decide on how dangerous you think this action is The notification window of this type is of the yellow color Info This notification gives information about non critical events The notification window of this type is of the green color The notification window consists of four parts 1 Window heading The notification window heading contains a brief description of the event for example request for rights Suspicious activity new network alert virus Event description The event description section displays detailed information about the reason for the notification to have appeared name of the application which caused the event name of the threat detected settings of the detected network connection etc Action selection area In this section you will be offered to select one of the actions available for this event Suggested options for the action depend on the event type for example Disinfect Delete Skip if a virus was detected Allow Block in case of the application s request to obtain rights for executing potentially harmful actions The action recommended by Kaspersky Lab s experts will be displayed in bold typeface If you select Allow or Block the window will open where you will be able to select the action application mode For the Allow action you can select one of the following modes e Allow always Select this op
415. ou might need to create such an exclusion list if for example the application blocks access to an object or program which you are sure is absolutely safe SEE ALSO Selecting detectable threat Categories rrtt rrtt EEEtEEENESSEEAEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEESEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEEnnn EEEE 166 Selecting trusted APM ee E 166 Se Ise dE 167 Allowed file exclusion MASKS ovdecccicods intiocncseveecwat vcsecesevetsveesdcndeancsaudueadecdinesceeiedeanddndvanectivesd nsbduenseebevennd eduasaeenseessoamdoneeee 168 PUIG WE threat e 169 SELECTING DETECTABLE THREAT CATEGORIES Computer Protection protects you against various types of malicious programs Regardless of the settings selected the application will always scan and disinfect viruses Trojans and hacker utilities These programs can do significant harm to your computer To provide more security to your computer you can enlarge the list of threats to be detected by enabling the control of various potentially dangerous programs SW To select the detectable threat categories please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open select the Threats and exclusions section Click the Settings button in the Threats section 4 Inthe Threats window that will open select the categories of threats you wish to protect your computer against SELECTING TRUSTE
416. ould always be protected by Computer Protection This list cannot be edited However you can renounce the monitoring of any resource category as well as add to the list 7o add to the list of identity data items to be protected please do the following 1 2 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Application Control component Click the Settings button for the component you have selected In the window that will open on the Personal data tab in the Category dropdown list select the required category of personal data objects and click the Add link or click the Add category link if you wish to add a new category of resources to be protected and enter its name in the window that will open In the User resource window that will open click the Browse button and specify required data depending on the resource being added e File or folder In the Select file or folder window that will open specify a file or a folder e Registry key In the Please specify a registry object window that will open specify the registry key being protected e Network service In the Network service window that will open specify the settings of monitored network connection see section Configuring network service settings on page 105 e IP addresses Spe
417. our computer and create shortcuts for the quick start of virus scan and vulnerability scan tasks In the settings window you can perform the following actions for a vulnerability scan task e create a schedule to run tasks automatically e create a list of objects to be scanned To edit task settings 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open select the required task in the Scan My Computer Full Scan Quick Scan Object Scan Vulnerability Scan section 4 Configure the settings in the right part of the window UPDATE The update of Computer Protection is performed according to the set of parameters You can perform the following actions from the update task configuration window e change the address of the resource from which application updates will be distributed and installed e specify the type of a mode according to which the application update process will be started e set the run schedule for a task e specify the account under which the update will be started e select actions which should be performed after application update SW To proceed to update configuration 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Select the My Update Center section in the l
418. ove provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine readable source code which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code 5 A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it is called a work that uses the Library Such a work in isolation is not a derivative work of the Library and therefore falls outside the scope of this License However linking a work that uses the Library with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library because it contains portions of the Library rather than a work that uses the library The executable is therefore covered by this License Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables When a work that uses the Library uses material from a header file that is part of the Library the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library or
419. p to 92 of threats This mechanism is fairly effective and very rarely leads to false positives Files detected by the heuristic analyzer are considered Suspicious KASPERSKY LAB Kaspersky Lab was founded in 1997 Today it is the leading Russian developer of a wide range of high performance information security software products including anti virus anti spam and anti hacking systems Kaspersky Lab is an international company Headquartered in the Russian Federation the company has offices in the United Kingdom France Germany Japan the Benelux countries China Poland Romania and the USA California A new company office the European Anti Virus Research Centre has recently been established in France Kaspersky Lab s partner network includes over 500 companies worldwide Today Kaspersky Lab employs over a thousand highly qualified specialists including 10 MBA degree holders and 16 PhD degree holders All the Kaspersky Lab s senior anti virus experts are members of the Computer Anti Virus Researchers Organization CARO Our company s most valuable assets are the unique knowledge and collective expertise accumulated during fourteen years of continuous battle against computer viruses Thorough analysis of computer virus activities enables the company s specialists to anticipate trends in the development of malware and to provide our users with timely protection against new types of attacks This advantage is the basis of Kasper
420. pen click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the IM Anti Virus component 4 Inthe Scan methods section check the Check if URLs are listed in the base of phishing web addresses box for the component selected USING HEURISTIC ANALYSIS Essentially the heuristic method analyzes the object s activities in the system For this purpose any script included in an IM client s message is executed in the protected environment If this script s activity is typical of malicious objects the object is likely to be classed as malicious or suspicious By default heuristic analysis is enabled Computer Protection will notify you when a malicious object is detected in a message Additionally you can set the detail level for scans Light Medium or Deep To do so move the slider bar to the selected position To enable disable the heuristic analysis and to set the detail level for the scan please do the following 1 Open the mainapplication window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the IM Anti Virus component 4 Inthe Scan methods section check uncheck the M Heuristic analysis box and set the scan detail level below for the component selected APPLICATION CONTROL Based on the system security factor
421. peration as well as in the course of a virus scan if e The code of the object being analyzed resembles a known threat but is partially modified Computer Protection databases contain information on the threats investigated to date by Kaspersky Lab s specialists If a malicious program is modified and these changes have not been entered into the databases yet Computer Protection classifies the object infected with the modified malicious program as a potentially infected object and indicates without fail what threat this infection resembles e The code of the object detected is reminiscent in structure of a malicious program however nothing similar is recorded in the application databases It is quite possible that this is a new type of threat so Computer Protection classifies that object as a potentially infected object Files are identified as potentially infected with a virus by the heuristic code analyzer This mechanism is fairly effective and very rarely leads to false positives As for Proactive Defense the component places an object to quarantine if as a result of behavior analysis the sequence of object s actions arouses suspicion When you place an object in Quarantine it is moved not copied the object is deleted from the disk or email and saved in the Quarantine folder Files in Quarantine are saved in a special format and are not dangerous It is possible that after database update Computer Protection will be able to
422. period 22 12 2009 22 12 2009 Statistics for Entire period e Users W Internet A G Configuring users control parameters Duration 00 00 00 Visited web sites 0 Downloaded files D Blocked web sites 0 Blocked files 0 Detected personal data O Key words detected 0 Blocked messages O Duration 0000 00 Blocked applications Help Clase Figure 7 Main window of My Parental Control NOTIFICATIONS If events occur during the operation of Kaspersky PURE special notifications will be displayed on the screen as pop up messages above the application icon in the Microsoft Windows taskbar Depending on how critical the event is for computer security you might receive the following types of notifications e Alarm A critical event has occurred for instance a virus or dangerous activity has been detected on your system You should immediately decide how to deal with this threat Notifications of this type are highlighted with red e Warning A potentially dangerous event has occurred For instance potentially infected files or suspicious activity have been detected on your system You should decide on the degree of danger of this event Notifications of this type are highlighted with yellow e Info This notification gives information about non critical events This type for example includes notifications related to the operation of the Content Filtering component Information notifications are highlighted in green
423. persky Lab s updates servers or from a mirror server hosting a current set of updates The updates retrieved are placed in a shared folder Other computers on the network access the shared folder to retrieve Computer Protection updates SW To enable updates distribution mode 1 2 3 4 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window Select the My Update Center section in the left part of the window Check the Copy updates to folder box in the Additional section and specify the path to a public folder into which all downloaded updates will be copied in the field below You can also select the path in the dialog displayed after clicking the Browse button If you wish updates to be performed from the selected public access folder perform these actions on all computers in the network 1 2 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window Select the My Update Center section in the left part of the window Click the Settings button in the Update source section In the window that will open on the Source tab click the Add link In the Select update source window that will open select a folder or enter the full path to it in the Source field Uncheck the Kaspersky Lab s update servers box on the Sourc
424. ples of permitted masks that you can use when create file exclusion lists They are as follows 1 Masks without file paths e exe all files with the exe extension e ex all files with the ex extension where can represent any single character e test all files with the name test 2 Masks with absolute file paths e C dir or C dir or C dir all files in the C ldir folder e C dir exe all files with the exe extension in the C dir folder e C dir ex all files with the ex extension in folder C dir where can represent any single character e C dir test only the C dir test file If you wish to exclude file scan in all nested folders of the specified folder check ie Include subfolders box when creating a mask 3 File path masks e dir or dir or din all files in all oul folders e dir test all fest files in dir folders e dir exe all files with the exe extension in all dir folders e dir ex all files with the ex extension in all dl folders where can represent any single character My COMPUTER PROTECTION If you wish to exclude file scan in all nested folders of the specified folder check the LJ Include subfolders box when creating a mask and exclusion masks can only be used if you specify the classification type of the threat according to the Virus Encyclopedia In this case the specified threat will not be detected in any object
425. pplication window and click the Settings link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe window that will open select the Self Defense section In the Self Defense section check the 4 Enable Self Defense box to activate the Kaspersky PURE s mechanism of protection of files on the disk memory processes and system registry records from being modified or deleted In the Self defense section check the M Disable external service control box to block any attempt to remotely manage the application s services If any of the actions listed are attempted a message will appear over the application icon in the taskbar notification area unless the notification service has been disabled by the user BATTERY SAVING To save power on a portable computer virus scan tasks may be postponed Since both scanning for viruses and updating often require significant resources and time you are advised to disable the scheduled startup of those tasks This will allow you to save the battery charge If necessary you can update Kaspersky PURE or start a virus scan on your own SW To use the battery saving service please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Settings link in the top part 2 Inthe window that will open select the Battery saving section and check he Disable scheduled scans while running on battery power box COMPATIBILITY In this window you can use the following advanced functions of Kaspersky PURE e Using adva
426. presence of processes folders and the registry keys of other malicious programs installed with the rootkit If the scan is enabled you can specify detailed level advanced analysis to detect rootkits which will scan carefully for these programs by analyzing a large number of various objects To specify which scan method to use 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe left part of the window select the required task in the Scan My Computer Full Scan Quick Scan Object Scan section 4 Inthe Run mode block click the Settings button for the task selected 5 In the window that will open on the Additional tab in the Scan methods block select the required values for the settings RUN MODE CREATING A SCHEDULE You can create a schedule to start virus scan tasks automatically The main thing to choose is the time interval between task startups To change the frequency specify the schedule settings for the selected option If it is not possible to start the task for any reason for example the computer was not on at that time you can configure the task to start automatically as soon as it becomes possible To edit a schedule for scan tasks 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of
427. puters There are three possible values of protection status each of them is indicated with a certain color similar to traffic lights Green indicates that your network s protection is at the proper level while yellow and red colors indicate that there are various security threats In addition to malicious programs threats include obsolete application databases disabled protection components the selection of minimum protection settings etc Security threats must be eliminated as they appear SW To obtain detailed information about problems in the network protection and eliminate them please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Control Center link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe window that will open click the status icon or the icon of the panel on which it is located see fig above In the Network protection state window that will open current problems are displayed Also you can view the list of problems on an individual networked computer and eliminate some of them remotely To obtain the list of problems on an individual networked computer please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Control Center link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe window that will open select the computer for which you want to view the list of problems and go to the Information section 3 Inthe right part of the window that will open select the Problems list item In the Protec
428. r Full Scan Quick Scan Object Scan section 4 Inthe Security level section set the required security level for the task selected CHANGING ACTIONS TO BE PERFORMED ON DETECTED OBJECTS If a threat is detected Computer Protection assigns it one of the following statuses e malicious program such as a virus or a Trojan e potentially infected status when the scan cannot determine if the object is infected This is caused when the application detects a sequence of code in the file from an unknown virus or modified code from a known virus H Computer Protection detects infected or potentially infected objects when scanning for viruses it will notify you about it You should react to an emerging threat by selecting an action to be performed on the object Computer Protection selects the Prompt for action option as the action on a detected object which is the default setting You can change the action For example if you are sure that each detected object should be attempted to disinfect and do not want to select the Disinfect action each time you receive a notice about the detection of an infected or suspicious object select the following action Do not prompt Disinfect Before attempting to disinfect or delete an infected object Computer Protection creates a backup copy of it to allow later restoration or disinfection If you work in automatic mode see section Step 3 Selecting protection mode on page 41 Computer Protection will
429. r any single character Using these wildcards you can represent any file Note that the name and extension are always separated by a period UNKNOWN VIRUS A new virus about which there is no information in the databases Generally unknown viruses are detected by the application in objects using the heuristic analyzer and those objects are classified as potentially infected INCOMPATIBLE APPLICATION An anti virus application from a third party vendor or a Kaspersky Lab application that does not support management via Computer Protection OBSCENE MESSAGE Email message containing offensive language UPDATE The procedure of replacing adding new files databases or application modules retrieved from the Kaspersky Lab update servers DATABASE UPDATES One of the functions performed by a Kaspersky Lab application that enables it to keep protection current In doing so the databases are downloaded from the Kaspersky Lab update servers onto the computer and are automatically connected to the application STARTUP OBJECTS The set of programs needed to start and correctly operate the operating system and software installed on your computer These objects are executed every time the operating system is started There are viruses capable of infecting such objects specifically which could lead to for example blocking your access to the operating system DANGEROUS OBJECT Object containing a virus You are advised not to access the
430. r from this Agreement are offered by that Contributor alone and not by any other party and iv states that source code for the Program is available from such Contributor and informs licensees how to obtain it in a reasonable manner on or through a medium customarily used for software exchange When the Program is made available in source code form a it must be made available under this Agreement and b a copy of this Agreement must be included with each copy of the Program Contributors may not remove or alter any copyright notices contained within the Program Each Contributor must identify itself as the originator of its Contribution if any in a manner that reasonably allows subsequent Recipients to identify the originator of the Contribution COMMERCIAL DISTRIBUTION Commercial distributors of software may accept certain responsibilities with respect to end users business partners and the like While this license is intended to facilitate the commercial use of the Program the Contributor who includes the Program in a commercial product offering should do so in a manner which does not create potential liability for other Contributors Therefore if a Contributor includes the Program ina commercial product offering such Contributor Commercial Contributor hereby agrees to defend and indemnify every other Contributor Indemnified Contributor against any losses damages and costs collectively Losses arising from claims lawsuits
431. r the given application window For example one application can use multiple accounts For different accounts only the window headings will differ within one application Password Manager will automatically enter data for the account based on the application window s heading The following options for using an account are available for web pages Only for the given web page Password Manager automatically adds the user name and password to the identification fields on the given web page only For example if the account is related to a web page with the address hitp Awww web site com login himl it will not be valid for other websites e g http www web site com pointer php For websites from a directory Password Manager automatically adds the user name and password to identification fields for all web pages in the most recent folder For example if the website address http www web site com cgi bin login html was entered the account will be used for web pages in the cgi bin folder For the website lt third level domain name and lower gt This account is used for any web page in the domain third level domain and lower For example Password Manager automatically adds identity data for websites http www domain1 domain2 web site com login html or http Wwww domain1 domain2 web site com pointer php However the account will not be used for web pages with addresses that have different fourth level domains http www domain3 d
432. rator can take the following actions via Control Center e analysis of protection level of networked computers e scan of the whole network or individual computers for threats e centralized update of anti virus databases e modification of the protection settings for networked computers e Parental Control e data backup on networked computers e viewing of reports on security subsystems operation SW To launch My Control Center please do the following In the top part of the Kaspersky PURE main window click the My Control Center link At the first startup the Remote Control Configuration Wizard starts automatically See section Configuring remote management on page 241 At further startups you will need to enter the password For remote management via local network the Control Center password should be identical on all computers IN THIS SECTION Configuring remote management 241 Analyzing network SOCUNIVY sxccncacsusecevesnasadecavieonexeeianenadasseaduiseceedseateosusinedaewecdelesandsivawenedadailscbunestbuencdebasndveumaundasabecsennebeouecdetes 242 Managing protection components EN 243 E ee Mole fl E 243 Managing Parental Control 243 Remote scanning for viruses ANd vulnerabilities 2 0 0 cece cece ceeeceeecaeeeceecseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseaeeeeessaaeeeeessegeeeeesaees 244 Updating databases and application modules snsnssnessennneenesetrtttttnstttttttttesttttttttnttr ttt ttnnEEEEEEEEEAEEE EErEE E EEEE EE
433. rce from the protection scope uncheck the box Ginet to it APPLICATION CONTROL RULES Rule is a set of reactions of Application Control to the application s actions on the resources being monitored see section Creating a protection scope on page 89 My COMPUTER PROTECTION Possible component s reactions include the following e Inherit For an application s activity Application Control will apply the rule set for the group the application belongs to This is the default setting for the reaction e Allow Application Control allows an application to perform an action e Deny Application Control does not allow an application to perform an action e Prompt for action Application Control informs the user that an application is attempting to perform an action and prompts the user for further actions e Log events Information about an application s activity and Application Control s reaction will be logged in a report Adding the information to a report can be used together with any other component s action By default an application inherits the access rights from the group it belongs to You can edit an application rule In this case the application rule s settings will have a higher priority than those inherited from the group the application belongs to SEE ALSO Placing applications IMO GrOUDS geeemeer are ere er nnn reset nett ne i eevee en er eee eee ren er ree eee eer 91 Changing the time used to determine the appli
434. rding the Virus Encyclopedia classification Each task can be assigned a set of exclusions QUARANTINE A certain folder into which all possibly infected objects are placed which were detected during scans or by real time protection MONITORED OBJECT A file transferred via HTTP FTP or SMTP protocols across the firewall and sent to a Kaspersky Lab application to be scanned OBJECT DISINFECTION The method used for processing infected objects that results in complete or partial recovery of data or the decision that the objects cannot be disinfected Disinfection of objects is performed using the database records Part of the data may be lost during disinfection DISINFECTING OBJECTS ON RESTART A method of processing infected objects that are being used by other applications at the moment of disinfection Consists of creating a copy of the infected object disinfecting the copy created and replacing the original infected object with the disinfected copy after the next system restart FALSE ALARM Situation when Kaspersky Lab s application considers a non infected object as infected due to its code similar to that of a virus SUBNET MASK Subnet mask also known as netmask and network address determine the addresses of computers on a network FILE MASK Representation of a file name and extension using wildcards The two standard wildcards used in file masks are and where represents any number of characters and stands fo
435. re may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit htip www openssl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with
436. reats and their sources to improve user data protection and the functionality of the products developed by Kaspersky Lab the user can collect information in accordance with the list below after the feature is enabled by the user in the Feedback section of the settings window of each respective product List of basic information items e Information about computer hardware and software including operating system version and installed service packs kernel objects drivers services Microsoft Internet Explorer add ons printing system extensions Windows Explorer plug ins loaded objects Active Setup items control panel applets records from the hosts file and system registry IP addresses versions of browsers and email clients and the version of Kaspersky Lab product e Unique identifier assigned by the product of Kaspersky Lab to the user s computer e Information about the status of anti virus protection on the computer and about all potentially harmful files and operations including virus name date and time of its detection names and sizes of infected files and their paths IP address of an attacking computer and the number of the port attacked via network name of a potentially malicious application e Information about signed applications downloaded by the user URL file size signature e Information about launched applications size attributes creation date PE header information region name location packer Additionall
437. red during the operation of each of Computer Protection s components or during the execution of tasks for example File Anti Virus update etc SW n order to create a report on a certain component or a task 1 Open the main application window and click the Report link in the top part 2 Inthe window that will open on the Report tab click the Detailed report button 3 In the window that will open select a component or a task for which a report should be created in the dropdown list on the left Once you select the My Protection item report will be created for all protection components MANAGING GROUPING OF INFORMATION IN THE REPORT You can manage how information is grouped in the report using one of several attributes The set of attributes differs for each application component and task The following options exist e Donot group All events will be displayed e Group by task Data will be grouped by tasks performed by Computer Protection s components e Group by application Data will be grouped by applications displaying any activity in the system and processed by the My Computer Protection module e Group by result Data will be grouped based on the results of scan or object processing Do not group Ca Important events W Do not group Group by task Group by application Date Today events 7 My Protection v Time Result Figure 16 Attributes of grouping of info
438. red rule can be changed to Allow or Deny to do that you should check the Always apply for this application box The wizard consists of several dialogs Steps navigated using the Back button and the Next link it completes its work after clicking the Finish link To stop the wizard at any stage use the Cancel button My COMPUTER PROTECTION SELECTING ACTIONS TO BE PERFORMED BY THE RULE When a rule is applied the Firewall performs with a packet or data stream one of the following operations e gt Allow e Block e Process according to application rules In this case processing of such data packet or stream by the packet rule will be stopped Application rules are applied to connections If you wish to log information about a connection attempt and the Firewall actions enable the Log events mode SW norder to change an action performed by Firewall 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Firewall component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 In the window that will open on the Filtering rules tab click the Add link 6 Inthe Network rule window that will open in the Action block select an action CONFIGURING NETWORK SERVICE SETTINGS Settings characterizing the activity of the networ
439. report window However you cannot postpone processing objects detected in emails To apply the selected action to all objects of the same status detected in the current session of protection component or a task operation check the H Apply to all box The current session is the time from when the component is started until it is disabled or the application is restarted or the time from beginning a virus scan until it is complete If you are sure that the object detected it is not malicious we recommend adding it to the trusted zone to avoid the program making repeat false positives when you use the object DANGEROUS ACTIVITY DETECTED IN THE SYSTEM When Proactive Defense detects dangerous application activity on your system a special notification pops up containing e The name of the threat as it is listed in the Kaspersky Lab Virus Encyclopedia The name of the threat is given as a link to www viruslist com where you can find detailed information on the type of threat detected e Full name of the file of the process that initiated the dangerous activity and a path to it e Possible responses e Quarantine shuts down the process and places the executable file to the quarantine When you place an object in Quarantine it is moved not copied Files in Quarantine are saved in a special format and are not dangerous When you scan Quarantine later with updated threat signatures the status of the object could change For example
440. restore passwords in the following cases e ifthe most recent changes need to be cancelled e ifthe Password Database was overwritten or deleted e if the current Password Database is inaccessible damaged after a hardware or system failure All data in the backup copy is stored in encrypted form Password Manager registers all changes to the Password Database In the application backup copies are displayed in a list and sorted according to date beginning with the most recent For each backup copy the following data is provided e location e date and time of creation e changes made relative to the previous version You can use backup copies to solve the following tasks e restore a Password Database from a backup copy e delete copies of a backup storage My PASSWORD MANAGER e change the location of backup copies see page 231 SR To restore the Password Database please do the following 1 In the context menu of the application select Password Manager 2 Inthe Password Manager window that will open on the Backup tab click the Restore button 3 Inthe Restore window that will open select a backup copy from the list and click the Restore button 4 Inthe window confirm the restoration by clicking OK To remove unnecessary backup copies please do the following 1 In the context menu of the application select Password Manager 2 Inthe Password Manager window that will open on the Backup tab click the Restore button
441. rmance rate which is critical when using server applications By default Computer Protection scans objects being opened run or saved by any program process and monitors the activity of all applications and the network traffic they create SW To add an application to the trusted list please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open select the Threats and exclusions section 4 Inthe Exclusions section click the Settings button 5 In the window that will open on the Trusted applications tab click the Add link 6 Inthe menu that will open select an application Once you select the Browse item a window will open in which you should specify the path to an executable file Once you select the Applications item the list of applications currently running will open 7 Inthe Exclusions for applications window that will open specify the rule settings for the application Note that if hei Do not scan network traffic box is checked the traffic of the application specified will not be scanned for viruses and spam only However this does not affect the traffic scan by the Firewall component Firewall settings govern the analysis of network activity for that application You can change or delete the trusted application from the list using the corresponding links in the bot
442. rmation in the report To quickly obtain particular information and to decrease the grouping size a keyword search see section Events search on page 180 criteria is provided You can also specify a search criteria SW n order to use grouping based on a certain attribute 1 Open the main application window and click the Report link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe window that will open on the Report tab click the Detailed report button 3 Select the grouping attribute from the drop down menu in the window that will open REPORT READINESS NOTIFICATION You can create a schedule according to which Computer Protection will remind you about report readiness Jon order to create a notification schedule 1 Open themain application window and click the Report link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe window that will open on the Report tab check the X Notify about the report box Click the link with the preset time value 3 Create the schedule on the Report schedule window that will open SELECTING EVENT TYPES Complete list of all important events occurring in the protection component activity scan task execution or application database update is logged in a report You can select which type of events will be recorded in the report Events can be attributed to the following types My COMPUTER PROTECTION e Critical events Events of critical importance which indicate problems in Computer Protection s operat
443. rogram address of the web page The address of the web page must begin with http www SW To enter the path to the program web page using the Password Manager pointer please do the following 1 In the context menu of the application select Password Manager 2 Inthe Password Manager window that will open click Add account 3 Inthe displayed window under the Links tab in the field Link enter the path to the program web page by moving the Password Manager pointer to the program browser window SELECTING A METHOD TO STICK THE ACCOUNT To determine which account data should be entered automatically at each startup of the application web page Password Manager uses the path to the application Internet address of web page Because Password Manager allows using several accounts for a single application website you should specify a scope for each account Based on the path to the application Internet address of web page Password Manager allows creating a scope for any account Scope may be configured at the account creation see page 215 You can alter the settings in the future Depending on the object application or website the way accounts are used varies The following options are available for the application Use the account for the application The account will be used for all application s dialogs which have fields for entering personal data Recognize by window heading The account will only be used fo
444. rom unauthorized access Therefore it is recommended to consider ways of protecting exported files in advance When imported the Password Database is modified You can choose one of the following actions to be performed on the Password Database e Overwrite The current Password Database will be replaced with the imported one all passwords stored in Password Manager s Password Database before import will be deleted e Merge The Password Database will be supplemented with passwords imported from unprotected password databases When merging you are given the option of importing accounts into Password Manager e Cancel The operation to import passwords will be cancelled SW To replace the current Password Database with a Password Database imported from another application please do the following 1 In the context menu of the application select Password Manager 2 Inthe Password Manager window that will open on the Backup tab click the Import button 3 Inthe Import passwords window select the application from which passwords should be imported and then click Load passwords 4 Inthe Password Manager File window select the file with passwords that you want to import and click Open To cancel the selection click Cancel 5 In the window that will open click the Overwrite button SW To merge the current Password Database with a Password Database imported from another application please do the following 1 Inthe con
445. rt of the list Click the Restore button in the top part of the window In the Restore window that will open select the location to save restored files and the condition of saving if files names coincide Click the Restore button To select the required file version please do the following 1 2 Open the main application window and click the Backup button In the window that will open select the Restore section Select the storage where the required backup copies are located and click the Restore data button In the left part of the Restore data from storage window select an archive In the right part of the window select the file whose version you want to specify To do so check the H box next to the file you need Click the Versions button in the top part of the window In the File versions window that will open select the date of the version you need to restore and click the Restore link In the Restore window that will open select the location to save restored files and the condition of saving if files names coincide Click the Restore button VIEWING EVENT REPORT Each event related to data backup and restore is displayed in the report SW To geta backup module report please do the following 1 2 3 Open the main application window and click the Backup button In the window that will open click the Report button in the top part of the window In the Report window that will open specify the e
446. rt of the window select a backup task and click the Run button You can pause or stop the task execution by using the corresponding buttons in the top part of the window SW To obtain a report on the execution of backup tasks and data restoration tasks please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Control Center link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe window that will open select a computer in the top part of the window and go to the Backup section 3 Click the View report button in the top part of the window 4 Inthe Report window that will open specify the event display settings CONFIGURING KASPERSKY PURE SETTINGS The application settings window is used for quick access to the main Kaspersky PURE seitings Fa Settings Kaspersky PURE a E Ex Kaspersky PURE Configure general settings Fu Launch Kaspersky PURE at computer startup Self Defense D Power Saving Password protection Ej Compatibility Enable password protection et gien Proxy Server Old password Notifications E SS New password LLLI E Reports ra back Confirm password EEN Feedback B Appearance Password scope ge 2 Application settings configuration i Manage Settings F My Backup management My Parental Control management My Control Center management Exiting the application Help Restore OK Cancel Apply Figure 23 Configuring Kaspersky Anti Viru
447. s The application settings window consists of two parts e the left part of the window provides access to Kaspersky PURE settings virus scan tasks update tasks etc e the right part of the window contains a list of parameters for the setting task etc selected in the left part of the window You can open this window e From the main application window see page 51 To do so click the Settings link in the top part of the main window CONFIGURING KASPERSKY PURE SETTINGS e From the context menu see page 50 To do so select the Settings item from the application context menu Update Full Scan Virus Scan My Virtual Keyboard Kaspersky PURE Settings About Pause protection Pause My Parental Control Block network traffic Exit Figure 24 Context menu IN THIS SECTION EE ne 247 Sela Bo EN E 248 SEET e E 249 ON ie nn EE 249 tt 250 Klakitle Vleit 250 PODON apc ccrgacte sce E ye ae sete tne pane vases epee certo fete ee dcr crac estar aclu E optap pate ota eign scien tein eee aera 292 POCO AG K ea E E E E acess 252 le leger Klee le 253 En e d e e EE 254 Application settings management 254 GENERAL SETTINGS In this window you can use the following advanced functions of Kaspersky PURE e Running Kaspersky PURE at system startup See page 248 e Restricting access to Kaspersky PURE see page 248 RUNNING KASPERSKY PURE AT WINDOWS STARTUP If you have to completely shut down Ka
448. s flash cards or USB cards cannot guarantee total data deletion either It is considered that data can only be deleted after multiple re recording However even in this case information may be restored using high performance software tools Kaspersky PURE includes the Permanent Data Deletion Wizard This wizard allows deleting confidential data without any opportunity of restoring and using them by hackers Permanent data deletion precludes from restoring information using common software tools The wizard is applicable both to small sized objects and to large sized ones up to several gigabytes Depending on the current conditions the wizard supports deletion of data from the following data storage media e local disk drives deletion is possible if the user has the rights required for recording and deleting information e any removable drives or other devices that can be detected as removable drives such as floppy disks flash cards USB cards or cell phones Data can be deleted from a flash card if the mechanic protection from rewriting Lock mode is disabled Before starting the permanent deletion the application finds out if data can be deleted from the selected data storage medium The deletion procedure can only be carried out if the selected data storage medium supports data deletion Otherwise the data cannot be deleted permanently Such objects as a file or a folder can be deleted To avoid unintentional deletion of useful da
449. s already installed on the computer are selected as scan objects SEE ALSO Starting the vulnerability SCAN task ccccccceeeeeeeccceeeceeeseeceeeeceeeeseceeeeeeseeseseeeeeeessaeeseeeeeeesseeeseeeeeeeessaeaseeeeeeesssaeeeeeeseneeas 145 Creating a shortcut for task execution sscceeeceeeeeeeeceeeauaaessssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaauaussseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaaaaaaagaaeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaaas 145 Creating a list of objects 10 E 145 Run mode creating a schedule A 146 Run mode specifying an aCCouUnt casanesaviineetcsoiasoucncnautisiesinantierincdantremodesmutncius rte cienmbeseciiaubdsnedesinavduandriandaindea vdiasedanodaamernomending 146 My COMPUTER PROTECTION STARTING THE VULNERABILITY SCAN TASK The vulnerability scan task can be started in the following ways e from the Computer Protection main window see section My Computer Protection on page 53 e using an existing shortcut see page 145 Task execution information will be displayed in the main window of My Computer Protection and in the Vulnerability Scan window To start the task using a shortcut 1 Open the folder in which a shortcut was created 2 Start the task by double clicking a shortcut The task progress will be displayed in the main application window SW To start the vulnerability scan task from the application window 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe left part of the window select the Scan My Computer section 3 Click the
450. s button e Manual updates If you select this option you will run application updates on your own Note that the databases and application modules included with the installation package may be outdated by the time you install Kaspersky PURE You are advised to obtain the latest updates To do so click the Update now button In this case the application will download the necessary updates from update servers and install them on your computer If the databases included with the installation package are obsolete the update package may be large sized so that it may cause the additional Internet traffic up to several tens of Mb If you want to switch to editing the update settings select the resource from which the updates will be downloaded or the user account used to run the update process etc click the Settings button STEP 5 SELECTING THREATS TO BE DETECTED This step of the Application Configuration Wizard will be skipped if you have selected the quick install mode The application settings edited at this step will be assigned the default values At this step you can select the threat categories to be detected by the Computer Protection module Computer Protection always detects programs that are capable of damaging your computer including viruses worms and Trojans STEP 6 ANALYZING THE APPLICATIONS INSTALLED ON THE COMPUTER At this stage information about Microsoft Windows applications is collected These applications
451. s distributed in accordance with this Agreement Recipient means anyone who receives the Program under this Agreement including all Contributors GRANT OF RIGHTS a Subject to the terms of this Agreement each Contributor hereby grants Recipient a non exclusive worldwide royalty free copyright license to reproduce prepare derivative works of publicly display publicly perform distribute and sublicense the Contribution of such Contributor if any and such derivative works in source code and object code form b Subject to the terms of this Agreement each Contributor hereby grants Recipient a non exclusive worldwide royalty free patent license under Licensed Patents to make use sell offer to sell import and otherwise transfer the Contribution of such Contributor if any in source code and object code form This patent license shall apply to the combination of the Contribution and the Program if at the time the Contribution is added by the Contributor such addition of the Contribution causes such combination to be covered by the Licensed Patents The patent license shall not apply to any other combinations which include the Contribution No hardware per se is licensed hereunder c Recipient understands that although each Contributor grants the licenses to its Contributions set forth herein no assurances are provided by any Contributor that the Program does not infringe the patent or other intellectual property rights of any other entit
452. s from whom in your opinion no spam is received The list of addresses is filled automatically during Anti Spam training You can edit this list The list can contain either addresses or address masks When entering a mask you can use the standard and wildcards where represents any combination of characters and stands for any single character Examples of address masks e ivanov test ru Messages from this address will always be classified as good mail e test ru Mail from any sender from the test ru mail domain will always be considered good mail for example petrov test ru sidorov test ru My COMPUTER PROTECTION e ivanov The sender with this name regardless of the mail domain always sends only good mail for example ivanov test ru ivanov mail ru e test Mail from any sender from a mail domain starting with test are considered not spam for example ivanov test ru petrov test com e ivan test Mail from a sender whose name starts with ivan and from mail domain beginning with test and ending in any three characters is always useful for example ivan ivanov test com ivan petrov test org To create the list of allowed senders 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Anti Spam component 4 Click the Se
453. s software without specific prior written permission THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE Copyright c 2004 Alberto Demichelis This software is provided as is without any express or implied warranty In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose including commercial applications and to alter it and redistribute it freely subject to the following restrictions 1 The origin of this software must not be misrepresented you must not claim that you wrote the original software If you use this software in a product an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required 2 Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such and mus
454. s steps that you have completed by using the browsing buttons in the top part of the window SW To remove a backup storage please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the click the Backup button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Storages section 3 Select the storage you wish to delete and click the Delete button 4 Backup Storage Removal Wizard will be launched Let us take a closer look at the wizard s steps a Select an action to perform on the backup copies that are located within the storage to be removed in the Content window b Select an action to perform with the tasks that use the storage for backup copy in the Tasks window c Confirm the removal of the storage with selected settings in the Summary window CREATING A BACKUP TASK Backup tasks are used for creating backup copies of files A backup task may be created using the wizard When creating a backup task the following settings should be defined e aset of files for which backup copies will be created e astorage in which they will be created e conditions of backup process startup Backup Task Creation Wizard may be launched using one of the two following modes e from the main module window e from the Microsoft Windows context menu This wizard consists of a series of screens steps navigated using the Back and the Next buttons to close the wizard once it has completed its work use the Finish button To stop the wizard at an
455. s the library The former contains code derived from the library whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0 This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License also called this License Each licensee is addressed as you A library means a collection of software functions and or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs which use some of those functions and data to form executables The Library below refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms A work based on the Library means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law that is to say a work containing the Library or a portion of it either verbatim or with modifications and or translated straightforwardly into another language Hereinafter translation is included without limitation in the term modification Source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it For a library complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains plus any associated interface definition files plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library
456. s will help you resolve simultaneous operation of Computer Protection with the software on your computer SW To configure pausing the component while specified applications are being used perform the following actions 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the File Anti Virus component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 Inthe window that will open on the Additional tab in the Pause task block check the M At application startup box and click the Select button 6 Inthe Applications window create a list of applications which will pause the component when running RESTORING DEFAULT PROTECTION SETTINGS When configuring File Anti Virus you are always able to restore its recommended settings They are considered optimal recommended by Kaspersky Lab and grouped in the Recommended security level To restore default protection settings please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the File Anti Virus component 4 Inthe Security level section click the Default level button for the component se
457. sages that should not be scanned by Kaspersky Lab application LICENSE VALIDITY PERIOD Period of time during which you are able to use all of the features of your Kaspersky Lab s application License validity period generally accounts for one calendar year from the date of its installation After the license expires the application will have reduced functionality You will not be able to update the application databases URGENT UPDATES Critical updates to Kaspersky Lab application modules PROTECTION STATUS The current status of protection summarizing the degree of security of the computer VIRUS OUTBREAK COUNTER Template based on which a notification of virus outbreak threat is generated Virus outbreak counter includes a combination of settings which determine the virus activity threshold the way of spreading and the text in messages to send ICHECKER TECHNOLOGY iChecker is a technology that increases the speed of anti virus scans by excluding objects that have remain unchanged since their last scan provided that the scan parameters the anti virus database and settings have not changed The information for each file is stored in a special database This technology is used in both real time protection and on demand scan modes For example you have an archive scanned by Kaspersky Lab application and assigned the not infected status The next time the application will skip this archive unless it has been altered or the scan set
458. se objects because it may result in an infection of your computer Once an infected object is detected we recommend that you disinfect it using one of Kaspersky Lab s applications or delete it if disinfection is not possible UPDATE PACKAGE File package for updating the software It is downloaded from the Internet and installed on your computer TASK SETTINGS Application settings which are specific for each task type APPLICATION SETTINGS Application settings which are common for all task types regulating the application s operation as a whole such as application performance settings report maintenance settings backup storage settings INTERCEPTOR Subcomponent of the application responsible for scanning specific types of email The set of interceptors specific to your installation depends on what role or what combination of roles the application is being deployed for SUSPICIOUS MESSAGE Message that cannot be unambiguously considered spam but it seems suspicious when scanned e g certain types of mailings and advertising messages SUSPICIOUS OBJECT An object that contains modified code of a known virus or code that resembles code of a virus but is not yet known to Kaspersky Lab Suspicious objects are detected using the heuristic analyzer MOVING OBJECTS TO QUARANTINE A method of processing a potentially infected object by blocking access to the file and moving it from its original location to the Quarantine folder
459. select Frequently used accounts In the right part of the window check the box X Show the list in the system tray menu To display the list of frequently used accounts in the Caption Button menu additionally select the J Display in the Caption Button menu checkbox If the 1 Show the list in the system tray menu checkbox is not enabled the remaining options in the list cannot be modified Specify the number of accounts in the List size field If necessary modify the items in the list manually To remove an item from the list select the required account in it and click Delete To delete all items from the list click Clear LIST OF IGNORED WEB ADDRESSES Password Manager usually offers to add a new account at the first authorization at a website In this case the personal data will be automatically re entered at each next visit of this website To enter your personal data on your own at each next authorization you can configure a list of web addresses that will not be covered by Password Manager functions Automatic input of user name and password is disabled for websites on this list Besides Password Manager will automatically abstain from offering you to create a new account see page 215 user name see page 219 To create a list of ignored web addresses please do the following 1 2 Open the main application window In the Security section click Password Manager In the left part of the Settings window select t
460. senger e GoogleTalk e mIRC e Mail Ru Agent e Psi e Miranda Some IM clients use encrypted connection To control messaging via such programs you will need to enable the scan of encrypted connections see page 170 SW To restrict instant messaging contacts do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Users section select a user account for which a restriction should be created and click the Configure button 3 In the window that will open in the Messaging section select the IM messaging component 4 Inthe Control instant messaging window that will open check the M Enable box 5 On the Allowed and Blocked tabs create lists of allowed and blocked contacts 6 Inthe Action dropdown list select the default action for contacts not included in your lists You can also allow or block communication with the contact you have selected from the detailed report on events for that account My PARENTAL CONTROL To view brief statistics please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Reports section and in the dropdown menu select the user account for which you want to see the report In the Messaging section brief instant messaging statistics for the selected user account will be displayed To obtain a detailed report please do the
461. sh several types of virus scan tasks e Objects Scan Objects selected by the user are scanned Any object of the computer s file system can be scanned Within this task you can configure the settings for scanning removable drives e Full Scan A thorough scan of the entire system The following objects are scanned by default system memory programs loaded on startup system backup email databases hard drives removable storage media and network drives e Quick Scan Operating system startup objects are scanned The Full Scan and Quick Scan tasks are specific tasks It is not recommended to change the list of objects scanned by these tasks Each scan task is performed in the specified area and can be launched according to the schedule created A set of virus scan task parameters define the security level By default three levels are provided After the virus scan task starts its progress is displayed in the Scan My Computer section of the Computer Protection main window in the field under the name of the started task If a threat is detected the application performs the specified action When searching for threats information on the results is logged in a report of Computer Protection My COMPUTER PROTECTION In addition you can select an object to be scanned for viruses with the standard tools of the Microsoft Windows operating system for example in the Explorer program window or on your Desktop etc Place the cursor on t
462. should be saved To import the application s settings from a saved configuration file 1 Open the main application window and click the Settings link in the top part 2 Inthe window that will open select the Application settings management section and click the Load button 3 Inthe window that will open select the file from which you want to import the Kaspersky PURE settings RESTORING DEFAULT SETTINGS You can always return to the default or recommended Kaspersky PURE settings They are considered optimum and are recommended by Kaspersky Lab Application Configuration Wizard restores default settings In the window that will open you will be asked to determine which settings and for which components should or should not be saved when restoring the recommended security level The list shows which components of Kaspersky PURE have settings that differ from the default values either because they have been modified by the user or through accumulated training by Kaspersky PURE Firewall or Anti Spam If special settings have been created for any of the components they will also be shown on the list Examples of special settings would be white and black lists of phrases and addresses used by Anti Spam lists of trusted addresses and trusted ISP telephone numbers exclusion rules created for application components and Firewall s packet and application filtering rules These lists are created when working with Kaspersky PURE with regar
463. sing rules through Microsoft Office Outlook manually SW To create a spam processing rule 1 Run Microsoft Office Outlook and use the Tools Rules and Alerts command in the main application menu The method used to access the wizard depends upon your version of Microsoft Office Outlook This Help file describes how to create a rule using Microsoft Office Outlook 2003 2 Inthe Rules and Alerts window that will open on the Email Rules tab click the New Rule button As a result the Rules Wizard will be launched Rules Wizard includes the following steps a You should decide whether you want to create a rule from scratch or using a template Select the Start from a blank rule option and select the Check messages when they arrive scan condition Click the Next button b Click the Next button in the message filtering condition configuration window without checking any boxes Confirm in the dialog box that you want to apply this rule to all emails received c Inthe window for selecting actions to apply to messages check the M perform a custom action box in the action list In the lower part of the window click the a custom action link Select Kaspersky Anti Spam from the drop down list in the window that will open and click the OK button d Click the Next button in the exclusions from the rules window without checking any boxes e Inthe final window you can change the rule s name the default name is Kaspersky Anti Spam Make sure
464. site http www kaspersky com kaspersky pure http www kaspersky com kaspersky pure This page will provide you with general information on the application its features and options Application page at the Technical Support Service website Knowledge Base http support kaspersky com pure http support kaspersky com pure On this page you will find the articles created by Technical Support Service specialists These articles contain useful information recommendations and FAQ on purchasing installation and use of the application They are sorted by subject The articles may provide answers to the questions that concern not only this application but the other Kaspersky Lab products as well they may also contain the news from Technical Support service FastTrack Support service On this service page you can find the base of FAQs with answers which is updated on a regular basis To use this service you will need an Internet connection To go to the service page in the main application window click the Support link and in the window that will open click the FastTrack Support button OBTAINING INFORMATION ABOUT THE APPLICATION Help system The application installation package includes the full and context help file that contains the information about how to manage the computer protection view protection status scan various computer areas for viruses execute other tasks and the information on each application window such as the li
465. sky Lab s products and services The company s products remain one step ahead of other vendors in delivering comprehensive anti virus coverage to our clients Years of hard work have made the company one of the top anti virus software developers Kaspersky Lab was the first to develop many of the modern standards for anti virus software The company s flagship product Kaspersky Anti Virus reliably protects all types of computer systems against virus attacks including workstations file servers mail systems firewalls Internet gateways and hand held computers Its easy to use management tools maximize the automation of anti virus protection for computers and corporate networks A large number of developers worldwide use the Kaspersky Anti Virus kernel in their products including Nokia ICG USA Aladdin Israel Sybari USA G Data Germany Deerfield USA AN USA Microworld India and BorderWare Canada Kaspersky Lab s customers enjoy a wide range of additional services that ensure both stable operation of the company s products and full compliance with the customer s specific business requirements We design implement and support corporate anti virus systems Kaspersky Lab s anti virus database is updated every hour The company provides its customers with 24 hour technical support service in several languages If you have any questions comments or suggestions you can contact us through our dealers or at Kaspersky Lab directly We
466. spersky Lab s update servers on a regular basis BLOCKING THE OBJECT Denying access to an object from external applications A blocked object cannot be read executed changed or deleted VIRUS OUTBREAK A series of deliberate attempts to infect a computer with a virus POTENTIALLY INFECTED OBJECT An object that contains modified code of a known virus or code that resembles code of a virus but is not yet known to Kaspersky Lab Potentially infected files are detected using heuristic analyzer RESTORATION Moving an original object from Quarantine or Backup to the folder where it was originally found before being moved to Quarantine disinfected or deleted or to a different folder specified by the user DUAL HOMED GATEWAY Computer equipped with two network adapters each of which is connected to different networks transferring data from one network to the other TRUSTED PROCESS Application process whose file operations are not monitored by Kaspersky Lab s application in real time protection mode In other words no objects run open or saved by the trusted process will be scanned ADDITIONAL LICENSE A license that has been added for the operation of Kaspersky Lab application but has not been activated The additional license enters into effect when the active license expires AVAILABLE UPDATES A set of updates for Kaspersky Lab application modules including critical updates accumulated over a period of time and changes to the appli
467. spersky PURE for any reason select the Exit item from the Kaspersky PURE context menu As a result the application will unload from RAM This means that your computer will be running unprotected You can re enable the computer s protection by loading Kaspersky PURE from the Start Programs Kaspersky PURE Kaspersky PURE menu Protection can also be resumed automatically after restarting your operating system To enable this mode 1 Open the main application window and click the Settings link in the top part 2 Inthe window that opens select the General section and check thel Launch Kaspersky PURE at computer startup box RESTRICTING ACCESS TO KASPERSKY PURE A personal computer may be used by several users including those with different level of computer literacy Leaving open access to Kaspersky PURE and its settings may dramatically lower the computer s security level as a whole To increase the security level of your computer use a password to access Kaspersky PURE You can block any Kaspersky PURE s operations except for notifications of dangerous objects detection or prevent the following actions from being performed e changing application settings e backup management e parental control management e remote management of network security e closing the application SW To protect access to Kaspersky PURE with a password please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Settings li
468. spersky PURE window to do so in the Security section click Password Manager The application settings window consists of two parts e the left part of the window contains the list of application functions e the right part of the window contains the list of settings for the chosen function task etc My PASSWORD MANAGER CAPTION BUTTON The Caption Button enables you to work with personal data from the application browser window This button is located in the upper right corner of the application The Caption Button is active if Password Manager is not locked Click it to do the following e Add Account add a new account e Manage Account add a user name edit the activated account The menu item is available if the account is activated e Web Accounts view the list of all Web accounts and open one of them The number of accounts in the Password Database is specified in brackets e List of frequently used accounts launch an account from the list The list is generated automatically based on how frequently the accounts are used The list is available in the menu if it is additionally configured to be displayed see page 227 e Identities view the list of created Identities and select an Identity for the registration form e Help switch to the application s help section The Caption Button is not active if Password Manager is locked In such case clicking the button will not enable any acti
469. ss of data programs or equipment and unavailability or interruption of operations DISCLAIMER OF LIABILITY EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT NEITHER RECIPIENT NOR ANY CONTRIBUTORS SHALL HAVE ANY LIABILITY FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION LOST PROFITS HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THE PROGRAM OR THE EXERCISE OF ANY RIGHTS GRANTED HEREUNDER EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES GENERAL If any provision of this Agreement is invalid or unenforceable under applicable law it shall not affect the validity or enforceability of the remainder of the terms of this Agreement and without further action by the parties hereto such provision shall be reformed to the minimum extent necessary to make such provision valid and enforceable If Recipient institutes patent litigation against a Contributor with respect to a patent applicable to software including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit then any patent licenses granted by that Contributor to such Recipient under this Agreement shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed In addition if Recipient institutes patent litigation against any entity including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit alleging that the Program
470. st of its proper settings and their description and the list of tasks to execute To open the help file click the Help button in the required window or press the lt F1 gt key Documentation Kaspersky PURE installation package includes the User Guide document in PDF format This document contains descriptions of the application s features and options as well as main operation algorithms CONTACTING THE SALES DEPARTMENT If you have questions about selecting or purchasing Kaspersky PURE or extending your license please phone the Sales Department in our Moscow Central Office at 7 495 797 87 00 7 495 645 79 39 7 495 956 70 00 The service languages are Russian and English You can also send your questions to the Sales Department specialists by email sales kaspersky com DISCUSSING KASPERSKY LAB APPLICATIONS ON THE WEB FORUM If your question does not require an urgent answer you can discuss it with Kaspersky Lab specialists and other users of our forum at http forum kaspersky com In this forum you can view existing topics leave your comments create new topics and use the search engine KASPERSKY PURE Kaspersky PURE is a new generation of home network security solutions What really sets Kaspersky PURE apart from other software even from other Kaspersky Lab s products is the multifaceted approach to the user s home network security IN THIS SECTION RIigleifdleiube rege LEE 22 Hardware and Softw
471. stem will help the malefactor to know what operating My COMPUTER PROTECTION system the remote computer uses This in turn further restricts the number of potential attacks and correspondingly the time spent perpetrating them It also aids a hacker in attempting to use vulnerabilities characteristic of the operating system DoS attacks or Denial of Service attacks are the attacks which cause an unstable performance of a system or its crash Attacks of this type may affect the operability of information resources under attack for example blocking of Internet access There are two basic types of DoS attacks e sending the target computer specially created packets that the computer does not expect which cause the system either to restart or to stop e sending the target computer many packets within a timeframe that the computer cannot process which cause system resources to be exhausted The most flagrant examples for this group of attacks are the following types e The Ping of death attack consists of sending an ICMP packet with a size greater than the maximum of 64 KB This attack can crash some operating systems e Land attack consists of sending a request to an open port on the target computer to establish a connection with itself This sends the computer into a cycle which intensifies the load on the processor and can lead to crashing of some operating systems e The ICMP Flood attack consists of sending a large quanti
472. stribution The sole exception to this condition is redistribution of a standard UnZipSFX binary including SFXWiz as part of a self extracting archive that is permitted without inclusion of this license as long as the normal SFX banner has not been removed from the binary or disabled 3 Altered versions including but not limited to ports to new operating systems existing ports with new graphical interfaces versions with modified or added functionality and dynamic shared or static library versions not from Info ZIP must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source or if binaries compiled from the original source Such altered versions also must not be misrepresented as being Info ZIP releases including but not limited to labeling of the altered versions with the names Info ZIP or any variation thereof including but not limited to different capitalizations Pocket UnZip WiZ or MacZip without the explicit permission of Info ZIP Such altered versions are further prohibited from misrepresentative use of the Zip Bugs or Info ZIP e mail addresses or the Info ZIP URL s such as to imply Info ZIP will provide support for the altered versions 4 Info ZIP retains the right to use the names Info ZIP Zip UnZip UnZipSFX WiZ Pocket UnZip Pocket Zip and MacZip for its own source and binary releases WINDOWS INSTALLER XML WIX 2 0 LIBRARY The Windows Installer XML WiX
473. sys com chm Zip rar e iSwift This technology is a development of the iChecker technology for computers using an NTFS file system There are limitations to iSwift it is bound to a specific file location in the file system and can apply only to objects in NTFS SW To change the object scan technology 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the File Anti Virus component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected J In the window that will open on the Additional tab in the Scan technologies block select the required setting value PAUSING THE COMPONENT CREATING A SCHEDULE When certain programs which require considerable computer resources are in progress you can temporarily pause the operation of the File Anti Virus component which allows quicker access to objects To decrease the load and ensure quick access to objects you can set a schedule for disabling the component Pause task By schedule Schedule F At application startup Select Fa Pausing the task Pause task at Resume task at Help Figure 10 Creating a schedule SW 7o configure a schedule for pausing the component 1 2 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection In the windo
474. t Scan section 4 Inthe Run mode block click the Settings button for the task selected 5 In the window that will open on the Run mode tab in the User account block check de Run task as box Specify the user name and password FEATURES OF SCHEDULED TASK LAUNCH All scan tasks can be started manually or by a schedule Scheduled tasks feature an additional functionality for example you can pause scheduled scan if the screensaver is inactive or the computer is unlocked This functionality postpones the task launch until the user has finished working on the computer So the scan task will not take up system resources during the work To launch scan tasks only when the computer isn t in use any more please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe left part of the window select the required task in the Scan My Computer Full Scan Quick Scan Object Scan section 4 Inthe Run mode block click the Settings button for the task selected 5 Inthe window that will open on the Run mode tab in the Schedule block check he Pause scheduled scan when screensaver is inactive or computer is unlocked box RESTORING DEFAULT SCAN SETTINGS When configuring task settings you can always restore the recommended ones They are considered optimal recommended by Kaspersky Lab and grouped in the
475. t is activated on all web pages on the website SW To set automatic activation of the account please do the following 1 In the context menu of the application select Password Manager 2 Inthe Password Manager window under the Edit tab select the account from the My Passwords list and then open it by clicking Edit 3 Inthe displayed window under the Links tab select he Autoactivate account after loading checkbox Additionally specify one of the methods to activate the account for the web page FILLING IN ADDITIONAL FIELDS During authorization on a website other data is often requested in addition to password and user name Password Manager can automatically fill in additional fields You can set options for automatic fill in of additional fields for the account lt is possible to set options for additional fields if the application path website address is specified To set options for fields Password Manager temporarily loads the website and analyzes all the fields and buttons Fields and buttons are merged into groups for each web page Password Manager temporarily saves files and pictures on your computer from the loaded web page Sg To set options for additional fields please do the following 1 Inthe context menu of the application select Password Manager 2 Inthe Password Manager window under the Edit tab select the account from the My Passwords list and open it for editing by clicking Edit 3 In the window
476. t menu 5 Select the Clear Safe Run data on exit item The box will be displayed next to the menu item and the sign will appear on the application icon in the list of applications running in safe mode To disable clearing data saved during an application s session in safe mode select this item again USING A SHARED FOLDER When working in safe mode all changes required due to the application s operation are only made in safe mode so they do not affect the standard mode Thus files saved in safe mode cannot be transferred to the standard mode For the files saved or modified in safe mode to be available in standard mode Safe Run Shared Folder can be used provided by Computer Protection All files saved in this folder when working in safe mode will be available in standard mode Shared folder is a folder on the hard drive created when you install Computer Protection The shared folder is created in the Al UsersProfile Application Data Kaspersky Lab SandboxShared folder during application installation and its location cannot be changed The shared folder is indicated with the Wi icon in the Microsoft Windows Explorer You can also go to the folder from the Computer Protection s main window To open the shared folder from the Computer Protection s main window please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Application Control
477. t not be misrepresented as being the original software 3 This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution USING THIRD PARTY CODE OPENSSL 0 9 8D LIBRARY The OpenSSL 0 9 8d copyright 1998 2007 The OpenSSL Project library was used during application development All rights reserved under OpenSSL License and Original SSLeay License hitp www openssl org OpenSSL License Copyright c 1998 2007 The OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http Awww openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this softwa
478. t of the window click the Support link In the Support window that opens click the Support tools link In the Information for Technical Support Service window that opens in the Actions section click the Upload information for Technical Support Service to the server button ELIMINATING PROBLEMS 5 In the window that will open check boxes next to the tracing files you wish to send to the Support service and click the Send button 6 Inthe Enter request number window that opens click the Cancel button and confirm saving files to the disk 7 Specify the archive name in the window that will open Later on you will be able to send the saved files to Technical Support with the help of My Kaspersky Account https support kaspersky com ru personalcabinet LANG en EXECUTING AVZ SCRIPT Kaspersky Lab experts will analyze your problem using the tracing files and the system state report The outcome of the analysis is a sequence of actions aimed at eliminating the problems detected The list of such actions can be rather long To simplify the procedure AVZ scripts are used An AVZ script is a set of instructions allowing to edit registry keys quarantine files search for classes of files and potentially quarantine files related to them block UserMode and KernelMode interceptors and etc To run the scripts the application includes an AVZ script execution wizard This wizard consists of a series of screens steps navigated using the Ba
479. t the Reports section and in the dropdown menu select the user account for which you want to see the report Brief statistics for downloading files from the Internet for the selected account will be displayed in the Internet section To obtain a detailed report please do the following 1 2 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button In the window that will open select the Reports section and in the dropdown menu select the user account for which you want to see the report Click the Detailed report link In the window that will open in the Internet section select the Downloading files component A detailed report will be displayed in the Downloading files window that will open You can also open the detailed report in the Users section by clicking the Detailed report button SAFE SEARCH MODE Some search engines strive to protect users from inappropriate web sites content To do this during web sites indexing they use some key words and phrases web sites addresses and categories To enable safe search mode the following categories of web sites are excluded from the search porn drugs violence and other sites aimed at adult audience Parental Control allows to switch on the secure search mode for the following search engines simultaneously Google Bing com SW To switch on the safe search mode please do the following 1 2 Open the main application window and click the Paren
480. t the Users section select a user account for which a restriction should be created and click the Configure button In the window that will open select the Internet section and then Access to web sites component In the Control access to web sites window that will open check the H Enable box and impose the restrictions on access to websites On the Blocked web addresses and Allowed web addresses tabs you can enter the addresses of allowed and blocked web sites On the Not recommended tab you can choose the categories of web sites access to which should be blocked In the Action dropdown list select a default action for web sites not included in the list of allowed web sites If you have selected blocking web sites not included in the list of allowed web sites as a default action add the address of the proxy server to the list of Allowed web addresses to connect to the Internet using a proxy To view brief statistics please do the following 1 2 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button In the window that will open select the Reports section and in the dropdown menu select the user account for which you want to see the report Brief statistics on browsed web sites for the selected account will be displayed in the Internet section To obtain a detailed report please do the following 1 2 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button In the window
481. ta you can select only one object for deletion although the folder you have selected for deletion may contain several files or nested folders The folder you have selected for deletion may contain system files that cannot be deleted on penalty of operating system failures When system files and folders are found among the chosen data the wizard requests additional confirmation for their deletion Methods for permanent deletion of personal data are standardized They are based on multiple rewriting deleted information with ones zeroes or random symbols Deletion speed and quality may vary depending on the number of cycles You are offered to select one of the following data deletion standards e Quick delete Deletion process consists of two cycles of data rewriting writing zeroes and pseudorandom numbers The main advantage of this algorithm is performance speed Two cycles are enough to complicate the operations of data restoration tools Even if the file itself will be restored the data will turn out to be annihilated e GOST state standard P 50739 95 Russian Federation The algorithm carries out one rewriting cycle using pseudorandom numbers and protects the data from restoration with common tools This algorithm corresponds to protection class 2 out of 6 total according to the State Technical Commission classification e VSITR standard Germany The algorithm carries out seven rewriting cycles The algorithm is considered reliable but
482. tal Control button In the window that will open select the Users section select a user account for which a restriction should be created and click the Configure button In the window that will open in the Internet section select the Safe search component In the Control search results window that will open check the M Enable box INSTANT MESSAGING Controlling instant messaging means controlling correspondence contents and contacts with which the messaging is allowed You can create lists of allowed and blocked contacts specify key words see section Key words search on page 194 that all incoming messages will be checked for and also enter personal data See section Sending personal data on page 193 prohibited to be sent If messaging with a contact is prohibited then all messages addressed to this contact or received from it will be blocked Information on blocked messages and key word presence in messages Is displayed in the report In the full report you can see massage history for each contact Messaging control has the following restrictions imposed e lf the IM client was started before Parental Control messaging control will not be carried out until the IM client is restarted e When using HTTP proxies messaging control will not be carried out The current version of Parental Control ensures the control over communication via the following IM clients e ICQ e QIP e Windows Live Messenger MSN e Yahoo Mes
483. te passwords e Help opening the application s help section e Exit close the application When this option is selected the application will be unloaded from the computer s RAM If the application is not unlocked access to your personal data will be blocked In this case the context menu will only contain the following items Unlock Password generator Help and Exit My PASSWORD MANAGER WINDOW The main application window can be opened from the Password Manager context menu see page 211 To do so select the Password Manager item from the application context menu You can also set up the launch of the Password Manager main window by double clicking on the Password Manager icon in the taskbar notification area The Password Manager window can be divided into two parts e inthe upper part of the window you can select Password Manager functions and perform the main tasks e the lower part of the window contains a list of all accounts and other personal data and enables you to manage your personal information You can use the search field to find personal data in the Password Database The search field is located in the bottom part of the main application window APPLICATION SETTINGS WINDOW The settings window in Password Manager can be opened in one of the following ways e from the Password Manager context menu see page 211 to do so select the Settings item from the Password Manager context menu e from the Ka
484. ter version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Library does not specify a license version number you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation 14 If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these write to the author to ask for permission For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation write to the Free Software Foundation we sometimes make exceptions for this Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally NO WARRANTY 15 BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION 16 INNO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTE
485. text menu To do so open the application context menu and select the Accounts gt Name of group of accounts gt lt Account name gt gt Edit Account item e From the main application window e By clicking the Caption Button To do so open the Caption Button menu and select the Manage Account gt Edit Account item SW To change the field values and parameters of an element from the main window please do the following 1 Inthe context menu of the application select Password Manager 2 Inthe Password Manager window under the Edit tab select the element from the My Passwords list 3 Inthe displayed window modify the settings for the element USING PERSONAL DATA Password Manager sticks accounts to applications web pages for which they are used Password Database automatically searches for sticky accounts when applications web pages are launched If an account is found personal data is entered automatically If there is no sticky account in the Password Database Password Manager automatically offers you to add one to the Password Database see page 215 Some applications websites can use multiple user names Password Manager allows several user names to be saved for one account If a new user name was used during authorization Password Manager suggests adding it to the account see page 219 for the application or web page that was launched When the application web page is next launched a window with a list of user s
486. text menu of the application select Password Manager 2 Inthe Password Manager window that will open on the Backup tab click the Import button 3 Inthe Import Passwords window select the application from which passwords will be imported and click Load passwords 4 Inthe Password Manager File window select the file with passwords that you want to import and click Open To cancel the selection click Cancel 5 Inthe Load Password Manager window click Merge 6 Inthe Import passwords window check the M box next to the required accounts and then click the Import button To select all the accounts from the list check the box H next to the selected application WS To export Password Database please do the following 1 Inthe context menu of the application select Password Manager 2 Inthe Password Manager window that will open on the Backup tab click the Export to text file button 3 Confirm that you want to export the Password Database by clicking OK To avoid confirming the export of the password database in the future check the 4 Do not show this notification in future box 4 Inthe Export Password Database to unprotected file window that will open specify the name path and format of the file PASSWORD DATABASE BACKuP RESTORE Before any changes are made to Password Database a backup copy is automatically created The path of the reserve copy is set by default but you can change it see page 231 It is useful to
487. that will open select the Reports section and in the dropdown menu select the user account for which you want to see the report Click the Detailed report link In the window that will open select the Internet section and then Access to web sites component In the Access to web sites window that opens a detailed report will be displayed You can also open the detailed report in the Users section by clicking the Detailed report button DOWNLOADING FILES FROM THE INTERNET You can restrict file types that can be downloaded You can view statistics for downloaded and blocked files for each user account on the selected computer as well as a detailed report on the events My PARENTAL CONTROL SW To restrict downloading files from the Internet please do the following 1 2 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button In the window that will open select the Users section select a user account for which a restriction should be created and click the Configure button In the window that will open in the Internet section select the Downloading files component In the Control downloading files from the Internet window that will open check the J Enable box and select the file categories that should be allowed to download To view brief statistics please do the following 1 2 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button In the window that will open selec
488. that will open select the Restore section In the left part of the window select the search criteria from the dropdown lists of the filter As a result in the right part of the window the list will only contain backup copies that meet the specified conditions SW To find a backup copy by its name please do the following 1 2 Open the main application window and click the click the Backup button In the window that will open select the Restore section In the Search field in the left part of the window enter the full name of a file or a part of it As a result in the right part of the window the list will only contain the backup copies of files whose names start with the characters entered VIEWING BACKUP COPY DATA Before restoring data you can view the contents of the selected version of backup copy To do so you can open the latest version or select a version based on the date specified To open the most recent file version please do the following 1 2 3 4 5 Open the main application window and click the Backup button In the window that will open select the Restore section Select the storage where the required backup copies are located and click the Restore data button In the left part of the Restore data from storage window select an archive In the right part of the window select the required file from the list and click the Open button SW To open a file version based on the specified
489. the Caption Button e To prevent the Caption Button from being displayed when locking the Password Database in the Display Caption Button block check de Do not display button if Password Manager is locked box e Tocreate a list of browsers in which the Caption Button is available under Caption Button in web browsers check the box next to the required browser from the list ADDITIONAL FEATURES My Password Manager includes a number of other tools e Password generator can create secure passwords for accounts e The Password Manager pointer can quickly select an application web page and then automatically define the action for the chosen object IN THIS SECTION FPS S WONG WEE e EE 239 Password Manager e ln E 240 PASSWORD GENERATOR Data security depends directly on the strength of the passwords Data could be at risk in the following cases e one password is used for all accounts e the password is simple e the password uses information that is easy to guess e g family members names or dates of birth To ensure data security Password Manager allows unique and reliable passwords to be created for accounts Password Manager saves all generated passwords which means they do not need to be remembered A password is considered secure if it consists of more than four characters and contains special symbols numbers and upper and lower case letters Password security is determined by the following parameters
490. the component you have selected 5 In the window that will open on the General tab in the Protection scope block specify the required values for the settings SW To select the protocols to scan and the settings to integrate Mail Anti Virus into the system please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the Mail Anti Virus component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 In the window that will open on the Additional tab in the Connectivity block select the required settings EMAIL SCANNING IN MICROSOFT OFFICE OUTLOOK If you use Microsoft Office Outlook as the mail client you may configure additional settings for scanning your mail for viruses A special plug in is installed in Microsoft Office Outlook when you install Computer Protection It allows you to configure Mail Anti Virus settings quickly and determine when email messages will be scanned for dangerous objects The plug in comes in the form of a special Email protection tab located in the Tools Options menu On the tab you can specify the email scan modes To specify complex filtering conditions 1 Openthe main Microsoft Outlook window 2 Select Tools Options from the application menu 3 On the Email protection tab specify the r
491. the window 3 Inthe left part of the window select the required task in the Scan My Computer Full Scan Quick Scan Object Scan section 4 Inthe Run mode block click the Settings button for the task selected 5 Inthe window that will open on the Run mode tab in the Schedule block select the Manually option if you wish to start the scan task at the most suitable time If you wish the task to run periodically select By schedule and create a task launch schedule SW To configure automatic launches of skipped tasks 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button My COMPUTER PROTECTION 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe left part of the window select the required task in the Scan My Computer Full Scan Quick Scan Object Scan section 4 Inthe Run mode block click the Settings button for the task selected 5 In the window that will open on the Run mode tab in the Schedule block check the M Run skipped tasks box RUN MODE SPECIFYING AN ACCOUNT You can specify an account used by the application when performing a virus scan SW To specify an account 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe left part of the window select the required task in the Scan My Computer Full Scan Quick Scan Objec
492. tings disable Application Control create a protection scope see page 89 manage placing applications into groups see page 91 change the time for determining the application status see page 92 change the rule for application see page 92 change the rule for a group of applications see page 93 create a network rule for the application see page 93 specify exclusions See page 94 manage deleting rules for applications see page 94 To disable Application Control please do the following 1 2 3 4 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Application Control component In the right part of the window uncheck the M Enable Application Control box WS To edit Application Control settings please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Application Control component 4 Inthe right part of the window make the required changes of the component settings FIREWALL The Firewall component settings are grouped in this window see page 100 You can perform the following actions by editing the settings
493. tings have been changed If you altered the archive content by adding a new object to it modified the scan settings or updated the anti virus database the archive will be re scanned Limitations of iChecker technology e this technology does not work with large size files since it is faster to scan a file than check whether it was modified since it was last scanned e the technology supports a limited number of formats exe dil Ink ttf inf sys com chm zip rar DELETING AN OBJECT The method of processing objects which ends in it being physically deleted from its original location hard drive folder network resource We recommend that this method be applied to dangerous objects which for any reason cannot be disinfected MESSAGE DELETION Method of processing an email message that contains spam signs at which the message is physically removed This method is advised to apply to messages unambiguously containing spam Before deleting a message a copy of it is saved in the backup unless this option is disabled COMPRESSED FILE An archive file that contains a decompression program and instructions for the operating system for executing SECURITY LEVEL The security level is defined as a pre set component configuration EVENT SEVERITY LEVEL Description of the event logged during the operation of Kaspersky Lab application There exist four severity levels e Critical event e Functional failure e Warning e
494. tings in the window that will open PROACTIVE DEFENSE The Proactive Defense component settings are grouped in this window see page 107 You can perform the following actions by editing the settings e disable Proactive Defense e manage the list of dangerous activity see page 107 e change the application s reaction to dangerous activity in the system see page 108 e create a group of trusted applications see page 109 e monitor system user accounts See page 109 To disable Proactive Defense please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Proactive Defense component 4 Uncheck ie Enable Proactive Defense box in the right part of the window SW To proceed to editing the Proactive Defense settings please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Proactive Defense component 4 Inthe right part of the window make the required changes of the component settings NETWORK ATTACK BLOCKER This window groups the settings of the Network Attack Blocker component see page 110 You can perform the followi
495. tion in order to allow activities of the program by entering changes into the rule of the program s access to the system resources e Allow now Select this option to apply the selected action to all similar events detected during the application s session Application session is the time since the moment it was started until the moment it was closed or restarted e Make trusted Select this option to move the application to the Trusted group For the Block action you can select one of the following modes e Block always Select this option in order to block activities of the program by entering changes into the rule of the program s access to the system resources e Block now Select this option to apply the selected action to all similar events detected during the application s session Application session is the time since the moment it was started until the moment it was Closed or restarted e Terminate Select this option to interrupt the program s operation Additional action selection area Using this section you can select an additional action e Add to exclusions If you are sure that the object detected it is not malicious we recommend adding it to the trusted zone to avoid the program making repeat false positives when you use the object e Apply to all objects Check this box to force the specified action to be applied to all objects with the same status in similar situations NOTIFICATIONS IN THIS SECTION ODIECE Cam
496. tion running on your computer Depending on the threat rating every application is included to one of the following groups e Trusted Applications of that group are allowed to perform any network activity irrespectively of the network status e Low Restricted Applications of that group are allowed to perform any network activity in non interactive mode If you are using the interactive mode a notification will be displayed on the screen using which you can allow or block a connection or create an application rule using the Wizard see section Rule Creation Wizard on page 104 e High Restricted Applications of that group are not allowed to perform network activity in non interactive mode If you are using the interactive mode a notification will be displayed on the screen using which you can allow or block a connection or create an application rule using the Wizard see section Rule Creation Wizard on page 104 e Untrusted Any network activity is prohibited for the applications of that group You can modify rules for a whole group or for a certain application in group and also create additional rules for more accurate filtering of network activity Custom rules for individual applications have a higher priority than the rules inherited from a group After the application activity analysis Firewall creates rules regulating application s access to networks with specific status You can create additional rules for more flexibl
497. tion state window that will open current problems encountered on the selected computer are displayed My CONTROL CENTER MANAGING PROTECTION COMPONENTS Using Control Center you can remotely turn on off different protection components on the networked computers To turn on off a protection component remotely please do the following 1 2 Open the main application window and click the Control Center link in the top part of the window In the window that will open select the computer for which protection management is required and go to the Information section In the right part of the window select the Protection components status item In the window that opens enable disable the required protection component by clicking its name MANAGING LICENSES Using Control Center you can remotely check the license status on the networked computers renew the license or activate a new one SW To manage the license on a networked computer please do the following 1 2 Open the main application window and click the Control Center link in the top part of the window In the window that will open select the computer for which you want to view the list of problems and go to the Information section In the right part of the window that will open select the License manager item In the License manager window that will open take the required actions PARENTAL CONTROL MANAGEMENT Using the Control Center
498. tions by editing the settings e disable File Anti Virus e change security level see page 61 e change action to be performed on detected objects see page 61 e create a protection scope see page 62 e optimize the scan see page 63 e configure the scan of compound files see page 64 e change the scan mode see page 65 e use the heuristic analysis See page 63 e pause the component see page 66 e select a scan technology see page 65 e restore the default protection settings see page 67 if they have been edited SW To disable File Anti Virus please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the File Anti Virus component 4 Uncheck he Enable File Anti Virus box in the right part of the window SW To proceed to the File Anti Virus settings please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the File Anti Virus component 4 Inthe right part of the window select the component settings for security level and reaction to the threat Click the Settings button in order to switch to the other File Anti Virus settings MAIL AN
499. tions for the correct application installation e Getting started see page 37 This section describes the main operations which should be performed after the application is installed on your computer in order to ensure reliable protection e Application interface see page 50 This section describes the application user interface including the main window context menu notification service and other elements e My Computer Protection This section describes the operation of the components of My Computer Protection designed for protecting your computer from various threats e My Backup see page 181 This section contains the information about backup and data restoration from backup copies e My Parental Control see page 187 This section contains the information about the protection of home network users from threats emerging while working on the computer or surfing the Internet as well as the information related to the management of Parental Control settings e My System Tune Up This section contains the information about the wizards and tools that may be useful for advanced protection e My Virtual Keyboard see page 205 This section describes the way of using the virtual keyboard in order to protect your data from key loggers e My Data Encryption see page 206 This section describes the way of using encrypted containers in order to store confidential data e My Password Manager see page 241 This section describes th
500. tive mode suggests that to ensure connection between the server on the client computer a port to which the server will connect will be opened on the client computer unlike the passive mode when the client connects to the server The mode allows to control which exactly port will be opened The mechanism works even if a blocking rule was created By default active FTP mode is allowed Block connections if prompting for action is not available application interface is not loaded This setting allows to avoid disruption of the Firewall operation when the interface of Computer Protection is not loaded This is the default action Firewall functioning until complete system stop This setting allows to avoid disruption of the Firewall operation until the system is completely stopped This is the default action To modify advanced settings of the Firewall perform the following steps 1 2 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection In the window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Firewall component Click the Settings button for the component you have selected In the window that will open on the Filtering rules tab click the Additional button In the Additional window that will open make sure that the respective boxes are checked FIREWALL RULES A Firewall rule is an action performed by Firewall once it
501. to use in order to avoid slowing down the performance of full screen applications SW To enable the gaming profile please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Settings link in the top part 2 Inthe window that will open select the Gaming profile section 3 Check the W Use Gaming profile box and specify the required settings APPLICATION SETTINGS MANAGEMENT In this window you can use the following advanced functions of Kaspersky PURE e Exporting importing Kaspersky PURE settings see page 255 CONFIGURING KASPERSKY PURE SETTINGS e Restoring the default settings of Kaspersky PURE see page 255 EXPORTING IMPORTING KASPERSKY PURE SETTINGS Kaspersky PURE can import and export its settings This is a helpful feature when for example Kaspersky PURE is installed on your home computer and in your office You can configure the application the way you want it at home export those settings as a file on a disk and using the import feature load them on your computer at work The settings are stored in a special configuration file To export the current settings of Kaspersky PURE please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Settings link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe window that will open select the Application settings management section and click the Save button 3 Inthe window that will open enter the name of the configuration file and the path where it
502. tom part of the tab To remove an application from the list without its actual deletion uncheck the box next to its name EXCLUSION RULES Potentially dangerous software does not have any malicious functions but can be used as an auxiliary component for a malicious code since it contains holes and errors This category includes for example remote administration programs IRC clients FTP servers various utilities for halting or concealing processes keyloggers password crackers autodialers etc These programs are not classified as viruses not a virus They can be subdivided into different types such as Adware Joke Riskware etc for more details on potentially dangerous programs detected by the application see the Virus Encyclopedia at www viruslist com After the scan such programs may be blocked Since several of them are widely used by users you have the option of excluding them from the scan For example you may frequently use the Remote Administrator program This is a remote access program which allows you to work on a remote computer Computer Protection views the activity of this program as potentially dangerous and may block it If you do not wish the application to be blocked you should create an exclusion rule for the application which is detected as not a virus RemoteAdmin Win32 RAdmin 22 according to the Virus Encyclopedia Exclusion rules are sets of conditions that Computer Protection uses to verify if it can skip an obj
503. ts included in the report will be displayed as a table You can create a dataset to filter the information by specifying a restricting condition To do this click the area to the left of the heading of the table column for which you wish to impose a restriction The dropdown list will display possible values of the restricting conditions for example Yesterday for column Time Email message for column Object etc For each column select the required value You can choose the most suitable of them the query will be performed based on the restriction condition you specified If you wish to view all data select the All item in the list of restrictions Custom mmm All Today Yesterday Sunday Saturday Friday Figure 18 Specifying a restricting condition You can also specify the settings of a complex search in the form of an interval within which you need to select data about past events In order to do this select the Custom item in the drop down list of restrictions In the window that will open specify the required time interval see section Using complex filtering on page 179 For easy and simple report creation use the context menu to access any attribute that allows grouping and event querying Time o 24 Sort descending Date Today ev Sch Sort ascending My Update Cent a My Update ee Search IM Anti Virus fe Group by this field F Firewall event M Filter by this fi
504. ts malicious activity The component is designed around monitoring and analyzing the behavior of all applications installed on your computer Based on the actions being performed Computer Protection makes a decision whether the application is potentially dangerous or not So your computer is protected not only from known viruses but from new ones as well that still have not been discovered Network Attack Blocker see page 110 The Network Attack Blocker loads at the operating system startup and tracks incoming network traffic for activities characteristic of network attacks Once an attempt of attacking your computer is detected Computer Protection blocks any network activity of the attacking computer towards your computer Anti Spam see page 113 Anti Spam integrates into the mail client installed on your computer and monitors all incoming email messages for spam All messages containing spam are marked with a special header The option of configuring Anti Spam for spam processing deleting automatically moving to a special folder etc is also provided The component also analyzes email messages to detect phishing Network Monitor see page 29 The component designed to view information about network activity in real time mode Anti Phishing The component integrated into Web Anti Virus Anti Spam and IM Anti Virus which allows to check web addresses if they are included in the list of phishing and suspicious web addresses
505. ts that are not on this list you must add them to the list to protect traffic using these ports If you work in a non secure area you are recommended to use Web Anti Virus while working in the Internet If your computer is running on a network protected by a firewall of HTTP traffic filters Web Anti Virus provides additional security when using the Internet A collection of settings called the security level determines the way of scanning the traffic If Web Anti Virus detects a threat it will perform the assigned action Your web protection level is determined by a group of settings The settings can be broken down into the following groups e protection scope settings e settings that determine the efficiency of traffic protection using heuristic analysis scan optimization Kaspersky Lab advises you not to configure Web Anti Virus component settings on your own In the majority of cases selecting a different security level is sufficient SW To edit Web Anti Virus settings 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Web Anti Virus component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 Make the required changes in the component settings My COMPUTER PROTECTION IN THIS SECTION Component operation algor
506. ttings button for the component you have selected 5 Inthe window that will open on the Exact methods tab in the Consider message as not spam block check the I If it is from allowed sender box and click the Select button 6 Inthe List of allowed senders window that will open click the Add link 7 Inthe Email address mask window that will open enter the required address or mask CREATING THE LIST OF ALLOWED PHRASES The list of allowed phrases is used to store key fragments of messages which you have marked as useful mail You can create such a list You can also use masks for phrases When entering a mask you can use the and wildcards where represents any combination of characters and stands for any single character Examples of phrases and phrase masks e Hi Ivan An email message that contains this text only is a good email The use of the lines similar to the following lines is not recommended e Hi Ivan Message beginning with the Hi Ivan string belongs to useful mail e Hi Mail beginning with Hi and an exclamation mark in any part of the message is not spam e Ivan Mail beginning with Jan personal address followed by any character is not spam e kand An email message containing the van phrase is a good email If characters and are included into a phrase then they should be preceded by the character to prevent their misrecognition in Anti Spam Then two characters are used instead of
507. ty of ICMP packets to your computer The computer attempts to reply to each inbound packet which slows the processor to a crawl e The SYN Flood attack consists of sending a large quantity of queries to a remote computer to establish a fake connection The system reserves certain resources for each of those connections which completely drains your system resources and the computer stops reacting to other connection attempts Intrusion attacks which aim to take over your computer This is the most dangerous type of attack because if it is successful the hacker takes total control of your system Hackers use this attack to obtain confidential information from a remote computer for example credit card numbers passwords or to penetrate the system to use its computing resources for malicious purposes later e g to use the invaded system in a zombie network or as a platform for new attacks This group is the largest by the number of attacks included They may be divided into three groups depending on the operating system installed on the user s computer Microsoft Windows attacks Unix attacks and the common group for network services available in both operating systems The following types of attacks are the most wide spread among those using the network resources of operating systems e Buffer overflow attacks is a type of software vulnerability caused by a lack or deficiency of control when working with data arrays This is one of th
508. under this Agreement only provides you with a right of limited use under the terms and conditions of this Agreement Rightholder reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this Agreement 10 2 You acknowledge that the source code activation code and or license key file for the Software are proprietary to the Rightholder and constitutes trade secrets of the Rightholder You agree not to modify adapt translate reverse engineer decompile disassemble or otherwise attempt to discover the source code of the Software in any way 10 3 You agree not to modify or alter the Software in any way You may not remove or alter any copyright notices or other proprietary notices on any copies of the Software 11 Governing Law Arbitration This Agreement will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the Russian Federation without reference to conflicts of law rules and principles This Agreement shall not be governed by the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods the application of which is expressly excluded Any dispute arising out of the interpretation or application of the terms of this Agreement or any breach thereof shall unless it is settled by direct negotiation be settled by in the Tribunal of International Commercial Arbitration at the Russian Federation Chamber of Commerce and Industry in Moscow the Russian Federation Any award rendered by the arbitrator shall be final and binding on the
509. us objects will be skipped without processing Pop up messages inform the user about new events e Interactive In this mode the application reacts to events in the manner you have specified Once an event requiring your attention occurs the application displays notifications which offer you to select an action Notifications warning about the detection of an active infection are displayed irrespective of the protection mode you have selected STEP 4 CONFIGURING APPLICATION UPDATE This step of the Application Configuration Wizard will be skipped if you have selected the quick install mode The application settings edited at this step will be assigned the default values The quality of your computer s protection depends directly on regular updates of the databases and application modules In this window the Configuration Wizard asks you to select the update mode and to specify the schedule settings e Automatic update The application checks the update source for update packages at specified intervals Scanning frequency can be increased during anti virus outbreaks and decreased when there are none Having discovered new updates the program downloads and installs them on the computer This is the default mode e Scheduled updates time interval may change depending on the schedule settings Updates will run automatically according to the schedule created You can alter the schedule settings in the window that will open by clicking the Setting
510. uter access statistics for each user account on the selected computer as well as a detailed report on the events My PARENTAL CONTROL SW To limit daily computer usage 1 2 3 4 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button In the window that will open select the Users section select a user account for which a restriction should be created and click the Configure button In the window that will open in the Computer section select the Usage component In the Control using the computer window that opens check the W Enable box and specify time restrictions To view brief statistics please do the following 1 2 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button In the window that will open select the Reports section and in the dropdown menu select the user account for which you want to see the report Brief statistics on using computer for the selected account will be displayed in the Computer section SW To obtain a detailed report please do the following 1 2 Open the main application window and click the Parental Control button In the window that will open select the Reports section and in the dropdown menu select the user account for which you want to see the report Click the Detailed report link In the window that will open in the Computer section select the Usage component In the Usage window that will open a detail report w
511. uter is in danger of any possible type of threat It is recommended to select this status for networks not protected by any anti virus applications firewalls filters etc When you select this status the program ensures maximum security for this zone e Local network allow access to files and printers This status is recommended for zones with an average risk factor for example corporate LANs e Trusted network allow any network activity It is only recommended to apply this status to zones that in your opinion are absolutely safe where your computer is not subject to attacks and attempts to gain access to your data PHISHING ATTACK DETECTED Every time Computer Protection detects a phishing attack a special notification will pop up The notification will contain e The name of the threat phishing attack as a link to the Kaspersky Lab s Virus Encyclopedia with a detailed overview of the threat e The web address for the phishing attack e Possible responses e Allow continues phishing site downloading e Block blocks phishing site downloading To apply the selected action to all objects of the same status detected in the current session of protection component or a task operation check the Apply to all box The current session is the time from when the component is started until it is disabled or the application is restarted or the time from beginning a virus scan until it is complete SUSPICIOUS LINK DETECTED E
512. ution E 95 SI NEE 100 BOA LV RT 107 NEMORA el eier EE 110 EE 113 PME MMIC Ir eege ee 131 COMO UIST SCA EE 134 Biel 148 Configuring Computer Protection settings cccccccccccccccceeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeusceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaauasaeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeaas 154 COMPUTER FILE SYSTEM PROTECTION File Anti Virus prevents infection of the computer s file system It loads when you start your operating system and runs in your computer s RAM scanning all files that are opened saved or executed By default File Anti Virus scans only new or modified files A collection of settings called the security level determines the conditions for file scan If File Anti Virus detects a threat it will perform the assigned action File and memory protection level on your computer is determined by the following combinations of settings those creating a protection scope those determining the scan method those determining how compound files are scanned including scanning of large compound files those determining the scan mode those allowing to pause the component by schedule or during the operation of selected applications Kaspersky Lab s specialists advise you not to configure File Anti Virus settings on your own In most cases changing the security level will be enough To restore the default File Anti Virus settings select one of the security levels To modify File Anti Virus settings 1 2 Open the main appl
513. vel section click the Default level button for the component selected PROTECTING INSTANT MESSENGERS TRAFFIC Besides the additional features for comfortable Internet surfing instant messaging clients further referred to as M clients which have widely spread nowadays have caused potential threats to computer security Messages that contain URLs to suspicious websites and those used by intruders for phishing attacks may be transferred using IM clients Malicious programs use IM clients to send spam messages and URLs to the programs or the programs themselves which steal users ID numbers and passwords The IM Anti Virus component is designed to ensure safe operation of IM clients It protects the information that comes to your computer via IM protocols The product ensures safe operation of various applications for instant messaging including ICQ MSN AIM Yahoo Messenger Jabber Google Talk Mail Ru Agent and IRC The Yahoo Messenger and Google Talk applications use the SSL protocol In order for IM Anti Virus to scan the traffic of these applications it is necessary to use the encrypted connections scan see page 170 To do so check the M Scan encrypted connections box in the Network section Traffic is scanned based on a certain combination of settings If threats are detected in a message IM Anti Virus substitutes this message with a warning message for the user Your IM traffic protection level is determined by a group
514. vent display settings MY PARENTAL CONTROL My Parental Control allows to control different users actions on the local computer and in the network This module grants an ability to limit the access to resources and applications as well as view reports on the actions of users At the moment more and more children and teenagers have access to computer and Internet resources This fact raises a problem of security since working and messaging on the Internet is linked to a number of threats Among them e accessing web sites that can lead to wasting time chat rooms games or money e stores auctions e accessing web resources aimed at adult audience that contain porn extremist materials involving arms drugs and violence issues etc e downloading files infected by harmful programs e computer and Internet overuse which can be harmful to health e contacting unfamiliar persons who under the semblance of peers can steal user s personal data real name address hours when nobody s at home etc Parental control allows to lower the risks related to computer and Internet usage To ensure lowering these risks the module uses the following features e restricting computer and Internet access time e creating lists of web sites allowed and blocked for access as well as selecting categories of web sites content not recommended for viewing e enabling safe search mode e limiting downloading files from the Internet e creati
515. very time Computer Protection detects an attempt to open the website the address of which is contained in the list of suspicious web addresses a special notification will pop up The notification will contain e The website address NOTIFICATIONS e Possible responses e Allow continues the website download e Block blocks the website download To apply the selected action to all objects of the same status detected in the current session of protection component or a task operation check the Apply to all box The current session is the time from when the component is started until it is disabled or the application is restarted or the time from beginning a virus scan until it is complete INVALID CERTIFICATE DETECTED Security check for the connection via SSL protocol is performed using the installed certificate If an invalid certificate is detected when the connection to the server is attempted for example if the certificate is replaced by an intruder a notification will be displayed on screen The notification will contain the information about possible cause of error and will identify remote port and address You will be prompted to decide if the connection with an invalid certificate should be continued e Accept certificate continue connection with the website e Reject certificate interrupt connection with the website e View certificate view information about certificate LIMITING USING THE APPL
516. vice window that opens use the dropdown list in the Traces section to select the tracing level The tracing level should be set on the advice of the Technical Support specialist If no indications from Technical Support are available you are advised to set tracing level to 500 5 To start the tracing process click the Enable button 6 Reproduce the situation which caused the problem to occur 7 To stop the tracing process click the Disable button You can switch to uploading tracing results to Kaspersky Lab s server CONTACTING THE TECHNICAL SUPPORT SERVICE If you have already purchased Kaspersky PURE you can obtain information about it from the Technical Support service either over the phone or via the Internet Technical Support service specialists will answer any of your questions about installing and using the application They will also help you to eliminate the consequences of malware activities if your computer has been infected Before contacting the Technical Support service please read the support rules http support kaspersky com support rules An email request to the Technical Support Service You can ask your question in Russian English German French or Spanish The Technical Support Service will reply to your request in your Kaspersky Account https my kaspersky com ru index html LANG en and to the email address you have specified in your request Describe the problem you have encountered in
517. w that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window In the window that will open in the Protection section select the File Anti Virus component Click the Settings button for the component you have selected In the window that will open on the Additional tab in the Pause task block check e By schedule box and click the Schedule button In the Pausing the task window specify the time period in 24 hour HH MM format for which protection will be paused Pause task at and Resume task at fields My COMPUTER PROTECTION PAUSING THE COMPONENT CREATING AN APPLICATIONS LIST When certain programs which require considerable computer resources are in progress you can temporarily pause the operation of the File Anti Virus component which allows quicker access to objects To decrease the load and ensure quick access to objects you can configure the settings for disabling the component when working with certain applications Pause task E By schedule Schedule At application startup Fa Applications ca IIe fe ek Add Edit WS Delete Figure 11 Creating application list Browse Applications Configuring the disabling of File Anti Virus component if it conflicts with certain applications is an emergency measure If any conflicts arouse when working with the component please contact Kaspersky Lab s Technical Support Service http support kaspersky com The support specialist
518. w that will open in the Protection section select the File Anti Virus component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 Inthe window that will open on the General tab in the Protection scope section click the Add link 6 Inthe Select object to scan window select an object and click the Add button 7 After you have added all required objects click the OK button in the Select object to scan window 8 To exclude any objects from the list of objects to be scanned uncheck the boxes next to them SW To change the type of scanned objects 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button My COMPUTER PROTECTION 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the File Anti Virus component 4 Click the Settings button for the component you have selected 5 Inthe window that will open on the General tab in the File types block select the required parameter USING HEURISTIC ANALYSIS Objects are scanned using databases which contain descriptions of all known malware and the corresponding disinfection methods Computer Protection compares each scanned object with the database records to determine accurately if the object is malicious and if so into which class of malware it falls This approach is called signature analysis and is always used by default Since new ma
519. window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the window that will open in the Protection section select the Web Anti Virus component 4 Inthe Security level section click the Settings button for the component selected 5 Inthe Web Anti Virus window that will open in the Additional block check the CC Mark phishing and suspicious URLs in Microsoft Internet Explorer and Mozilla Firefox box SW To create the list of trusted web addresses please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 Inthe window that will open in the Protection section select the Web Anti Virus component 4 Inthe Security level section click the Settings button for the component selected 5 Inthe Web Anti Virus window that will open in the Additional block click the Settings button 6 Inthe Kaspersky URL Advisor window that will open select the On all web pages option and click the Exclusions button 7 Inthe List of trusted web addresses window that will open click the Add link 8 Inthe Address mask URL window that will open enter a trusted web address or a mask for trusted address SW To create the list of websites which content should be scanned 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Sett
520. wing 1 Open themain application window and click the My Computer Protection button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Application Control section 3 Inthe bottom part of the window in the Safe Run applications field click the Add link 4 Inthe menu that will open select the necessary application Once you select the Browse item a window will open in which you should specify the path to an executable file Once you select the Applications item the list of applications currently running will open After this the application icon will be added in the field To delete an application from the list of applications running in safe mode select it in the list and click the Delete link SELECTING THE MODE RUNNING AN APPLICATION By default all the applications installed on the computer can run both in standard mode and in safe mode When adding an application in the list of applications running in safe mode you can enable the Always run in safe mode option for it This means that the application will be run in safe mode regardless of the run mode whether using Microsoft Windows standard tools or Computer Protection tools You are not advised to enable the Always run in safe mode option for system applications and utilities since this can lead to an improper functioning of the operating system SW To run an application in safe mode only regardless of the run mode please do the following 1 Open the main application window and clic
521. with the name of the required task on it SW To start a virus scan task for a selected object from the Microsoft Windows context menu 1 Right click thename of the selected object 2 Select the Virus Scan item in the context menu that will open The progress and the results of the task execution will be displayed in the window that will open My COMPUTER PROTECTION CREATING A SHORTCUT FOR TASK EXECUTION The application provides the option of creating shortcuts for a quick start of full scan tasks and quick scan tasks This allows starting the required scan task without opening the main application window or the context menu WS To create a shortcut for scan task start please do the following 1 Openthe main application window and click the Settings link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe left part of the window select the Scan My Computer section 3 Inthe right part of the window in the Scan tasks quick run block click the Create shortcut button next to the name of the required task Quick Scan or Full Scan 4 Specify the path for saving a shortcut and its name in the window that will open By default the shortcut is created with the name of a task in the My Computer folder of the current computer user CREATING A LIST OF OBJECTS TO SCAN Each virus scan task has its own default list of objects These objects may include items in the computer s file system such as logical drives and email databases or other types of
522. word Database is unlocked After launching a web page or application Password Manager automatically enters the password user name and other personal data Thus you need not remember all the passwords you only need to remember one password Password Manager loads by default at system startup This component is built in into the application which allows personal data to be managed directly from the application window Password Manager monitors the actions of applications with passwords and prevents the interception and theft of personal data This component checks applications that use passwords or request them from other applications before asking you to allow or forbid a Suspicious action Additionally Password Manager can e save and use your passwords see page 221 e find accounts passwords user names and other personal information in the Password Database see page 222 e generate secure passwords see page 239 when registering new accounts e save all passwords on removable device e restore Password Database from backup copy see page 224 e protect passwords from unauthorized access see page 214 WS To launch Password Manager please do the following 1 Open the main application window 2 Inthe Security section click Password Manager IN THIS SECTION My Password Manager Tu 211 Belge lee EE 213 Password Database management nnn1nnnune1nnnnnrnnnnnsrntnrnrrnrrrnrrrrrrntrrrrttntttnnrntrrnrAtEE AAE EEEnEnEE
523. word Manager context menu and select the Accounts lt Account name gt item WS To use an Identity please do the following 1 Click the Caption Button in the upper right corner of the application browser window 2 Inthe menu that will open select the Identities gt lt Identity name gt item Password Manager automatically fills in the registration fields on the web page using data from the Identity FINDING PASSWORDS A search for personal data could be hindered in the following cases e Some passwords are not associated with applications websites e Password Database contains a large number of accounts Password Manager quickly finds passwords by the following parameters e account name e username e key words see page 216 key word search parameters are set additionally for each user name e web address for web addresses The search is performed both by full name and by initial letters and any characters included in the account name or link SW To find an account password please do the following 1 Inthe context menu of the application select Password Manager 2 Enter the text in the Password Manager window that will open in the search field To view the data of the account for which the password is entered press the ENTER key My PASSWORD MANAGER DELETING PERSONAL DATA Before making any changes to personal data Password Manager automatically creates a backup copy of the Password Database If this dat
524. xample an event can inform you of a successful completion of an application update or can record an error in the operation of a certain component that should be immediately eliminated To keep up with the events in Kaspersky PURE s operation use the notification service By default the user is notified of the events by pop up messages with an audio signal Notifications can be delivered in one of the following ways e Pop up messages appearing over the application icon in the system tray e Audio messages CONFIGURING KASPERSKY PURE SETTINGS e Email messages To disable notification delivery please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Settings link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe window that will open select the Notifications section and uncheck fe Enable events notifications box Even if the notification delivery is disabled information about events occurring in Kaspersky PURE s operation will be recorded in the report on the application s operation To select the notification delivery method please do the following 1 Openthe main application window and click the Settings link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe window that will open select the Notifications section and click the Settings button 3 Inthe Notifications window that will open select the notification delivery method SEE ALSO Disabling sound aleyiiilers ce E 251 Delivery Of notifications using CINAl
525. y Each Contributor disclaims any liability to Recipient for claims brought by any other entity based on infringement of intellectual property rights or otherwise As a condition to exercising the rights and licenses granted hereunder each Recipient hereby assumes sole responsibility to secure any other intellectual property rights needed if any For example if a third party patent license is required to allow Recipient to distribute the Program it is Recipient s responsibility to acquire that license before distributing the Program d Each Contributor represents that to its knowledge it has sufficient copyright rights in its Contribution if any to grant the copyright license set forth in this Agreement REQUIREMENTS A Contributor may choose to distribute the Program in object code form under its own license agreement provided that a it complies with the terms and conditions of this Agreement and b its license agreement i effectively disclaims on behalf of all Contributors all warranties and conditions express and implied including warranties or conditions of title and non infringement and implied warranties or conditions of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose USING THIRD PARTY CODE li effectively excludes on behalf of all Contributors all liability for damages including direct indirect special incidental and consequential damages such as lost profits iii states that any provisions which diffe
526. y implementations will support it So far as we are aware there are no patent restrictions on the remaining code USING THIRD PARTY CODE The IJG distribution formerly included code to read and write GIF files To avoid entanglement with the Unisys LZW patent GIF reading support has been removed altogether and the GIF writer has been simplified to produce uncompressed GIFs This technique does not use the LZW algorithm the resulting GIF files are larger than usual but are readable by all standard GIF decoders We are required to state that The Graphics Interchange Format c is the Copyright property of CompuServe Incorporated GIF sm is a Service Mark property of CompuServe Incorporated LIBUNGIF 3 0 LIBRARY The libungif 3 0 library was used during application development Copyright c 1997 Eric S Raymond Is used under the following conditions Permission is hereby granted free of charge to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files the Software to deal in the Software without restriction including without limitation the rights to use copy modify merge publish distribute sublicense and or sell copies of the Software and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so subject to the following conditions The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED A
527. y the user can provide information in accordance with the list below e Files and or file fragments for additional scan at Kaspersky Lab Transmission of those files and or file fragments will be done only if you accept the terms of this agreement No personal user data are collected processed or stored Submission of the data mentioned above is voluntary You can enable or disable the data collection option at any moment in the Feedback section of the settings window of the respective Kaspersky Lab product USING THIRD PARTY CODE Third party code was used to develop Kaspersky PURE IN THIS SECTION PON FE eebe 273 Crypto C library data security Software brand 273 To Goror O A EE 273 GS EE EI e E 273 ONU eine Ee Dray EE 274 PG MON AN este etctiss sess teen vats TE E ae ter gnseaecen E E see see cael TA 274 OpenSSL 0 9 80 library cccccccccccececeecceeeesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaeasaceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaeascdeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaaaeaaasaeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeaas 275 cecko SDR Er 276 ZID Te E 276 Bieieiale KEE e WR ee 276 GRAKI 2 BN ler EE 276 Se e EE 276 ATOZ Me oO MOAN EE 277 Windows Installer XML WiX 2 0 library E 277 Eeer 280 SUE el 280 PS IO A EE 280 Reie NY E 280 RFC1321 based RSA free MDS libraly enccccnssscsectaceindacdecedeamadcieciassannieus tenes aannaaien aaien aaa aE Ekaa 281 Windows Template Library WTL Zi 281 Eees eke eg lren EE 284 HIDUNG o O MOY E 285 Merael S ANY EE 285 IRIN TA ON
528. y an existing container please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Data encryption button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Select container button 3 In the window that will open specify the location of the container file CONNECTING AND DISCONNECTING CONTAINER When created a container is connected automatically If an existing container is specified it is disconnected by default You should connect the container to store data You can do that via Kaspersky PURE interface or the Microsoft Windows context menu If the container is stored on a removable medium you can configure the automatic connection of the medium when being connected A connected container is available to all computer accounts as a removable drive in the list of devices so we recommend that you disconnect the container when taking no actions on the data You can do that via Kaspersky PURE interface or the Microsoft Windows context menu SW To connect a container via the application interface please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Data encryption button 2 Inthe window that will open click the Connect button 3 Inthe window that will open enter the container connection settings and confirm the connection SW To connect a container via the context menu please do the following 1 Right click the container file icon or the desktop shortcut to open the context menu see section Creating
529. y default Computer Protection only scans potentially infectible files run from any hard drive network drive or removable medium You can expand or narrow down the protection scope by adding removing objects to be scanned or by changing the type of files to be scanned For example you wish to scan only exe files run from network drives However you should make sure that you will not expose your computer to the threat of infection when narrowing down the protection scope When selecting file types you should remember the following e Some file formats e g txt have a low risk of containing malicious code which could subsequently be activated At the same time there are formats that contain or may contain an executable code exe dll doc The risk of activating malicious code in such files is quite high e The intruder can send a virus to your computer with the extension txt which could be an executable file renamed as ixt file If you have selected the Files scanned by extension option such a file will be skipped by the scan If the Files scanned by format setting has been selected then regardless of the extension File Anti Virus will analyze the file header uncover that the file is an exe file and scan it for viruses WS To edit the object scan list 1 Open the main application window and click the My Computer Protection 2 Inthe window that will open click the Settings link in the top part of the window 3 In the windo
530. y stage use the Cancel button You can also switch between the wizard s steps that you have completed by using the browsing buttons in the top part of the window To create a backup task please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the click the Backup button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Backup section and click the Create button 3 The Backup Task Creation Wizard will be launched Let us take a closer look at the wizard s steps a Inthe Content window select the objects for which backup copies will be created b Inthe Storage window select the storage in which backup copies of files will be created c Inthe Schedule window specify the conditions for running the task d Inthe Summary window enter the name for the new task and confirm the task creation with the settings you have specified RUNNING A BACKUP TASK Backup tasks may be run automatically by a schedule or manually The actual task run mode is displayed in the list of tasks see the figure below Backup task Completed 13 minutes ago Storage on C available 7 2 GB of 7 2 GB Run mode Every 1 day s at 14 45 Figure 22 Backup task Automatic run schedule is configured at the creation of a task however it may be subsequently changed WS To run a backup task manually please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Backup button 2 Inthe window that will open select the Backup secti
531. you can remotely set restrictions and view the statistics of events related to the users activities on the networked computers and on the Internet or related to the instant messaging To configure Parental Control please do the following 1 2 3 Open the main application window and click the Control Center link in the top part of the window In the window that will open select a computer in the top part of the window and go to the Parental Control section In the right part of the window select an account and click the Configure button To view the statistics please do the following 1 2 Open the main application window and click the Control Center link in the top part of the window In the window that will open select a computer in the top part of the window and go to the Parental Control section In the right part of the window select an account and click the Detailed report button REMOTE SCAN FOR VIRUSES AND VULNERABILITIES Using the Control Center you can run a virus scan task remotely either for the whole network or for an individual computer Toscan the whole network for viruses please do the following 1 Open the main application window and click the Control Center link in the top part of the window 2 Inthe window that will open click the Perform virus scan link in the Actions for network block in the top part of the window 3 Inthe Group start of scan window that will open se

Kaspersky PURE - Parent Directory

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents